Sharp QT-CD161 Specifications

2007 Pontiac Solstice Owner Manual
Seats and Restraint Systems ....................... 7
Front Seats .............................................. 8
Safety Belts ............................................ 12
Child Restraints ...................................... 27
Airbag System ........................................ 42
Restraint System Check
......................... 56
Features and Controls ................................
Keys .......................................................
Doors and Locks ....................................
Windows
................................................
Theft-Deterrent Systems .........................
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle .......
Mirrors ....................................................
OnStar® System .....................................
59
60
65
70
72
76
93
94
M
Storage Areas ........................................ 98
Convertible Top ...................................... 99
Instrument Panel .......................................
Instrument Panel Overview ...................
Climate Controls ...................................
Warning Lights, Gages, and
Indicators
..........................................
Driver Information Center (DIC)
............
Audio System(s) ...................................
105
108
122
127
145
157
Driving Your Vehicle ................................. 189
Your Driving, the Road, and
Your Vehicle
..................................... 190
Towing
................................................. 231
1
Service and Appearance Care ..................
Service .................................................
Fuel ......................................................
Checking Things Under the Hood .........
Rear Axle .............................................
Bulb Replacement
................................
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement .....................................
Tires .....................................................
Appearance Care ..................................
Vehicle Identification .............................
2
233
235
237
242
279
280
283
284
314
325
Electrical System .................................. 326
Capacities and Specifications ................ 332
Maintenance Schedule .............................. 333
Maintenance Schedule .......................... 334
Customer Assistance Information ............. 361
Customer Assistance and
Information ........................................ 362
Reporting Safety Defects ...................... 379
Index .......................................................... 383
This manual describes features that may be
available in this model, but your vehicle may not
have all of them. For example, more than one
entertainment system may be offered or your
vehicle may have been ordered without a front
passenger or rear seats.
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,
PONTIAC, the PONTIAC Emblem, and the
name SOLSTICE are registered trademarks of
General Motors Corporation.
Keep this manual in the vehicle, so it will be there
if it is needed while you are on the road. If the
vehicle is sold, leave this manual in the vehicle.
This manual includes the latest information at
the time it was printed. We reserve the right
to make changes after that time without further
notice. For vehicles first sold in Canada, substitute
the name “General Motors of Canada Limited”
for Pontiac Division whenever it appears in
this manual.
Canadian Owners
Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. 15859544 A First Printing
©
A French language copy of this manual can be
obtained from your dealer or from:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
2006 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
3
How to Use This Manual
Many people read the owner manual from
beginning to end when they first receive their
new vehicle. If this is done, it can help you learn
about the features and controls for the vehicle.
Pictures and words work together in the owner
manual to explain things.
Index
A good place to quickly locate information about
the vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual.
It is an alphabetical list of what is in the manual
and the page number where it can be found.
Safety Warnings and Symbols
There are a number of safety cautions in this
book. We use a box and the word CAUTION to
tell about things that could hurt you if you were
to ignore the warning.
4
{CAUTION:
These mean there is something that could
hurt you or other people.
In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard
is. Then we tell you what to do to help avoid
or reduce the hazard. Please read these cautions.
If you do not, you or others could be hurt.
You will also find a
circle with a slash
through it in this book.
This safety symbol
means “Do Not,”
“Do Not do this” or
“Do Not let this happen.”
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Vehicle Symbols
Also, in this manual you will find these notices:
The vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown
along with the text describing the operation or
information relating to a specific component,
control, message, gage, or indicator.
Notice: These mean there is something
that could damage your vehicle.
A notice tells about something that can damage
the vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be
covered by your vehicle’s warranty, and it could
be costly. But the notice will tell what to do to help
avoid the damage.
When you read other manuals, you might see
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors
or in different words.
There are also warning labels on the vehicle.
They use the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
If you need help figuring out a specific name of
a component, gage, or indicator, reference
the following topics:
• Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1
• Features and Controls in Section 2
• Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3
• Climate Controls in Section 3
• Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators in
Section 3
• Audio System(s) in Section 3
• Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5
5
These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle:
6
Section 1
Seats and Restraint Systems
Front Seats ..................................................... 8
Manual Seats ................................................ 8
Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 9
Seatback Latches ........................................ 11
Power Lift Seat ........................................... 12
Safety Belts .................................................. 12
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone ........... 12
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts ............................................. 17
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............. 18
Driver Position ............................................. 18
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy .............. 25
Passenger Position ...................................... 26
Safety Belt Pretensioners ............................ 26
Safety Belt Extender ................................... 26
Child Restraints ............................................ 27
Older Children ............................................. 27
Infants and Young Children ......................... 30
Child Restraint Systems .............................. 33
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) .................................................. 37
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Passenger Seat Position .......................... 38
Airbag System .............................................. 42
Where Are the Airbags? .............................. 45
When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................. 47
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ................... 48
How Does an Airbag Restrain? ................... 48
What Will You See After an
Airbag Inflates? ........................................ 48
Passenger Sensing System ......................... 50
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...... 54
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .......................... 55
Restraint System Check ............................... 56
Checking the Restraint Systems .................. 56
Replacing Restraint System Parts After
a Crash ................................................... 57
7
Front Seats
Manual Seats
Lift the lever located
under the front of the
seat to unlock it.
{CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if
you try to adjust a manual driver’s seat
while the vehicle is moving. The sudden
movement could startle and confuse you,
or make you push a pedal when you do
not want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only
when the vehicle is not moving.
8
Slide the seat to where you want it and release
the lever. Try to move the seat with your body to
be sure the seat is locked in place.
Make sure nothing is in front of or under the seat
to prevent it from releasing or re-locking after
adjustment.
Reclining Seatbacks
{CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if
you try to adjust a manual driver’s seat
while the vehicle is moving. The sudden
movement could startle and confuse you,
or make you push a pedal when you do
not want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only
when the vehicle is not moving.
To adjust the seatback, turn the knob on the
outboard side of the seatback until the seatback
is in the desired position.
9
{CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when your
vehicle is in motion can be dangerous.
Even if you buckle up, your safety belts
cannot do their job when you are reclined
like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its job. In a
crash, you could go into it, receiving neck
or other injuries.
The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a
crash the belt could go up over your
abdomen. The belt forces would be there,
not at your pelvic bones. This could cause
serious internal injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is
in motion, have the seatback upright.
Then sit well back in the seat and wear
your safety belt properly.
Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is
moving.
10
Seatback Latches
The seats have a latch
located on the outboard
side near the top of
the seatback that
enables the front
seatback(s) to fold
forward.
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could
move forward in a sudden stop or crash.
That could cause injury to the person
sitting there. Always push and pull on
the seatback to be sure it is locked.
This allows access to the map pocket on the rear
of the seatback.
To fold the seatback forward, lift the latch and
push the seatback forward.
11
Power Lift Seat
Your vehicle may have this feature.
Safety Belts
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
This part of the manual tells you how to use
safety belts properly. It also tells you some things
you should not do with safety belts.
{CAUTION:
The switch is located on the outboard side of the
driver’s seat. To use the adjuster, first move the
seat forward or rearward to where you want it. See
Manual Seats on page 8. To raise the seat hold the
switch up. To lower the seat hold the switch down.
12
Do not let anyone ride where he or she
can not wear a safety belt properly. If you
are in a crash and you are not wearing a
safety belt, your injuries can be much
worse. You can hit things inside the
vehicle or be ejected from it. You can be
seriously injured or killed. In the same
crash, you might not be if you are buckled
up. Always fasten your safety belt, and
check that your passenger’s belt is
fastened properly too.
{CAUTION:
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a
cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle.
In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed. Do not allow people to ride in any
area of your vehicle that is not equipped
with seats and safety belts. Be sure
everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a safety belt properly.
Your vehicle has indicators to remind you and your
passenger to buckle your safety belts. See Safety
Belt Reminder Light on page 130 and Passenger
Safety Belt Reminder Light on page 130.
In most states and in all Canadian provinces,
the law says to wear safety belts. Here is
why: They work.
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you
do have a crash, you do not know if it will be a
bad one.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be
so serious that even buckled up, a person would
not survive. But most crashes are in between. In
many of them, people who buckle up can survive
and sometimes walk away. Without belts they could
have been badly hurt or killed.
After more than 40 years of safety belts in
vehicles, the facts are clear. In most crashes
buckling up does matter... a lot!
13
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast
as it goes.
Put someone on it.
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a
seat on wheels.
14
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle.
The rider does not stop.
The person keeps going until stopped by
something. In a real vehicle, it could be the
windshield...
15
or the instrument panel...
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle
does. You get more time to stop. You stop
over more distance, and your strongest bones
take the forces. That is why safety belts
make such good sense.
16
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far
from home, why should I wear safety belts?
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after an
accident if I am wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a
safety belt or not. But you can unbuckle a
safety belt, even if you are upside down. And
your chance of being conscious during and
after an accident, so you can unbuckle and get
out, is much greater if you are belted.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I
in an accident — even one that is not your
fault — you and your passenger can be hurt.
Being a good driver does not protect you
from things beyond your control, such as
bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)
of home. And the greatest number of
serious injuries and deaths occur at speeds
of less than 40 mph (65 km/h).
Safety belts are for everyone.
have to wear safety belts?
A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; so
they work with safety belts — not instead of
them. Every airbag system ever offered
for sale has required the use of safety belts.
Even if you are in a vehicle that has airbags,
you still have to buckle up to get the most
protection. That is true not only in frontal
collisions, but especially in side and other
collisions.
17
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
This part is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know
about safety belts and children. And there
are different rules for smaller children and babies.
If a child will be riding in your vehicle, see
Older Children on page 27 or Infants and Young
Children on page 30. Follow those rules for
everyone’s protection.
First, you will want to know which restraint
systems your vehicle has.
We will start with the driver position.
Driver Position
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here is how
to wear it properly.
1. Close and lock the door.
2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight.
To see how, see “Seats” in the Index.
18
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across
you. Do not let it get twisted.
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the
belt across you very quickly. If this happens,
let the belt go back slightly to unlock it.
Then pull the belt across you more slowly.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until
it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it
is secure.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Extender on page 26.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle
the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder belt.
It may be necessary to pull stitching on the
safety belt through the latch plate to fully
tighten the lap belt on smaller occupants.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and
snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a
crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones.
And you would be less likely to slide under the lap
belt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force at
your abdomen. This could cause serious or even
fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the
shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the
body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop
or crash.
19
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder
belt is too loose. In a crash, you would
move forward too much, which could
increase injury. The shoulder belt should
fit against your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give
nearly as much protection this way.
20
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt
is too loose. In a crash, you could slide
under the lap belt and apply force at your
abdomen. This could cause serious or
even fatal injuries. The lap belt should be
worn low and snug on the hips, just
touching the thighs.
A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearly
as much protection this way.
21
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a
crash, the belt would go up over your
abdomen. The belt forces would be there,
not at the pelvic bones. This could cause
serious internal injuries. Always buckle
your belt into the buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
22
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear
the shoulder belt under your arm. In a
crash, your body would move too far
forward, which would increase the chance
of head and neck injury. Also, the belt
would apply too much force to the ribs,
which are not as strong as shoulder
bones. You could also severely injure
internal organs like your liver or spleen.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm.
It should be worn over the shoulder at all times.
23
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted
belt. In a crash, you would not have the
full width of the belt to spread impact
forces. If a belt is twisted, make it straight
so it can work properly, or ask your
dealer to fix it.
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
24
To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way.
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out
of the way. If you slam the door on it, you can
damage both the belt and your vehicle.
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to
be seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder
belt, and the lap portion should be worn as low
as possible, below the rounding, throughout
the pregnancy.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it is
more likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash.
For pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to
making safety belts effective is wearing them
properly.
25
Passenger Position
Safety Belt Extender
To learn how to wear the passenger’s safety belt
properly, see Driver Position on page 18.
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you,
you should use it.
The passenger’s safety belt works the same way
as the driver’s safety belt — except for one
thing. If you ever pull the shoulder portion of the
belt out all the way, you will engage the child
restraint locking feature. If this happens, just let
the belt go back all the way and start again.
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealer
will order you an extender. When you go in to
order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear,
so the extender will be long enough for you.
To help avoid personal injury, do not let someone
else use it, and use it only for the seat it is
made to fit. The extender has been designed
for adults. Never use it for securing child seats.
To wear it, just attach it to the regular safety belt.
For more information see the instruction sheet
that comes with the extender.
Safety Belt Pretensioners
Your vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for the
driver and right front passenger. Although you
cannot see them, they are part of the safety belt
assembly. They help tighten the safety belts during
the early stages of a moderate to severe frontal
or near frontal crash if the threshold conditions for
pretensioner activation are met.
Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in
a crash, you will need to get new ones, and
probably other new parts for your safety belt
system. See Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash on page 57.
26
Child Restraints
Older Children
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
A: If possible, an older child should wear a
lap-shoulder belt and get the additional
restraint a shoulder belt can provide. The
shoulder belt should not cross the face
or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below
the hips, just touching the top of the thighs.
It should never be worn over the abdomen,
which could cause severe or even fatal internal
injuries in a crash.
According to accident statistics, children are safer
when properly restrained in the rear seating
positions than in the front seating positions.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats
should wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can
strike other people who are buckled up, or can be
thrown out of the vehicle. Older children need
to use safety belts properly.
27
Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder
belt, but the child is so small that the
shoulder belt is very close to the child’s
face or neck?
A: Move the child toward the center of the
vehicle, but be sure that the shoulder belt still
is on the child’s shoulder, so that in a crash
the child’s upper body would have the restraint
that belts provide.
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same
belt. The belt can not properly spread the
impact forces. In a crash, the two children
can be crushed together and seriously
injured. A belt must be used by only
one person at a time.
28
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is
behind the child. If the child wears the
belt in this way, in a crash the child might
slide under the belt. The belt’s force
would then be applied right on the child’s
abdomen. That could cause serious or
fatal injuries.
The lap portion of the belt should be worn low and
snug on the hips, just touching the child’s thighs.
This applies belt force to the child’s pelvic bones
in a crash.
29
Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This
includes infants and all other children. Neither the
distance traveled nor the age and size of the
traveler changes the need, for everyone, to use
safety restraints. In fact, the law in every state
in the United States and in every Canadian
province says children up to some age must be
restrained while in a vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Children can be seriously injured or
strangled if a shoulder belt is wrapped
around their neck and the safety belt
continues to tighten. Never leave children
unattended in a vehicle and never allow
children to play with the safety belts.
30
Every time infants and young children ride in
vehicles, they should have the protection provided
by appropriate restraints. Young children should
not use the vehicle’s adult safety belts alone,
unless there is no other choice. Instead, they need
to use a child restraint.
{CAUTION:
People should never hold a baby in their
arms while riding in a vehicle. A baby
does not weigh much — until a crash.
During a crash a baby will become so
heavy it is not possible to hold it. For
example, in a crash at only 25 mph
(40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) baby will
suddenly become a 240 lb (110 kg) force
on a person’s arms. A baby should be
secured in an appropriate restraint.
{CAUTION:
Children who are up against, or very close
to, any airbag when it inflates can be
seriously injured or killed. Airbags plus
lap-shoulder belts offer protection for
adults and older children, but not for
young children and infants. Neither the
vehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbag
system is designed for them. Young
children and infants need the protection
that a child restraint system can provide.
31
Q: What are the different types of add-on
child restraints?
{CAUTION:
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by
the vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic
types. Selection of a particular restraint should
take into consideration not only the child’s
weight, height, and age but also whether or not
the restraint will be compatible with the motor
vehicle in which it will be used.
For most basic types of child restraints, there
are many different models available. When
purchasing a child restraint, be sure it is
designed to be used in a motor vehicle. If it is,
the restraint will have a label saying that it
meets federal motor vehicle safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions
that come with the restraint state the weight
and height limitations for a particular child
restraint. In addition, there are many kinds
of restraints available for children with
special needs.
32
Newborn infants need complete support,
including support for the head and neck.
This is necessary because a newborn
infant’s neck is weak and its head weighs
so much compared with the rest of its
body. In a crash, an infant in a rear-facing
seat settles into the restraint, so the
crash forces can be distributed across
the strongest part of an infant’s body,
the back and shoulders. Infants always
should be secured in appropriate infant
restraints.
Child Restraint Systems
{CAUTION:
The body structure of a young child is
quite unlike that of an adult or older child,
for whom the safety belts are designed.
A young child’s hip bones are still so
small that the vehicle’s regular safety belt
may not remain low on the hip bones, as
it should. Instead, it may settle up around
the child’s abdomen. In a crash, the belt
would apply force on a body area that
is unprotected by any bony structure.
This alone could cause serious or fatal
injuries. Young children always should be
secured in appropriate child restraints.
An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use
in a motor vehicle, is an infant restraint system
designed to restrain or position a child on a
continuous flat surface. Make sure that the infant’s
head rests toward the center of the vehicle.
33
A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint
with the seating surface against the back of the
infant. The harness system holds the infant
in place and, in a crash, acts to keep the infant
positioned in the restraint.
34
A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint
for the child’s body with the harness and also
sometimes with surfaces such as T-shaped
or shelf-like shields.
Q: How Should I Use a Child Restraint?
A: A child restraint system is any device designed
for use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat,
or position children. A built-in child restraint
system is a permanent part of the motor
vehicle. An add-on child restraint system is a
portable one, which is purchased by the
vehicle’s owner. To help reduce injuries, an
add-on child restraint must be secured in
the vehicle. With built-in or add-on child
restraints, the child has to be secured within
the child restraint.
A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed
to improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt
system. Some booster seats have a shoulder belt
positioner, and some high-back booster seats
have a five-point harness. A booster seat can also
help a child to see out the window.
When choosing an add-on child restraint, be
sure the child restraint is designed to be
used in a vehicle. If it is, it will have a label
saying that it meets federal motor vehicle
safety standards. Then follow the instructions
for the restraint. You may find these
instructions on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both.
35
Securing an Add-on Child Restraint
in the Vehicle
{CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed
in a crash if the child restraint is not
properly secured in the vehicle. Make sure
the child restraint is properly installed
in the vehicle using the vehicle’s safety
belt, following the instructions that
came with that restraint, and also the
instructions in this manual.
To help reduce the chance of injury, the child
restraint must be secured in the vehicle. Child
restraint systems must be secured in vehicle seats
by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder
belt. A child can be endangered in a crash if the
child restraint is not properly secured in the
vehicle.
36
When securing an add-on child restraint, refer
to the instructions that come with the restraint
which may be on the restraint itself or in a booklet,
or both, and to this manual. The child restraint
instructions are important, so if they are not
available, obtain a replacement copy from the
manufacturer.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and
injure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly
secure any child restraint in your vehicle — even
when no child is in it.
Securing the Child Within the
Child Restraint
There are several systems for securing the child
within the child restraint. One system, the
three-point harness, has straps that come down
over each of the infant’s shoulders and buckle
together at the crotch. The five-point harness
system has two shoulder straps, two hip straps,
and a crotch strap. A shield may take the place
of hip straps.
A T-shaped shield has shoulder straps that are
attached to a flat pad which rests low against the
child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type shield has
straps that are attached to a wide, shelf-like shield
that swings up or to the side.
{CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed
in a crash if the child is not properly
secured in the child restraint. Make sure
the child is properly secured, following
the instructions that came with that
restraint.
Because there are different systems, it is important
to refer to the instructions that come with the
restraint. A child can be endangered in a crash
if the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint.
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH)
Some child restraints have a LATCH system. As
part of the LATCH system, your child restraint may
have lower attachments and/or a top tether. The
LATCH system can help hold the child restraint in
place during driving or in a crash. Some vehicles
have lower and/or top tether anchors designed
to secure a child restraint with lower attachments
and/or a top tether.
Some child restraints with a top tether are
designed to be used whether the top tether is
anchored or not. Other child restraints require that
the top tether be anchored. A national or local
law may require that the top tether be anchored.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing
child restraints have a top tether, and that
the tether be attached.
37
Your vehicle does not have lower anchors or top
tether anchors to secure a child restraint with
the LATCH system. If a national or local law
requires that your top tether be anchored, do not
use a child restraint in this vehicle because a
top tether cannot be properly anchored. You must
use the safety belts to secure your child restraint
in this vehicle, unless a national or local law
requires that the top tether be anchored. Refer to
your child restraint instructions and instructions
in this manual for securing a child restraint
using the vehicle’s safety belts.
38
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Passenger Seat Position
Your vehicle has a passenger’s airbag. A rear
seat is a safer place to secure a forward-facing
child restraint.
In addition, your vehicle has the passenger
sensing system. The passenger sensing system
is designed to turn off the passenger’s frontal
airbag when an infant in a rear-facing infant
seat or a small child in a forward-facing child
restraint or booster seat is detected. See
Passenger Sensing System on page 50 and
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 132
for more information on this including important
safety information.
CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can
be seriously injured or killed if the right
front passenger’s airbag inflates. This is
because the back of the rear facing child
restraint would be very close to the
inflating airbag. Be sure the airbag is off
before using a rear-facing child restraint
in the passenger’s position.
Even though the passenger sensing
system is designed to turn off the
passenger’s frontal airbag if the system
detects a rear-facing child restraint,
no system is fail-safe, and no one can
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance,
even though it is turned off.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
(Continued)
We recommend that rear-facing child
restraints be transported in vehicles with
a rear seat that will accommodate a
rear-facing child restraint, whenever
possible.
There is no top strap anchor in your vehicle.
Do not secure a child seat in your vehicle
if a national or local law requires that the top strap
be anchored, or if the instructions that come
with the child restraint say that the top strap must
be anchored. See Lower Anchors and Tethers
for Children (LATCH) on page 37 for more
information.
If you need to secure a forward-facing child
restraint in the passenger’s position, move the
seat as far back as it will go before securing the
forward-facing child restraint. See Manual Seats
on page 8.
39
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure
the child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow
the instructions that came with the child restraint.
Secure the child in the child restraint when and as
the instructions say.
1. Your vehicle has a passenger’s frontal airbag.
See Passenger Sensing System on page 50.
We recommend that rear-facing child
restraints not be transported in your vehicle,
even if the airbag is off. If your child restraint is
forward-facing, move the seat as far back
as it will go before securing the child restraint
in this seat. See Manual Seats on page 8.
When the passenger sensing system
has turned off the passenger’s frontal airbag,
the off indicator in the passenger airbag
status indicator should light and stay lit when
the vehicle is started. See Passenger
Airbag Status Indicator on page 132.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and
shoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety belt
through or around the restraint. The child
restraint instructions will show you how.
40
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button
is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle
the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way
out of the retractor to set the lock.
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child
restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt
to tighten the lap portion of the belt, and
feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor.
If you are using a forward-facing child
restraint, you may find it helpful to use your
knee to push down on the child restraint
as you tighten the belt. You should not be
able to pull more of the belt from the retractor
once the lock has been set.
41
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
8. If the airbag is off, the off indicator on the
instrument panel will be lit and stay lit
when the vehicle is started.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child
restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child
restraint.
Remove any additional material from the seat
cushion before reinstalling or securing the
child restraint and before a small occupant,
including a small adult, sits in the passenger
position.
If the on indicator is still lit, do not install a child
restraint in this vehicle and check with your dealer.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the
vehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way.
The safety belt will move freely again and be ready
to work for an adult or larger child passenger.
If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to
make sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not
pressing the child restraint into the seat cushion.
If this happens, slightly recline the vehicle’s
seatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible.
Airbag System
A thick layer of additional material such as a
blanket, or aftermarket equipment such as
seat covers, seat heaters and seat massagers,
located between the seat cushion and the
child restraint or small occupant, can affect
how the passenger sensing system operates.
Airbags are designed to supplement the protection
provided by safety belts. Even though today’s
airbags are also designed to help reduce the risk
of injury from the force of an inflating bag, all
airbags must inflate very quickly to do their job.
42
Your vehicle has an airbag for the driver and an
airbag for the right front passenger.
Here are the most important things to know about
the airbag system:
{CAUTION:
You can be severely injured or killed in a
crash if you are not wearing your safety
belt — even if you have airbags. Wearing
your safety belt during a crash helps
reduce your chance of hitting things
inside the vehicle or being ejected from it.
Airbags are “supplemental restraints” to
the safety belts. All airbags are designed
to work with safety belts, but do not
replace them.
{CAUTION:
Airbags are designed to deploy in
moderate to severe frontal and near
frontal crashes. They are not designed to
inflate in rollover, rear crashes, or in many
side crashes. And, for some unrestrained
occupants, airbags may provide less
protection in frontal crashes than more
forceful airbags have provided in the past.
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a
safety belt properly — whether or not
there is an airbag for that person.
43
44
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Airbags inflate with great force, faster
than the blink of an eye. If you are too
close to an inflating airbag, as you would
be if you were leaning forward, it could
seriously injure you. Safety belts help
keep you in position before and during a
crash. Always wear your safety belt, even
with airbags. The driver should sit as far
back as possible while still maintaining
control of the vehicle.
Anyone who is up against, or very close
to, any airbag when it inflates can be
seriously injured or killed. Airbags plus
lap-shoulder belts offer the best
protection for adults, but not for young
children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s
safety belt system nor its airbag system is
designed for them. Young children and
infants need the protection that a child
restraint system can provide. Always
secure children properly in your vehicle.
To read how, see Older Children on
page 27 and Infants and Young Children
on page 30.
There is an airbag
readiness light on the
instrument panel cluster,
which shows the
airbag symbol.
Where Are the Airbags?
The system checks the airbag electrical system
for malfunctions. The light tells you if there is
an electrical problem. See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 131 for more information.
The driver’s airbag is in the middle of the
steering wheel.
45
{CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant
and an airbag, the bag might not inflate
properly or it might force the object into
that person causing severe injury or even
death. The path of an inflating airbag
must be kept clear. Do not put anything
between an occupant and an airbag,
and do not attach or put anything on the
steering wheel hub or on or near any
other airbag covering.
The right front passenger’s airbag is in the
instrument panel on the passenger’s side.
46
When Should an Airbag Inflate?
Airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to
severe frontal or near-frontal crashes. But they are
designed to inflate only if the impact exceeds a
predetermined deployment threshold. Deployment
thresholds take into account a variety of desired
deployment and non-deployment events and
are used to predict how severe a crash is likely to
be in time for the airbags to inflate and help
restrain the occupants. Whether your frontal
airbags will or should deploy is not based on how
fast your vehicle is traveling. It depends largely
on what you hit, the direction of the impact,
and how quickly your vehicle slows down.
In addition, your vehicle has “dual stage” frontal
airbags, which adjust the restraint according
to crash severity. Your vehicle has electronic
frontal sensors, which help the sensing system
distinguish between a moderate frontal impact
and a more severe frontal impact. For moderate
frontal impacts, these airbags inflate at a level
less than full deployment. For more severe frontal
impacts, full deployment occurs.
If the front of your vehicle goes straight into a wall
that does not move or deform, the threshold level
for the reduced deployment is about 12 to 16 mph
(19 to 26 km/h), and the threshold level for a
full deployment is about 18 to 22 mph (28.9 to
35.4 km/h). The threshold level can vary, however,
with specific vehicle design, so that it can be
somewhat above or below this range.
Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash
speeds. For example:
• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a moving object.
• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash
speed than if the vehicle hits an object that
does not deform.
• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole),
the airbags could inflate at a different crash
speed than if the vehicle hits a wide object
(like a wall).
• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle,
the airbags could inflate at a different crash
speed than if the vehicle goes straight into
the object.
47
Frontal airbags are not intended to inflate during
vehicle rollovers, rear impacts, or in many
side impacts.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an
airbag should have inflated simply because of the
damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair
costs were. Inflation is determined by what the
vehicle hits, the angle of the impact, and how
quickly the vehicle slows down.
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
In an impact of sufficient severity, the airbag
sensing system detects that the vehicle is in a
crash. The sensing system triggers a release of
gas from the inflator, which inflates the airbag.
The inflator, airbag, and related hardware are all
part of the airbag modules inside the steering wheel
and in the instrument panel in front of the right front
passenger.
How Does an Airbag Restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the
steering wheel or the instrument panel. The
airbag supplements the protection provided by
safety belts. Airbags distribute the force of
the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper
body, stopping the occupant more gradually.
But airbags would not help you in many types of
collisions, including rollovers, rear impacts,
and many side impacts, primarily because an
occupant’s motion is not toward those airbags.
Airbags should never be regarded as anything more
than a supplement to safety belts, and then only in
moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal collisions.
What Will You See After an
Airbag Inflates?
After an airbag inflates, it quickly deflates, so
quickly that some people may not even realize the
airbag inflated. Some components of the airbag
module — the steering wheel hub for the driver’s
airbag or the instrument panel for the right front
passenger’s bag — may be hot for a short time.
48
The parts of the airbag that come into contact with
you may be warm, but not too hot to touch.
There may be some smoke and dust coming from
the vents in the deflated airbags. Airbag inflation
does not prevent the driver from seeing out of the
windshield or being able to steer the vehicle, nor
does it prevent people from leaving the vehicle.
{CAUTION:
When an airbag inflates, there may be
dust in the air. This dust could cause
breathing problems for people with a
history of asthma or other breathing
trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the
vehicle should get out as soon as it is
safe to do so. If you have breathing
problems but cannot get out of the vehicle
after an airbag inflates, then get fresh
air by opening a window or a door. If you
experience breathing problems following
an airbag deployment, you should seek
medical attention.
Your vehicle has a feature that may automatically
unlock the doors, turn the interior lamps on, and
turn the hazard warning flashers on when the
airbags inflate. You can lock the doors again, turn
the interior lamps off, and turn the hazard warning
flashers off by using the controls for those features.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate an airbag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur
from the right front passenger airbag.
• Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After
they inflate, you will need some new parts for
the airbag system. If you do not get them, the
airbag system will not be there to help protect
you in another crash. A new system will include
airbag modules and possibly other parts. The
service manual for your vehicle covers the need
to replace other parts.
• Your vehicle has a crash sensing and
diagnostic module which records information
after a crash. See Vehicle Data Collection and
Event Data Recorders on page 373.
• Let only qualified technicians work on the
airbag system. Improper service can mean that
an airbag system will not work properly. See
your dealer for service.
49
Passenger Sensing System
Your vehicle has a passenger sensing system.
The passenger airbag status indicator will
be visible when you turn your ignition key to
RUN or START.
United States
Canada
The words ON and OFF or the symbol for on
and off, will be visible on the instrument panel
during the system check. When the system check
is complete, either the word ON or the word
OFF, or the symbol for on or the symbol for off
will be visible. See Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator on page 132.
50
The passenger sensing system will turn off the
passenger’s frontal airbag under certain conditions.
The driver’s airbag is not part of the passenger
sensing system.
The passenger sensing system works with
sensors that are part of the passenger’s seat.
The sensors are designed to detect the presence
of a properly-seated occupant and determine if
the passenger’s frontal airbag should be enabled
(may inflate) or not.
Accident statistics show that children are safer
if they are restrained in the rear rather than
the front seat. We recommend that rear-facing
child restraints not be transported in your vehicle,
even if the airbag is off.
Never put a child in a rear-facing child restraint
in the right front passenger seat unless the
passenger airbag status indicator shows off
and the airbag is off. Here is why:
CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can
be seriously injured or killed if the right
front passenger’s airbag inflates. This is
because the back of the rear-facing child
restraint would be very close to the
inflating airbag. Be sure the airbag is off
before using a rear-facing child restraint
in the right front seat position.
Even though the passenger sensing
system is designed to turn off the
passenger’s frontal airbag if the system
detects a rear-facing child restraint,
no system is fail-safe, and no one can
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend
that rear-facing child restraints be
transported in vehicles with a rear seat
that will accommodate a rear-facing child
restraint, whenever possible.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
(Continued)
If you need to secure a forward-facing
child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as
far back as it will go. It is better to secure
the child restraint in a rear seat.
The passenger sensing system is designed to
turn off the passenger’s frontal airbag if:
• The passenger seat is unoccupied.
• The system determines that an infant is
present in a rear-facing infant seat.
• The system determines that a small child is
present in a forward-facing child restraint.
• The system determines that a small child is
present in a booster seat.
• A passenger takes his/her weight off of the
seat for a period of time.
• The passenger seat is occupied by a smaller
person, such as a child who has outgrown
child restraints.
• Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbag
system or the passenger sensing system.
51
When the passenger sensing system has turned
off the passenger’s frontal airbag, the off indicator
in the instrument panel will light and stay lit to
remind you that the airbag is off. See Passenger
Airbag Status Indicator on page 132.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove
the child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall
the child restraint following the child restraint
manufacturer’s directions and refer to Securing a
Child Restraint in the Passenger Seat Position
on page 38.
If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to
make sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not
pressing the child restraint into the seat cushion.
If this happens, slightly recline the vehicle’s
seatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible.
If the on indicator is still lit, do not install a child
restraint in this vehicle and check with your dealer.
The passenger sensing system is designed to
enable (may inflate) the passenger’s frontal airbag
anytime the system senses that a person of adult
size is sitting properly in the passenger’s seat.
52
When the passenger sensing system has allowed
the airbag to be enabled, the on indicator will light
and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is active.
For some children who have outgrown child
restraints and for very small adults, the passenger
sensing system may or may not turn off the
passenger’s frontal airbag, depending upon the
person’s seating posture and body build. Everyone
in your vehicle who has outgrown child restraints
should wear a safety belt properly — whether
or not there is an airbag for that person.
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the
passenger’s seat, but the off indicator is lit, it
could be because that person is not sitting properly
in the seat. If this happens, turn the vehicle off
and ask the person to place the seatback in
the fully upright position, then sit upright in the
seat, centered on the seat cushion, with the
person’s legs comfortably extended. Restart the
vehicle and have the person remain in this position
for about two minutes. This will allow the system
to detect that person and then enable the
passenger’s airbag.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
If this ever happens, have the vehicle
serviced promptly, because an adult-size
person sitting in the right front passenger’s
seat may not have the protection of the
frontal airbag. See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 131 for more on this, including
important safety information.
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light in the
instrument panel cluster ever comes on
and stays on, it means that something
may be wrong with the airbag system.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
A thick layer of additional material such as a
blanket, or aftermarket equipment such as seat
covers, seat heaters, and seat massagers can
affect how well the passenger sensing system
operates. Remove any additional material from the
seat cushion before reinstalling or securing the
child restraint and before a small occupant,
including a small adult, sits in the passenger
position. You may want to consider not using seat
covers or other aftermarket equipment if your
vehicle has the passenger sensing system. See
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 55 for more information about
modifications that can affect how the system
operates.
53
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle
Airbags affect how your vehicle should be
serviced. There are parts of the airbag system
in several places around your vehicle. You do not
want the system to inflate while someone is
working on your vehicle. Your dealer and the
service manual have information about servicing
your vehicle and the airbag system. To purchase
a service manual, see Service Publications
Ordering Information on page 380.
{CAUTION:
For up to 10 seconds, after the ignition is
turned off and the battery is disconnected,
an airbag can still inflate during improper
service. You can be injured if you are
close to an airbag when it inflates. Avoid
yellow connectors. They are probably part
of the airbag system. Be sure to follow
proper service procedures, and make sure
the person performing work for you is
qualified to do so.
The airbag system does not need regular
maintenance.
54
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get
Q: Is there anything I might add to the front
A: Changing or moving any parts of the
of the vehicle that could keep the airbags
from working properly?
A: Yes. If you add things that change your
vehicle’s frame, bumper system, height,
front end or side sheet metal, they may keep
the airbag system from working properly.
Also, the airbag system may not work properly
if you relocate any of the airbag sensors.
If you have any questions about this,
you should contact Customer Assistance
before you modify your vehicle. The phone
numbers and addresses for Customer
Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure on page 362.
my vehicle modified. How can I find out
whether this will affect my airbag system?
front seats, safety belts, the airbag sensing
and diagnostic module, steering wheel,
the instrument panel, or airbag wiring can
affect the operation of the airbag system.
If you have questions, call Customer
Assistance. The phone numbers and
addresses for Customer Assistance are
in Step Two of the Customer Satisfaction
Procedure in this manual. See Customer
Satisfaction Procedure on page 362.
55
Restraint System Check
Checking the Restraint Systems
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder
light and all your belts, buckles, latch plates,
retractors and anchorages are working properly.
Look for any other loose or damaged safety
belt system parts. If you see anything that might
keep a safety belt system from doing its job, have
it repaired. See Care of Safety Belts on page 317
for more information.
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in
a crash. They can rip apart under impact forces.
If a belt is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
56
Also look for any opened or broken airbag covers,
and have them repaired or replaced. The airbag
system does not need regular maintenance.
Notice: If you damage the covering for the
driver’s or the right front passenger’s airbag,
the airbag may not work properly. You may
have to replace the airbag module in the
steering wheel or both the airbag module
and the instrument panel for the right front
passenger’s airbag. Do not open or break the
airbag coverings.
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
{CAUTION:
A crash can damage the restraint systems
in your vehicle. A damaged restraint
system may not properly protect the
person using it, resulting in serious injury
or even death in a crash. To help make
sure your restraint systems are working
properly after a crash, have them inspected
and any necessary replacements made as
soon as possible.
If you have had a crash, do you need new belts?
After a very minor collision, nothing may be
necessary. But if the belts were stretched, as they
would be if worn during a more severe crash,
then you need new parts.
If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision
damage also may mean you will need to have
safety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced. New
parts and repairs may be necessary even if the belt
was not being used at the time of the collision.
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag
system parts. See the part on the airbag system
earlier in this section.
If the frontal airbags inflate, you will also need
to replace the driver’s and passenger’s safety belt
retractor assembly. Be sure to do so. Then the
new retractor assembly will be there to help protect
you in a collision.
After a crash you may need to replace the driver
and front passenger’s safety belt retractor
assemblies, even if the frontal airbags have not
deployed. The driver and front passenger’s safety
belt retractor assemblies contain the safety belt
pretensioners. Have your safety belt pretensioners
checked if your vehicle has been in a collision,
or if your airbag readiness light stays on after
you start your vehicle or while you are driving.
See Airbag Readiness Light on page 131.
57
✍ NOTES
58
Section 2
Features and Controls
Keys .............................................................. 60
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System .......... 61
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation ................................................. 62
Doors and Locks .......................................... 65
Manual Door Locks ..................................... 65
Power Door Locks ....................................... 66
Delayed Locking .......................................... 66
Automatic Door Lock ................................... 67
Automatic Door Unlock ................................ 67
Trunk .......................................................... 68
Windows ....................................................... 70
Manual Windows ......................................... 71
Power Windows .......................................... 71
Sun Visors .................................................. 71
Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................... 72
Content Theft-Deterrent ............................... 72
PASS-Key® III+ ........................................... 74
PASS-Key® III+ Operation ........................... 74
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ........... 76
New Vehicle Break-In .................................. 76
Ignition Positions ......................................... 77
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ............... 80
Starting the Engine ..................................... 80
Automatic Transmission Operation ............... 82
Manual Transmission Operation ................... 85
Parking Brake ............................................. 86
Shifting Into Park (P) (Automatic
Transmission) .......................................... 87
Shifting Out of Park (P) ............................... 89
Parking Your Vehicle (Manual
Transmission) .......................................... 89
Parking Over Things That Burn ................... 90
Engine Exhaust ........................................... 91
Running the Engine While Parked ............... 92
Mirrors ........................................................... 93
Manual Rearview Mirror .............................. 93
Manual Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ......... 93
Outside Manual Mirror ................................. 93
Outside Power Mirrors ................................. 94
OnStar® System ............................................ 94
Storage Areas ............................................... 98
Glove Box ................................................... 98
Cupholder(s) ............................................... 98
Center Console Storage Area ...................... 99
Convertible Top ............................................ 99
59
Keys
{CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the
ignition key is dangerous for many
reasons. They could operate the power
windows or other controls or even make
the vehicle move. The children or others
could be badly injured or even killed.
Do not leave the keys in a vehicle with
children.
60
One key works all of
the lock cylinders on
the vehicle.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System
Your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system
operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) Rules
and with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
Your vehicle has an Immobilizer Vehicle
Theft-Deterrent System. The key has a
transponder in the key head that matches a
decoder in the vehicle’s steering column. If a
replacement key or any additional key is needed,
you must purchase it from your dealer. The
key will have a 1 stamped on it. Keep the bar
code tag that came with the original keys. Give this
tag to your dealer if you need a new key made.
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in your
vehicle, you may have to damage the vehicle
to get in. Be sure you have spare keys.
In an emergency, contact Roadside Assistance.
See Roadside Assistance Program on page 368.
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other
than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
61
At times you may notice a decrease in operating
range. This is normal for any RKE system. If
the transmitter does not work or if you have to
stand closer to your vehicle for the transmitter to
work, try this:
• Check the distance. You may be too far from
your vehicle. You may need to stand closer
during rainy or snowy weather.
• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects
may be blocking the signal. Take a few steps
to the left or right, hold the transmitter
higher, and try again.
• Check to determine if battery replacement is
necessary. See “Battery Replacement”
under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation on page 62.
• If you are still having trouble, see your dealer
or a qualified technician for service.
62
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation
The vehicle’s doors can
be locked and unlocked,
and the trunk can be
unlatched from
about 3 feet (1 m) up to
60 feet (18 m) away
with the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter.
Q (Lock): Press the lock button to lock all the
doors. If enabled through the Driver Information
Center (DIC), the parking lamps may flash
once and the horn may chirp to indicate locking
has occurred. See “LOCK HORN” under DIC
Vehicle Personalization on page 152.
" (Unlock): Press the unlock button one time to
unlock the driver’s door. Press the unlock
button again within five seconds to unlock the
other doors. The interior lamps will come on and
stay on for 20 seconds or until the ignition is turned
on. If enabled through the DIC, the parking
lamps will flash once to indicate unlocking has
occurred. See “UNLOCK HORN” under DIC
Vehicle Personalization on page 152.
V (Trunk Release): Press and hold this button
for approximately one second to release the
trunk lid. The trunk release will only work if the
ignition is off or the vehicle speed is less than
2 mph (3 km/h).
L (Vehicle Locator/Panic Alarm): Press and
release this button to help locate your vehicle.
The horn will sound three times and the hazard
lamps will flash three times. Press and hold
the button for three seconds to sound the panic
alarm. The horn will sound and the hazard
lamps will flash for 30 seconds. The ignition must
be off for the vehicle locator/remote alarm to
work. Press the vehicle locator/panic alarm button
again or turn the ignition to ACC or RUN to
turn off the alarm.
The vehicle may have Remote Lock/Unlock
Confirmation. This feature provides feedback that
a command has been received by the vehicle.
The parking lamps will flash and the horn
may sound briefly. See “LOCK HORN” and
“UNLOCK HORN” under DIC Vehicle
Personalization on page 152 for programming
information.
Matching Transmitter(s) to Your
Vehicle
Each remote keyless entry transmitter is uniquely
coded to prevent another transmitter from
unlocking the vehicle. If a transmitter is lost or
stolen, a replacement can be purchased through
your dealer. Remember to bring any additional
transmitters so they can also be re-coded to match
the new transmitter. Once your dealer has
coded the new transmitter, the lost transmitter
cannot unlock the vehicle. The vehicle can have a
maximum of four transmitters coded to it.
63
Battery Replacement
Under normal use, the battery in the remote keyless
entry transmitter should last about four years.
If the battery is weak the transmitter will not work
within its normal range. It is probably time to
change the battery if you have to be very close to
the vehicle before the transmitter works.
Notice: When replacing the battery, use care
not to touch any of the circuitry. Static
from your body transferred to these surfaces
may damage the transmitter.
To replace the battery do the following:
1. Insert a flat object with a thin edge into the
notch, located below the trunk release
button, and pry the front and back apart.
2. Remove the old battery, but do not use a
metal object to do this.
3. Slide the new battery into the transmitter with
the positive side of the battery facing up. Use
a type CR2032 battery, or equivalent type.
4. Snap the front and the back of the transmitter
together.
5. Test the operation of the transmitter with the
vehicle.
64
Doors and Locks
CAUTION:
Manual Door Locks
• Young children who get into unlocked
{CAUTION:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
• Passengers, especially children, can
easily open the doors and fall out of a
moving vehicle. When a door is
locked, the handle will not open it.
You increase the chance of being
thrown out of the vehicle in a crash if
the doors are not locked. So, wear
safety belts properly and lock the
doors whenever you drive.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
vehicles may be unable to get out.
A child can be overcome by extreme
heat and can suffer permanent injuries
or even death from heat stroke.
Always lock your vehicle whenever
you leave it.
• Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down
or stop your vehicle. Locking your
doors can help prevent this from
happening.
There are a couple of ways to lock and unlock
your vehicle manually.
(Continued)
65
From inside the vehicle,
use the manual door
lock knob. Pull up or
down on the knob to
unlock or lock the door.
To lock either door from the outside, turn the key
toward the rear of the vehicle. To unlock the
door, turn the key toward the front of the vehicle.
Power Door Locks
You can use the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter to lock and unlock the doors from inside
or outside the vehicle. See Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 62 for
more information.
The power door lock switches are located on the
driver’s and passenger’s door.
Press the top of the switch to unlock all doors.
Press the bottom of the switch to lock all doors.
66
Delayed Locking
If your vehicle has power door locks, it will have
the delayed locking feature. This feature delays the
actual locking of the doors when the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is used to lock
the vehicle.
If any door is open when locking the vehicle using
the RKE transmitter, three chimes will sound
signaling that the delayed locking feature is active.
Five seconds after the last door is closed, both
doors will lock and the parking lamps will flash.
To cancel the delay and lock the doors immediately,
press the lock button on the RKE a second time.
If the key is in the ignition, this feature will not lock
the doors.
Your vehicle is programmed from the factory with
this feature turned off. To turn the feature on,
you must go through the Driver Information
Center (DIC), if the vehicle has one. See DIC
Vehicle Personalization on page 152.
Automatic Door Lock
Automatic Door Unlock
If your vehicle has power door locks, the doors will
automatically lock when the shift lever is moved
out of PARK (P) for a vehicle with an automatic
transmission. For a vehicle with a manual
transmission, the speed must be greater than
5 mph (8 km/h).
If your vehicle has an automatic transmission and
power door locks, the doors with automatically
unlock when the shift lever is moved into
PARK (P).
The automatic door locking feature cannot be
disabled.
If your vehicle has a manual transmission and
power door locks, the doors will automatically
unlock when the key is removed from the ignition.
The automatic unlock feature can be disabled
or programmed in different ways if the vehicle has
an automatic transmission and a Driver
Information Center (DIC). See DIC Vehicle
Personalization on page 152 for more information.
67
Trunk
To release the trunk lid from the outside, use the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, if the
vehicle has one. If your vehicle does not have an
RKE transmitter, see “Remote Trunk Release”
following.
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to drive with the trunk
lid open because carbon monoxide (CO)
gas can come into your vehicle. You
cannot see or smell CO. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death.
CAUTION:
68
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
If you must drive with the trunk lid open
or if electrical wiring or other cable
connections must pass through the seal
between the body and the trunk lid:
• Make sure all other windows are shut.
• Turn the fan on your heating or
cooling system to its highest speed
and select the control setting that will
force outside air into your vehicle. See
Climate Control System.
• If you have air outlets on or under
the instrument panel, open them all
the way.
See Engine Exhaust on page 91.
Remote Trunk Release
Emergency Trunk Release Handle
To open the trunk from inside the vehicle, press
the remote trunk release button located in the
glovebox.
Notice: Do not use the emergency trunk
release handle as a tie-down or anchor point
when securing items in the trunk as it
could damage the handle. The emergency
trunk release handle is only intended to aid a
person trapped in a latched trunk, enabling
them to open the trunk from the inside.
There is a glow-in-the-dark emergency trunk
release handle located inside the trunk on
the driver’s side. This handle will glow following
exposure to light. If someone is locked in the trunk,
they can pull the release handle and push the
trunk lid open from the inside to open the trunk.
The remote trunk release will only work when
either the ignition is off or in ACC, the parking
brake is engaged, or the vehicle speed is less than
2 mph (3 km/h).
69
Windows
{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets
in a vehicle with the windows closed is
dangerous. They can be overcome by the
extreme heat and suffer permanent
injuries or even death from heat stroke.
Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or a
pet alone in a vehicle, especially with the
windows closed in warm or hot weather.
70
Manual Windows
If your vehicle has
manual windows, use
the window crank
to open and close each
window.
In addition, the passenger’s door has a window
switch that controls that window. Press the front of
the switch to open the window. Pull the switch
up to close it.
Express-Down Window
The driver’s window has an express-down feature
which allows the window to be lowered fully without
pressing and holding the switch. Press the front of
the switch to the first position, and the window will
open a small amount. Press the switch down fully
and the window will go all the way down.
To stop the window while it is lowering, pull the
front of the switch up.
Power Windows
If your vehicle has
power windows, the
switches on the driver’s
door armrest control
both windows.
Sun Visors
To use the sun visor(s), pull the edge of the visor
nearest to the windshield toward you.
Visor Vanity Mirror
Your vehicle may have a driver’s side vanity
mirror. Swing down the sun visor and slide the
cover to expose the mirror.
71
Theft-Deterrent Systems
Arming the System
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some
cities. Although your vehicle has a number of
theft-deterrent features, we know that nothing we
put on it can make it impossible to steal.
While the ignition is off, press the remote keyless
entry transmitter lock button, to arm the system.
Content Theft-Deterrent
Your vehicle may have a content theft-deterrent
alarm system.
The security light,
located on the
instrument panel cluster,
will turn on to indicate
that arming has
been initiated.
Once the system is armed, the security light will
flash once every three seconds.
If the security light is flashing twice per second,
this means that a door is open.
72
The system will arm after either of these
things occur:
• Thirty seconds after all the doors are closed.
• Sixty seconds with any door open.
If you press the lock button on the transmitter a
second time while all the doors are closed,
the system will arm immediately. The system arms
in 60 seconds if a door is open, or after the
open door is closed.
If you do not want to arm the system, lock the car
with the manual door lock knobs.
Disarming the System
How the System Alarm is Activated
You can disarm the system by doing any one of
the following:
• Press the unlock button on the remote keyless
entry transmitter.
• Turn the ignition on.
If the system is armed, it can be activated by:
• Opening the driver’s door or trunk. This causes
a ten second pre-alarm chirping noise followed
by the horn sounding and lights flashing for
30 seconds.
• Opening a passenger’s door. This immediately
causes a full alarm of the horn sounding and
lights flashing for 30 seconds.
If the system is armed and the trunk is opened
using the trunk release button on the transmitter,
the system will temporarily disarm itself and re-arm
when the trunk has been closed. This allows you to
exit the vehicle, lock the doors using the transmitter,
or open the trunk using the transmitter without
having to disarm and re-arm the system.
Once the system is disarmed, the security light will
stop flashing.
After the 30 second alarm ends, the system will
re-arm itself.
How to Turn Off the System Alarm
To turn off the system alarm, do one of the
following:
• Press the lock button on the remote keyless
entry transmitter. The system will then
re-arm itself.
• Press the unlock button on the remote keyless
entry transmitter. This will also disarm the
system.
• Insert the key in the ignition and turn it on.
This will also disarm the system.
73
How to Detect a Tamper Condition
If you hear three chirps when you press the
unlock, lock, or trunk release buttons on the
remote keyless transmitter, it means that
the content theft security system alarm was
activated previously.
PASS-Key® III+
®
The PASS-Key III+ system operates on a radio
frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry
Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
74
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other
than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
PASS-Key® III+ uses a radio frequency
transponder in the key that matches a decoder in
your vehicle.
PASS-Key® III+ Operation
Your vehicle is equipped with PASS-Key® III+
(Personalized Automotive Security System)
theft-deterrent system. PASS-Key® III+ is a
passive theft-deterrent system. This means you do
not have to do anything special to arm or disarm
the system. It works when you insert or remove the
key from the ignition.
When the PASS-Key® III+ system senses that
someone is using the wrong key, it prevents
the vehicle from starting. Anyone using a
trial-and-error method to start the vehicle will be
discouraged because of the high number of
electrical key codes.
When trying to start the vehicle if the engine does
not start and the security light on the instrument
panel cluster comes on, the key may have a
damaged transponder. Turn the ignition off and
try again.
If the engine still does not start, and the key
appears to be not damaged, try another ignition
key. At this time, you may also want to check the
fuse, see Fuses and Circuit Breakers on
page 326. If the engine still does not start with the
other key, your vehicle needs service. If your
vehicle does start, the first key may be faulty. See
your dealer who can service the PASS-Key® III+
to have a new key made. In an emergency,
contact Roadside Assistance. See Roadside
Assistance Program on page 368.
It may be possible for the PASS-Key® III+ decoder
to “learn” the transponder value of a new or
replacement key. Up to 10 keys may be
programmed for the vehicle. The following
procedure is for programming additional keys only.
If your vehicle was first sold in Canada, or if all
the currently programmed keys are lost or do not
operate, you must see your dealer or a locksmith
who can service PASS-Key® III+ to have keys
made and programmed to the system.
See your dealer or a locksmith who can service
PASS-Key® III+ to get a new key blank that is cut
exactly as the ignition key that operates the
system.
To program the new key do the following:
1. Verify that the new key has a 1 stamped on it.
2. Insert the already programmed key in the
ignition and start the engine. If the engine
will not start, see your dealer for service.
3. After the engine has started, turn the key to
LOCK, and remove the key.
75
4. Insert the key to be programmed and turn it to
the RUN position within five seconds of the
original key being turned to the LOCK position.
5. The security light will turn off once the key has
been programmed.
6. Repeat Steps 1 through 5 if additional keys
are to be programmed.
If you are ever driving and the security light comes
on and stays on, you may be able to restart
your engine if you turn it off. Your PASS-Key® III+
system, however, is not working properly and
must be serviced by your dealer. Your vehicle is
not protected by the PASS-Key® III+ system at
this time.
If you lose or damage your PASS-Key® III+ key,
see your dealer or a locksmith who can service
PASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made.
76
Starting and Operating Your
Vehicle
New Vehicle Break-In
Notice: Your vehicle does not need an
elaborate break-in. But it will perform better in
the long run if you follow these guidelines
for the first 500 miles (805 km):
• Do not drive at any one constant speed,
fast or slow.
• Do not exceed 70 mph (113 km/h).
• Do not make full-throttle starts; also refrain
from using the full throttle while driving.
Avoid downshifting to brake, or slow,
the vehicle.
If these break-in procedures are not followed,
the vehicle’s engine, axle, or other parts
could be damaged.
Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles
(322 km) or so. During this time your new brake
linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops with
new linings can mean premature wear and
earlier replacement. Follow this breaking-in
guideline every time you get new brake linings.
Following break-in, engine speed and load can
be gradually increased.
Ignition Positions
With the key in the ignition switch, you can turn it
to four different positions.
If you have an automatic transmission, the ignition
switch cannot be turned to LOCK unless the
shift lever is in PARK (P).
If you have a manual transmission, the ignition
switch can be turned to LOCK in any shift
lever position.
{CAUTION:
Notice: Using a tool to force the key from the
ignition switch could cause damage or break
the key. Use the correct key and turn the key
only with your hand. Make sure the key is all the
way in. If it is, turn the steering wheel left and
right while you turn the key hard. If none of this
works, then your vehicle needs service.
9 (LOCK): This position locks your steering
If you have a manual transmission
removing the key from the ignition switch
will lock the steering column and result in
a loss of ability to steer the vehicle. This
could cause a collision. If you need to
turn the engine off while the vehicle is
moving, turn the key to ACC.
ACC (ACCESSORY): This position operates
some of your electrical accessories. It unlocks the
steering wheel and ignition.
column. It is a theft-deterrent feature. You will only
be able to remove your key when the ignition is
turned to LOCK.
77
R (RUN): This is the position the switch returns to
after you start your engine and release the
switch. The switch stays in RUN when the engine
is running. But even when the ignition is not
running, you can use RUN to operate your
electrical accessories and to display some warning
and indicator lights.
The battery could be drained if you leave the key
in the ACC or RUN position with the engine
off. You may not be able to start your vehicle if
the battery is allowed to drain for an extended
period of time.
/ (START): This position starts the engine.
When the engine starts, release the key.
The ignition switch will return to RUN for
normal driving.
A warning tone will sound if you open the driver’s
door while in LOCK or ACC, when the key has
not been removed from the ignition.
78
Key In the Ignition
Never leave your vehicle with the keys inside, as it
is an easy target for joy riders or thieves. If you
leave the key in the ignition and park your vehicle,
a chime will sound when you open the driver’s
door. Always remember to remove the key
from the ignition and take it with you. This will lock
the ignition and transmission. Also, always
remember to lock the doors.
The battery could be drained if you leave the key
in the ignition while your vehicle is parked.
You may not be able to start your vehicle after it
has been parked for an extended period of time.
Shift Lock Release
For vehicles with an automatic transmission, the
following procedure allows the ignition to be turned
to LOCK, and for the removal of the ignition key, in
case of a dead battery or low voltage battery.
1. Make sure the shift lever is in PARK (P).
3. Place your finger into the access hole and
locate the plunger.
4. Press and hold the plunger toward the driver’s
door while turning the ignition key to LOCK.
5. Remove the key.
2. Using a tool, pry off the cover to the lock
release access hole, located at the bottom
of the steering column.
Have your vehicle serviced at your dealer as soon
as possible.
79
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
Manual Transmission
Your vehicle has a Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) feature which will allow the radio
and power windows to continue to work up
to 10 minutes after the ignition is turned off.
The shift lever should be in the neutral position
and the parking brake engaged. Hold the
clutch pedal to the floor and start the engine. Your
vehicle will not start if the clutch pedal is not all
the way down. That is a safety feature.
Your vehicle’s radio will work when the ignition
key is in RUN or ACC. Once the key is turned off,
the radio and power windows will continue to
work for up to 10 minutes or until any door
is opened.
Starting the Engine
Place the transmission in the proper gear.
Automatic Transmission
Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N). Your engine will not start in
any other position -- this is a safety feature.
To restart when you are already moving, use
NEUTRAL (N) only.
Notice: Do not try to shift to PARK (P) if your
vehicle is moving. If you do, you could
damage the transmission. Shift to PARK (P)
only when your vehicle is stopped.
80
Starting Procedure
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn
the ignition key to START. When the engine
starts, let go of the key. The idle speed will go
down as your engine gets warm. Do not
race the engine immediately after starting it.
Operate the engine and transmission gently to
allow the oil to warm up and lubricate all
moving parts.
Your vehicle has a Computer-Controlled
Cranking System. This feature assists in
starting the engine and protects components.
If the ignition key is turned to the START
position, and then released when the engine
begins cranking, the engine will continue
cranking for a few seconds or until the vehicle
starts. If the engine does not start and the
key is held in START for many seconds,
cranking will be stopped after 15 seconds to
prevent cranking motor damage. To prevent
gear damage, this system also prevents
cranking if the engine is already running.
Engine cranking can be stopped by turning the
ignition switch to ACC or LOCK.
Notice: Cranking the engine for long periods
of time, by returning the key to the START
position immediately after cranking has ended,
can overheat and damage the cranking
motor, and drain the battery. Wait at least
15 seconds between each try, to allow
the cranking motor to cool down.
2. If the engine does not start after 5-10 seconds,
especially in very cold weather (below 0°F
or −18°C), it could be flooded with too much
gasoline. Try pushing the accelerator
pedal all the way to the floor and holding it
there as you hold the key in START for up to
a maximum of 15 seconds. Wait at least
15 seconds between each try, to allow the
cranking motor to cool down. When the engine
starts, let go of the key and accelerator. If
the vehicle starts briefly but then stops again,
do the same thing. This clears the extra
gasoline from the engine. Do not race the
engine immediately after starting it. Operate
the engine and transmission gently until the oil
warms up and lubricates all moving parts.
Notice: Your engine is designed to work with
the electronics in your vehicle. If you add
electrical parts or accessories, you could
change the way the engine operates. Before
adding electrical equipment, check with your
dealer. If you do not, your engine might not
perform properly. Any resulting damage would
not be covered by your vehicle’s warranty.
81
Automatic Transmission Operation
If your vehicle has an automatic transmission,
the shift lever is located on the center console
between the front seats.
There are several
different positions for
the shift lever.
PARK (P): This position locks the rear wheels.
It is the best position to use when you start
the engine because your vehicle cannot
move easily.
82
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your
vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly
set. Your vehicle can roll. If you have left
the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured.
To be sure your vehicle will not move,
even when you are on fairly level ground,
use the steps that follow.
Make sure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P)
before starting the engine. Your vehicle has an
automatic transmission shift lock control system.
You must fully apply your regular brakes first
and then press the shift lever button before you
can shift from PARK (P) when the ignition key is in
RUN. If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease
pressure on the shift lever and push the shift lever
all the way into PARK (P) as you maintain
brake application. Then press the shift lever button
and move the shift lever into another gear. See
Shifting Out of Park (P) on page 89.
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your
vehicle is moving forward could damage
the transmission. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Shift to
REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is
stopped.
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
At low vehicle speeds, you can also use
REVERSE (R) to rock your vehicle back and forth
to get out of snow, ice, or sand without damaging
your transmission. See If Your Vehicle is Stuck
in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 224 for
additional information.
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, the engine does
not connect with the wheels. To restart when
you are already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.
You can also use NEUTRAL (N) when your
vehicle is being towed.
{CAUTION:
Shifting into a drive gear while your
engine is running at high speed is
dangerous. Unless your foot is firmly on
the brake pedal, your vehicle could move
very rapidly. You could lose control and
hit people or objects. Do not shift into a
drive gear while your engine is running at
high speed.
Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N) with the engine running at high
speed may damage the transmission. The
repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Be sure the engine is not running at high
speed when shifting your vehicle.
83
DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving.
It provides better fuel economy for your vehicle.
If you need more power for passing, and you are:
• Going less than 35 mph (55 km/h), push the
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push
the accelerator all the way down.
The transmission will shift down to a lower gear
and have more power.
Downshifting the transmission in slippery road
conditions could result in skidding, see “Skidding”
under Loss of Control on page 208.
Notice: If your vehicle seems to start up
rather slowly or not shift gears when you go
faster, and you continue to drive your vehicle
that way, you could damage the transmission.
Have your vehicle serviced right away. You
can drive in LOW (L) when you are driving less
than 35 mph (55 km/h) and DRIVE (D) for
higher speeds until then.
FOURTH (4): This position is also used for
normal driving. However, it reduces vehicle speed
more than DRIVE (D) without using your brakes.
You might choose FOURTH (4) instead of
DRIVE (D) when driving on hilly, winding roads
and when going down a steep hill.
84
INTERMEDIATE (I): This position is also used for
normal driving. However, it reduces the vehicle’s
speed without using your brakes, for slight
downgrades where the vehicle would otherwise
accelerate due to steepness of grade. If constant
upshifting or downshifting occurs while driving
on steep hills, this position can be used to prevent
repetitive types of shifts. You might choose
INTERMEDIATE (I) instead of DRIVE (D) when
driving on hilly and winding roads.
LOW (L): This position reduces vehicle speed
more than INTERMEDIATE (I) without using your
brakes. You can use it on very steep hills, or
in deep snow or mud. If the shift lever is put in
LOW (L), the transmission will not shift into
low gear until the vehicle is going slowly enough.
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the
vehicle in one place on a hill using only the
accelerator pedal may damage the
transmission. If you are stuck, do not spin the
tires. When stopping on a hill, use the brakes to
hold the vehicle in place.
Manual Transmission Operation
This is the shift pattern
for a manual
transmission.
You can shift into FIRST (1) when you are going
less than 20 mph (32 km/h). If you have come to a
complete stop and it is hard to shift into FIRST (1),
put the shift lever in NEUTRAL and let up on
the clutch pedal. Press the clutch pedal back
down. Then shift into FIRST (1).
SECOND (2): Press the clutch pedal as you let
up on the accelerator pedal and shift into
SECOND (2). Then, slowly let up on the clutch
pedal as you press the accelerator pedal.
Here is how to operate your manual transmission:
FIRST (1): Press the clutch pedal and shift into
FIRST (1). Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal
as you press the accelerator pedal.
THIRD (3), FOURTH (4) and FIFTH (5): Shift into
THIRD (3), FOURTH (4) and FIFTH (5) the
same way you do for SECOND (2).
To stop, let up on the accelerator pedal and press
the brake pedal. Just before the vehicle stops,
press the clutch pedal and the brake pedal,
and shift to NEUTRAL.
NEUTRAL: Use this position when you start or
idle your engine.
85
REVERSE (R): To back up, press the clutch
pedal. After the vehicle stops, shift into
REVERSE (R). Slowly let up on the clutch pedal
as you press the accelerator pedal. If it is hard
to shift, let the shift lever return to NEUTRAL and
release the clutch pedal. Then press the clutch
pedal again and shift into REVERSE (R). Do
not attempt to shift into the fifth gear position prior
to shifting into REVERSE (R). Your transmission
has a lock out feature which prevents a fifth
gear to reverse gear shift.
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your
vehicle is moving forward could damage
the transmission. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Shift to
REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is
stopped.
Also, use FIRST (1) or REVERSE (R), along with
the parking brake, for parking your vehicle.
86
Parking Brake
The parking brake lever is located between the
front seats.
To set the parking brake, hold the brake pedal
down and pull up on the parking brake lever. If the
ignition is on, the brake system warning light will
come on. See Brake System Warning Light
on page 134.
To release the parking brake, hold the brake pedal
down. Pull the parking brake lever up until you can
press the release button. Hold the release button in
as you move the brake lever all the way down.
If you forget to release your parking brake, a chime
will sound and a warning message will be
displayed in the Driver Information Center (DIC)
when the vehicle is moving faster than 5 mph
(8 kph). See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 148.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause
premature wear or damage to brake system
parts. Verify that the parking brake is fully
released and the brake warning light is
off before driving.
Shifting Into Park (P)
(Automatic Transmission)
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your
vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly
set. Your vehicle can roll. If you have left
the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured.
To be sure your vehicle will not move,
even when you are on fairly level ground,
use the steps that follow.
1. Hold the brake pedal down and set the
parking brake.
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by holding
the button on the shift lever and pushing the
lever all the way toward the front of the vehicle.
3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.
4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you
can leave your vehicle with the ignition key in
your hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).
87
Leaving Your Vehicle With the
Engine Running
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle
with the engine running. Your vehicle
could move suddenly if the shift lever is
not fully in PARK (P) with the parking
brake firmly set. And, if you leave the
vehicle with the engine running, it could
overheat and even catch fire. You or
others could be injured. Do not leave your
vehicle with the engine running.
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and
your parking brake is firmly set before you leave it.
After you have moved the shift lever into PARK (P),
hold the regular brake pedal down. If the vehicle
has an automatic transmission, see if you can move
the shift lever away from PARK (P) without first
pushing the shift lock release button. If you can, it
means that the shift lever was not fully locked into
PARK (P).
88
Torque Lock
If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift
your transmission into PARK (P) properly,
the weight of the vehicle may put too much force
on the parking pawl in the transmission. You
may find it difficult to pull the shift lever out
of PARK (P). This is called “torque lock.” To
prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and then
shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave
the driver’s seat. To find out how, see Shifting Into
Park (P) (Automatic Transmission) on page 87.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift
lever out of PARK (P) before you release the
parking brake.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have
another vehicle push yours a little uphill to
take some of the pressure from the parking pawl
in the transmission, so you can pull the shift
lever out of PARK (P).
Shifting Out of Park (P)
Your vehicle has an automatic transmission shift
lock control system.
To shift out of PARK (P):
1. Apply the regular brake pedal.
2. Then press the shift lever button.
Parking Your Vehicle
(Manual Transmission)
Before leaving your manual transmission vehicle,
fully press the clutch pedal in, move the shift
lever in either FIRST (1) gear or REVERSE (R),
and firmly apply the parking brake. See Manual
Transmission Operation on page 85.
3. Move the shift lever to the desired gear.
If you are still unable to shift out of PARK (P):
1. Fully release the shift lever button.
2. While holding down the brake pedal, press
the shift lever button again.
3. Move the shift lever to the desired gear.
If you still cannot move the shift lever from
PARK (P), consult your dealer.
89
Parking Over Things That Burn
{CAUTION:
Things that can burn could touch hot
exhaust parts under your vehicle and
ignite. Do not park over papers, leaves,
dry grass, or other things that can burn.
90
Engine Exhaust
CAUTION:
(Continued)
• Your vehicle was damaged when
{CAUTION:
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the
gas carbon monoxide (CO), which you
cannot see or smell. It can cause
unconsciousness and death.
You might have exhaust coming in if:
• Your exhaust system sounds strange
or different.
• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
• Your vehicle was damaged in a
collision.
CAUTION:
driving over high points on the road
or over road debris.
• Repairs were not done correctly.
• Your vehicle or exhaust system has
been modified improperly.
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into
your vehicle:
• Drive it only with all the windows
down to blow out any CO; and
• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
(Continued)
91
Running the Engine While Parked
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if
you ever have to, here are some things to know.
{CAUTION:
Idling the engine with the climate control
system off could allow dangerous exhaust
into your vehicle. See the earlier caution
under Engine Exhaust on page 91.
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let
deadly carbon monoxide (CO) into your
vehicle even if the climate control fan is at
the highest setting. One place this can
happen is a garage. Exhaust — with
CO — can come in easily. NEVER park in
a garage with the engine running.
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.
See Winter Driving on page 220.
92
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your
vehicle if the automatic transmission shift
lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. Do not leave your vehicle when the
engine is running unless you have to.
If you have left the engine running, the
vehicle can move suddenly. You or others
could be injured. To be sure your vehicle
will not move, even when it is on fairly
level ground, always set the parking brake
and move the automatic transmission
shift lever to PARK (P), or the manual
transmission shift lever to NEUTRAL.
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle
will not move. See Shifting Into Park (P)
(Automatic Transmission) on page 87 and Parking
Your Vehicle (Manual Transmission) on page 89.
Mirrors
Manual Rearview Mirror
When you are sitting in a comfortable driving
position, adjust the mirror so you can see clearly
behind your vehicle. Grip the mirror in the
center to move it up or down and side to side.
The day/night adjustment allows you to adjust the
mirror to avoid glare from the lamps behind
you. Move the lever to the right for nighttime use
and to the left for daytime use.
Manual Rearview Mirror with
OnStar®
If the vehicle has this mirror, while sitting in a
comfortable driving position, adjust the mirror so
you can see clearly behind the vehicle. Grip
the mirror in the center and move it up and down
or side to side. The day/night control, located
at the bottom of the mirror, allows adjustment to
lessen glare from the lamps behind you. Move the
lever right for nighttime use; move the lever left
for daytime use.
There are three OnStar® buttons located at the
bottom of the mirror face. For more information
about OnStar® and the services it provides,
see OnStar® System on page 94.
Outside Manual Mirror
Adjust the outside rearview mirror so you can see
a little of the side of your vehicle, and the area
beside your vehicle from a comfortable driving
position. Some mirrors can be folded in to enter
narrow passageways.
93
Outside Power Mirrors
OnStar® System
The controls for the
outside power mirrors
are located on the
driver’s door.
Move the selector switch located next to the
four-way control pad to the left or right to choose
either the driver’s side or passenger’s side mirror.
To adjust a mirror, use the arrows located on the
four-way control pad to move the mirror in the
desired direction. Adjust each outside mirror so that
a little of the vehicle and the area behind it can be
seen while sitting in a comfortable driving position.
Both mirrors can be manually folded by pulling
them toward the vehicle. This feature may
be useful when going through a car wash or a
confined space. Push the mirrors away from the
vehicle to the normal position before driving.
94
OnStar® uses several innovative technologies and
live advisors to provide you with a wide range
of safety, security, information, and convenience
services. If your airbags deploy, the system is
designed to make an automatic call to OnStar®
Emergency advisors who can request emergency
services be sent to your location. If you lock
your keys in the vehicle, call OnStar® at
1-888-4-ONSTAR and they can send a signal to
unlock your doors. If you need roadside
assistance, press the OnStar® button and they
can contact Roadside Service for you.
OnStar® service is provided to you subject to the
OnStar® Terms and Conditions. You may cancel
your OnStar® service at any time by contacting
OnStar® as provided below. A complete OnStar®
Owners Guide and the OnStar® Terms and
Conditions are included in the vehicle’s OnStar®
Subscriber glove box literature. For more
information, visit onstar.com or onstar.ca, contact
OnStar® at 1–888–4–ONSTAR (1–888–466–7827)
or TTY 1–877–248–2080, or press the OnStar®
button to speak with an OnStar® advisor 24 hours a
day, 7 days a week.
OnStar® Services
For new vehicles with OnStar®, the Safe & Sound
Plan, or the Directions & Connections® Plan is
included for one year from the date of purchase.
You can extend this plan beyond the first year,
or upgrade to the Directions & Connections® Plan.
For more information, press the OnStar® button
to speak with an advisor. Some OnStar® services
(such as Remote Door Unlock or Stolen Vehicle
Location Assistance) may not be available
until you register with OnStar®.
Not all OnStar® features are available on all
vehicles. To check if your vehicle is equipped to
provide the services described below, or for a
full description of OnStar® services and system
limitations, see the OnStar® Owner’s Guide in your
glove box or visit onstar.com.
95
Available Services with Safe & Sound® Plan
• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment
• Advanced Automatic Crash Notification (AACN)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
(If equipped)
Link to Emergency Services
Roadside Assistance
Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance
AccidentAssist
Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert
OnStar® Vehicle Diagnostics
GM® Goodwrench® On Demand Diagnostics
OnStar® Hands-Free Calling with
30 complimentary minutes
• OnStar® Virtual Advisor ( U.S. Only)
Available Services included with
Directions & Connections® Plan
• All Safe and Sound Plan Services
• Driving Directions - Advisor delivered or
OnStar® Turn-by-Turn Navigation (If equipped)
• RideAssist
• Information and Convenience Services
96
OnStar® Hands-Free Calling
OnStar® Hands-Free Calling allows eligible
OnStar® subscribers to make and receive calls
using voice commands. Hands-Free Calling is fully
integrated into the vehicle, and can be used
with OnStar® Pre-Paid Minute Packages.
Hands-Free Calling may also be linked to a
Verizon Wireless service plan in the U.S. or a Bell
Mobility service plan in Canada, depending on
eligibility. To find out more, refer to the OnStar®
Owners Guide in the vehicle’s glove box, visit
www.onstar.com or www.onstar.ca, or speak with
an OnStar® advisor by pressing the OnStar®
button or calling 1-888-4-ONSTAR
(1-888-466-7827).
OnStar® Virtual Advisor
OnStar® Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar®
Hands-Free Calling that uses your minutes to
access location-based weather, local traffic reports,
and stock quotes. By pressing the phone button
and giving a few simple voice commands, you can
browse through the various topics. See the OnStar®
Owners Guide for more information (Only available
in the continental U.S.).
OnStar® Steering Wheel Controls
Your vehicle may have a Talk/Mute button that
can be used to interact with OnStar® Hands-Free
Calling. See Audio Steering Wheel Controls on
page 185 for more information.
On some vehicles, you may have to hold the
button for a few seconds and give the command
“ONSTAR” in order to activate the OnStar®
Hands-Free Calling feature.
On some vehicles, the mute button can be used to
dial numbers into voicemail systems, or to dial
phone extensions. See the OnStar® Owner’s
Guide for more information.
How OnStar® Service Works
In order to provide you with OnStar® services, your
vehicle’s OnStar® system has the capability of
recording and transmitting vehicle information. This
information is automatically sent to an OnStar® Call
Center at the time of an OnStar® button press,
Emergency button press or if your airbags or AACN
system deploys. The vehicle information usually
includes your GPS location and, in the event of a
crash, additional information regarding the accident
that your vehicle has been involved in (e.g. the
direction from which your vehicle was hit).
When you use the Virtual Advisor feature of
OnStar® Hands-Free Calling, your vehicle also
sends OnStar® your GPS location so that we can
provide you with location-based services.
OnStar® service cannot work unless your vehicle is
in a place where OnStar® has an agreement with a
wireless service provider for service in that area.
OnStar® service also cannot work unless you are in
a place where the wireless service provider
OnStar® has hired for that area has coverage,
network capacity and reception when the service is
needed, and technology that is compatible with the
OnStar® service. Not all services are available
everywhere, particularly in remote or enclosed
areas, or at all times.
OnStar® service that involves location information
about your vehicle cannot work unless GPS
satellite signals are unobstructed and available in
that place as well.
97
Your vehicle must have a working electrical system
(including adequate battery power) for the OnStar®
equipment to operate. There are other problems
OnStar® cannot control that may prevent OnStar®
from providing OnStar® service to you at any
particular time or place. Some examples are
damage to important parts of your vehicle in an
accident, hills, tall buildings, tunnels, weather or
wireless phone network congestion.
Storage Areas
Glove Box
To open the glove box, lift up on the lever. Use
the key to lock and unlock.
Cupholder(s)
Your Responsibility
You may need to increase the volume of your
radio to hear the OnStar® advisor. If the light next
to the OnStar® buttons is red, this means that
your system is not functioning properly and should
be checked by a dealer. If the light appears
clear (no light is appearing), your OnStar®
subscription has expired. You can always press
the OnStar® button to confirm that your OnStar®
equipment is active.
There are two cupholders located in the center
console, press and release to extend forward.
98
Center Console Storage Area
There is also an upright center console storage
area between the seatbacks. To open the storage
area, press and release the button near the top
so it extends out. Then, turn the button in
either direction to unlatch the lid and pull the
console lid down. Press the release button back in
after you close the lid.
Convertible Top
Your vehicle has a cupholder on the passenger
side of the center console. To access it, press and
release the forward section of the cupholder.
For care and cleaning of the convertible top, see
Convertible Top on page 320 under “Service
and Appearance Care”. High pressure car washes
may cause water to enter the vehicle.
The following procedures explain the proper
operation of the manual convertible top.
99
The parts of the manual convertible top that are
used when lowering and raising it are:
Notice: Lowering the convertible top when
there are objects in the storage area could
damage it or break the glass rear window.
Always verify that no objects are in the storage
area before lowering the convertible top.
Notice: Lowering the top if it is damp, wet, or
dirty can cause stains, mildew, and damage
to the inside of your vehicle. Dry off the
top before lowering it.
A. Front Edge
C. Rear Buttresses
B. Side Edge
D. Trunk
Notice: Leaving the convertible top down and
exposing the interior of your vehicle to
outdoor conditions may cause damage. Always
close the convertible top if leaving your
vehicle outdoors.
100
Notice: If you lower the top on your vehicle in
cold weather (0°F/-18°C or lower), you may
damage top components. Do not lower the top
in cold weather.
Notice: If you raise or lower the convertible top
while the vehicle is in motion, you could
damage the top or the top mechanism. The
repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Always put an automatic transmission in
PARK (P) or a manual transmission in FIRST (1)
or REVERSE (R), turn the ignition off and
engage the parking brake before raising or
lowering the convertible top.
{CAUTION:
Moving parts of the convertible top can be
dangerous. People can be injured by the
convertible top and its mechanism. Keep
people away from your vehicle when you
are lowering or raising the top.
Lowering the Manual Convertible Top
1. Park on a level surface and set the parking
brake. Shift an automatic transmission into
PARK (P). Shift a manual transmission
into FIRST (1) or REVERSE (R).
2. Make sure the ignition is turned off.
3. Push the trunk release button located in the
glove box, or on the remote keyless entry,
if equipped.
4. Lift the trunk.
5. The convertible top front latch, located above
the inside rearview mirror, must be unlatched.
Pull the latch down and turn it
counterclockwise to unlatch it.
Leave the latch open and turned to
prevent damage.
101
6. Pull rearward on the side edge (B) of the
convertible top and pull it off of the windshield
frame.
7. Push the convertible top down into the
trunk (D).
Do not operate rear defogger when convertible top
is down.
A clear Mylar® protective film has been installed at
the factory on the trunk lid surface under the
convertible top buttresses. This film is designed to
help prevent paint damage to the trunk lid. Do not
remove this protective film. It is intended to remain
permanently affixed to the trunk lid surface.
Raising the Manual Convertible Top
8. After the top is stored, apply one even push,
as shown, on the convertible top to ensure
that the top is fully retracted and securely
stored.
9. Close the trunk (D) by pressing down on it
with a swift, firm motion.
102
1. Park on a level surface, set the parking brake
firmly and shift an automatic transmission into
PARK (P). Shift a manual transmission into
FIRST (1) or REVERSE (R).
2. Make sure the ignition is turned off, and lower
the windows.
3. Push the trunk release button located in the
glove box, or on the remote keyless entry, if
equipped.
4. Lift the trunk.
5. Pull the convertible top forward by firmly
gripping the side edge (B) and applying a
brisk upward and forward motion to get the top
in the full-up position.
6. Pull the front edge (A) of the convertible top
forward from the outside of the vehicle, or
push the front edge (A) of the convertible top
forward from the inside of the vehicle.
7. Turn the top front latch handle clockwise to
latch the convertible top.
8. Close the trunk (D) by pushing it down with a
swift, firm motion.
9. At the rear edge of the convertible top, press
down on the two buttresses (C) to latch them
into the top of the trunk.
A clear Mylar® protective film has been installed at
the factory on the trunk lid surface under the
convertible top buttresses. This film is designed to
help prevent paint damage to the trunk lid. Do not
remove this protective film. It is intended to remain
permanently affixed to the trunk lid surface.
103
✍ NOTES
104
Section 3
Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel Overview ........................ 108
Hazard Warning Flashers .......................... 110
Other Warning Devices ............................. 110
Horn .......................................................... 110
Tilt Wheel .................................................. 111
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .................. 111
Turn and Lane-Change Signals ................. 112
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer .......... 112
Flash-to-Pass ............................................ 113
Windshield Wipers ..................................... 113
Windshield Washer .................................... 114
Cruise Control ........................................... 115
Headlamps ................................................ 118
Headlamps on Reminder ........................... 119
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) ................. 119
Fog Lamps ................................................ 120
Instrument Panel Brightness ...................... 120
Entry/Exit Lighting ...................................... 120
Mirror Reading Lamps ............................... 120
Battery Run-Down Protection ..................... 121
Accessory Power Outlet(s) ........................ 121
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter ................ 122
Climate Controls ......................................... 122
Climate Control System ............................. 122
Outlet Adjustment ...................................... 126
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ..... 127
Instrument Panel Cluster ........................... 128
Speedometer and Odometer ...................... 129
Tachometer ............................................... 129
Safety Belt Reminder Light ........................ 130
Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light ....... 130
Airbag Readiness Light ............................. 131
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............. 132
Charging System Light .............................. 134
Brake System Warning Light ..................... 134
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light ...... 135
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/
Traction Control System (TCS)
Indicator/Warning Light
(2.0L Engine Only) .................................. 136
Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Light ........................................ 137
Low Coolant Warning Light ....................... 138
Malfunction Indicator Lamp ........................ 138
105
Section 3
Instrument Panel
Oil Pressure Light ..................................... 142
Security Light ............................................ 143
Reduced Engine Power Light
(2.4L Engine Only) ................................. 143
Highbeam On Light ................................... 143
Trunk Ajar Light ........................................ 144
Service Vehicle Soon Light
(2.4L Engine Only) ................................. 144
Fuel Gage ................................................. 144
Low Fuel Warning Light ............................ 145
Driver Information Center (DIC) .................. 145
DIC Operation and Displays ...................... 146
DIC Warnings and Messages .................... 148
DIC Vehicle Personalization ....................... 152
106
Audio System(s) ......................................... 157
Setting the Time (Without Date Display) .... 158
Setting the Time (With Date Display) ......... 159
Radio with CD (Base) ............................... 161
Radio with CD (MP3) ................................ 166
Using an MP3 ........................................... 176
XM Radio Messages ................................. 183
Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................. 185
Audio Steering Wheel Controls .................. 185
Radio Reception ........................................ 186
Care of Your CDs ..................................... 187
Care of the CD Player .............................. 187
Fixed Mast Antenna .................................. 187
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ....... 187
✍ NOTES
107
Instrument Panel Overview
108
The main components of your instrument panel are the following:
A. Side Window Outlets. See Climate Control
System on page 122.
B. Air Outlets. See Outlet Adjustment on page 126.
C. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever. See Turn
Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 111.
D. Cruise Control Buttons (If Equipped). See
Cruise Control on page 115.
E. Instrument Panel Cluster. See Instrument
Panel Cluster on page 128.
F. Audio Steering Wheel Controls (If Equipped).
See Audio Steering Wheel Controls on
page 185.
G. Instrument Panel Brightness Control. See
Instrument Panel Brightness on page 120.
H. Passenger Air Bag Status Indicator. See
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 132.
I. Hazard Warning Flashers Button. See Hazard
Warning Flashers on page 110.
J. Fog Lamp Button (If Equipped). See Fog
Lamps on page 120.
K. Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/Traction
Control System (TCS) Button (If Equipped).
See Electronic Stability Control on page 200 or
Traction Control System (TCS) on page 198.
L. Driver Information Center (DIC) Controls (If
Equipped). See Driver Information Center (DIC)
on page 145.
M. Horn. See Horn on page 110.
N. Windshield Wiper/Washer Controls. See
Windshield Wipers on page 113 and Windshield
Washer on page 114.
O. Climate Controls. See Climate Control System
on page 122.
P. Cigarette Lighter (If Equipped). Accessory
Power Outlet (If Equipped). See Ashtray(s) and
Cigarette Lighter on page 122 and Accessory
Power Outlet(s) on page 121.
Q. Shift Lever. See Manual Transmission
Operation on page 85. See Automatic
Transmission Operation on page 82
(if equipped with automatic transmission).
R. Parking Brake Lever. See Parking Brake on
page 86.
S. Audio System. See Audio System(s) on
page 157.
T. Cupholder. See Cupholder(s) on page 98.
U. Trunk Release. See Trunk on page 68.
V. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 98.
109
Hazard Warning Flashers
Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others.
They also let police know you have a problem.
Your front and rear turn signal lamps will flash on
and off.
The hazard warning
flasher button is located
in the center of the
instrument panel.
Press the button to make the front and rear turn
signal lamps flash on and off. Press the button
again to turn the flashers off.
When the hazard warning flashers are on, your
turn signals will not work.
Other Warning Devices
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set them up
at the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m)
behind your vehicle.
Horn
Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what
position your key is in, and even if the key is
not in the ignition switch.
110
To sound the horn, press the center pad on the
steering wheel.
Tilt Wheel
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
A tilt wheel allows you to adjust the steering wheel
before you drive. You can raise the steering
wheel to the highest level to give your legs more
room when you enter and exit the vehicle.
The lever that allows you to tilt the steering wheel
is located on the left side of the steering column.
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
• G Turn and Lane-Change Signals. See
Turn and Lane-Change Signals on page 112.
• 23 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer.
See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on
page 112.
• Flash-to-Pass. See Flash-to-Pass on page 113.
To tilt the wheel, pull down the lever. Then move
the wheel to a comfortable position, pull up
the lever to lock the wheel in place.
• O Exterior Lamp Control. See Headlamps on
page 118.
111
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
The turn signal has two upward (for right) and
two downward (for left) positions. These positions
allow you to signal a turn or a lane change.
As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the
arrows flash rapidly, a signal bulb may be burned
out and other drivers will not see your turn
signal. If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help
avoid an accident.
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or
down. When the turn is finished, the lever will
return automatically.
If the arrows do not go on at all when you signal a
turn, check the fuse. See Fuses and Circuit
Breakers on page 326.
An arrow on the
instrument panel cluster
will flash in the
direction of the turn or
lane change.
To signal a lane change, raise or lower the lever
until the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you
complete your lane change. The lever will return
by itself when you release it.
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
To change the headlamps from low beam to high
beam, push the turn signal lever away from you.
When the high beams
are on, this light on the
instrument panel
cluster will also be on.
To change the headlamps from high beam to low
beam, pull the turn signal lever toward you.
112
Flash-to-Pass
This feature lets you use your high-beam
headlamps to signal a driver in front of you that
you want to pass.
To use it, pull the turn signal/multifunction lever
toward you until the high-beam headlamps
come on, then release the lever to turn them off.
Windshield Wipers
9 (Off): Move the lever to this position to turn off
the windshield wipers.
& (Intermittent; Speed Sensitive
Wipers): Move the lever to this position for
intermittent or speed sensitive operation. When
you select this position, the delay will vary
depending on the vehicles speed, as well as the
manually selected delay.
x (Delay): When the lever is in the intermittent
position, turn the intermittent adjust band with
this symbol on it up or down to set for a shorter or
longer delay between wipes. To the left of the
adjust band are bars, increasing in size from
bottom to top, that indicate the frequency of the
wipes. Smaller bars mean the wipers movement is
less frequent. Larger bars mean the movement
is more frequent.
Use this lever, located on the right side of the
steering wheel, to operate the windshield wipers.
6 (Low Speed): Move the lever up to the
first setting past intermittent, for steady wiping at
low speed.
1 (High Speed): Move the lever up to the
second setting past intermittent, for wiping at
high speed.
113
8 (Mist): Move the lever all the way down to
this position for a single wiping cycle. Hold it there
until the windshield wipers start; then let go.
The windshield wipers will stop after one wiping
cycle. If you want additional wiping cycles, hold the
lever down longer.
Damaged wiper blades may prevent you from
seeing well enough to drive safely. To avoid
damage, be sure to clear ice and snow from the
wiper blades before using them.
If the wiper blades are frozen to the windshield,
carefully loosen or thaw them. If your blades
do become damaged, get new blades or blade
inserts.
Heavy snow or ice can overload your wiper motor.
A circuit breaker will stop the motor until it
cools. Clear away snow or ice to prevent an
overload. If the motor gets stuck, turn the wipers
off, clear away the snow or ice, and then turn
the wipers back on.
As an added safety feature, if the wipers are on
for more than 15 seconds, the vehicle’s headlamps
will turn on automatically. They will turn off
15 seconds after the wipers are turned off.
114
Windshield Washer
To wash the windshield, press the button at the
end of the lever until the washers begin.
{CAUTION:
In freezing weather, do not use your
washer until the windshield is warmed.
Otherwise the washer fluid can form ice
on the windshield, blocking your vision.
When you release the button, the washers
will stop, but the wipers will continue to wipe
about three times or will resume the
previous speed.
Cruise Control
If your vehicle has cruise control, it can maintain
a speed of about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more
without keeping your foot on the accelerator.
This can really help on long trips. Cruise control
does not work at speeds below 25 mph (40 km/h).
{CAUTION:
Cruise control can be dangerous where
you cannot drive safely at a steady speed.
So, do not use your cruise control on
winding roads or in heavy traffic.
Setting Cruise Control
{CAUTION:
If you leave your cruise control on when
you are not using cruise, you might hit a
button and go into cruise when you do not
want to. You could be startled and even
lose control. Keep the cruise control switch
off until you want to use cruise control.
The cruise control
buttons are located on
the left side of the
steering wheel.
Cruise control can be dangerous on
slippery roads. On such roads, fast
changes in tire traction can cause
excessive wheel slip, and you could lose
control. Do not use cruise control on
slippery roads.
J (On/Off): Press this button to turn the cruise
control system on and off.
115
RES+ (Resume): Press this button to resume a
set speed and to accelerate the speed.
SET− (Set): Press this button to set a speed and
to decrease the speed.
To set a speed do the following:
1. Press the on/off button to turn cruise control on.
The indicator light on the button will come on.
2. Get to the speed you want.
3. Press the SET− control button and release it.
The CRUISE ENGAGED message will appear
on the Driver Information Center (DIC) to
show the system is engaged.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
When you apply the brakes or depress the clutch,
the cruise control will shut off.
Resuming a Set Speed
Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired
speed and then you apply the brake. This
disengages the cruise control. To return to your
previously set speed, you do not need to go
through the set process again. Once you are going
about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more, you can press
the RES+ button briefly.
This will take you back up to your previously
chosen speed and stay there.
Increasing Speed While Using
Cruise Control
There are two ways to increase speed.
1. Disengage the cruise control by applying the
brake pedal but do not turn it off. Accelerate
to a higher speed and reset the cruise control.
2. If the cruise control system is already
engaged, press the RES+ button. Press it until
you get up to the speed you want, and then
release the button. To increase your speed in
very small amounts, press the RES+ button
briefly and then release it. Each time you
do this, your vehicle will go about 1 mph
(1.6 km/h) faster.
116
Reducing Speed While Using
Cruise Control
Using Cruise Control on Hills
If the cruise control system is already engaged,
• Push and hold the SET− part of the button
until you reach the lower speed desired,
then release it.
• To slow down in very small amounts, push the
SET− part of the button briefly. Each time this
is done, your vehicle will go about 1 mph
(1.6 km/h) slower.
How well your cruise control will work on hills
depends upon the vehicle speed, load, and the
steepness of the hills. When going up steep hills,
you might have to step on the accelerator pedal
to maintain the vehicle speed. When going
downhill, you might have to brake or shift to a
lower gear to keep the vehicle speed down.
Of course, applying the brake turns off the cruise
control. Many drivers find this to be too much
trouble and do not use cruise control on steep hills.
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
Ending Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed.
When you take your foot off the pedal, your
vehicle will slow down to the cruise control speed
you set earlier.
To end cruise control, step lightly on the brake
pedal or the clutch pedal if your vehicle has
a manual transmission.
Stepping on the brake pedal or clutch pedal will
only end the current cruise control session. Press
the cruise control on/off button to turn the
system completely off.
Erasing Speed Memory
When you turn off the cruise control or the
ignition, the cruise control set speed memory is
erased.
117
Headlamps
P (Off/On): This position is an Off/On switch for
the Automatic Headlamp System. In Canada, this
applies to vehicles with an automatic transmission
set to PARK (P) and manual transmission vehicles
with the parking brake engaged.
The lever on the left side of the steering column
operates the exterior lamps.
The exterior lamp switch has the following
four positions:
2 (Headlamps): This position turns on the
headlamps, parking lamps, and taillamps.
; (Parking Lamps): This position turns on the
parking lamps and taillamps only.
AUTO (Automatic Headlamp System): This
position automatically turns on the Daytime
Running Lamps (DRL) during daytime, and the
headlamps, parking lamps, and taillamps at night.
118
When operating in AUTO, a brief turn of the
switch to off/on will turn off the Automatic
Headlamp System. An AUTO LIGHTS OFF
message will display on the Driver Information
Center (DIC), if the vehicle has one, and a chime
will sound. Turning the switch to off/on again
will turn the Automatic Headlamp System back on.
An AUTO LIGHTS ON message will display on
the Driver Information Center (DIC).
The Automatic Headlamp System is always turned
on at the beginning of an ignition cycle for vehicles
with manual transmission. When the parking brake
is engaged, the automatic headlamps will turn off.
For vehicles with an automatic transmission, when
the shift lever is shifted out of PARK (P), the
Automatic Headlamp System will turn on. Shifting
the lever back to PARK (P) will turn off the
automatic headlamp system for vehicles with an
automatic transmission.
Headlamps on Reminder
If you open the driver’s door with the ignition off
and the lamps on, you will hear a warning chime.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier
for others to see the front of your vehicle during
the day. DRL can be helpful in many different
driving conditions, but they can be especially
helpful in the short periods after dawn and before
sunset. Fully functional daytime running lamps
are required on all vehicles first sold in Canada.
Your vehicle has a light sensor on top of the
instrument panel that helps control the DRL. Make
sure it is not covered or the headlamps will
come on when they are not needed.
The DRL system makes both low beam headlamps
turn on at reduced intensity when the following
conditions are met:
• The ignition is on.
• The exterior lamp control is turned to AUTO.
• The light sensor detects daytime light.
• The shift lever is not in PARK (P).
While the DRL system is on, the taillamps,
sidemarker lamps, and instrument panel lights will
not be on.
The DRL system turns off on U.S. vehicles by
using the on/off switch for one ignition cycle, if the
vehicle is in the PARK (P) position, or if the
vehicle speed is less than 5 mph (8 km h) after
the vehicle is started.
For vehicles first sold in Canada the DRL system
will turn off when a automatic transmission
vehicle is in the PARK (P) position or the park
brake is set on a manual transmission vehicle and
the vehicle speed is less than 8 mph (13 km h).
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamp system when it is needed.
119
Fog Lamps
Instrument Panel Brightness
If your vehicle has a fog
lamp button, it is located
on the instrument
panel, to the right of the
steering wheel.
D Instrument Panel Brightness: The control
for this feature is located on the instrument
panel to the right of the steering wheel.
Turn the knob clockwise to brighten the lights or
counterclockwise to dim them.
Entry/Exit Lighting
The ignition must be on to turn your fog lamps on.
Push the button to turn the fog lamps on.
An indicator light on the fog lamp button will come
on when the fog lamps are on. Push the button
again to turn the fog lamps off.
The parking lamps will automatically turn on and
off when the fog lamps are turned on and off.
The fog lamps will turn off while the high-beam
headlamps are turned on.
Some localities have laws that require the
headlamps to be on along with the fog lamps.
The lamps inside your vehicle will go on when you
open any door. These lamps will fade out after
about 20 seconds after all of the doors have been
closed or when the ignition is turned on. These
lamps will also go on when you press the
trunk release, unlock symbol button or the horn
symbol on the keyless entry system transmitter.
The lamps inside your vehicle will stay on for about
20 seconds after your key is removed from the
ignition to provide an illuminated exit.
Mirror Reading Lamps
Your vehicle has reading lamps on the rearview
mirror. Push the button to turn the reading
lamps on and off.
120
Battery Run-Down Protection
Your vehicle has a battery saver feature designed
to protect your vehicle’s battery.
When any interior lamp is left on and the ignition
is turned off, the battery rundown protection
system will automatically turn the lamp off after
20 minutes. This will avoid draining the battery.
Accessory Power Outlet(s)
The accessory power outlet can be used to
connect electrical equipment such as a cellular
phone or CB radio.
The accessory power outlet is located on the
instrument panel, below the radio.
To use the outlet, remove the cover. When not in
use, always cover the outlet with the protective cap.
Notice: Leaving electrical equipment plugged
in for an extended period of time while the
vehicle is off will drain the battery. Power is
always supplied to the outlets. Always unplug
electrical equipment when not in use and
do not plug in equipment that exceeds
the maximum 20 ampere rating.
Certain electrical accessories may not be
compatible with the accessory power outlet and
could result in blown vehicle or adapter fuses.
If you experience a problem, see your dealer
for additional information on the accessory
power outlet.
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to
your vehicle may damage it or keep other
components from working as they should.
The repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not use equipment exceeding
maximum amperage rating of 20 amperes.
Check with your dealer before adding electrical
equipment.
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to
follow the installation instructions included with
the equipment.
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can
cause damage not covered by your warranty.
Do not hang any type of accessory or
accessory bracket from the plug because the
power outlets are designed for accessory
power plugs only.
121
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter
Your vehicle may have an ashtray and cigarette
lighter. To use the lighter, located on the
instrument panel below the radio, push it in all the
way and let go. When it is ready, it will pop
back out by itself.
Climate Controls
Climate Control System
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it
is heating will not allow the lighter to back
away from the heating element when it is hot.
Damage from overheating may occur to the
lighter or heating element, or a fuse could be
blown. Do not hold a cigarette lighter in
while it is heating.
Notice: If you put papers, pins, or other
flammable items in the ashtray, hot cigarettes
or other smoking materials could ignite
them and possibly damage your vehicle. Never
put flammable items in the ashtray.
122
Climate Control System with Air Conditioning
shown, Climate Control System without Air
Conditioning similar
With this system you can control the heating and
ventilation of your vehicle. You may also be
able to control the cooling of your vehicle, if your
vehicle has air conditioning. The in-between
mode will be a combination of the two modes that
the control is selected between.
Temperature: Turn the left knob on the control
panel to adjust the temperature of the air in
the vehicle. Turn the knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease
the temperature.
# (Air Conditioning): If your vehicle has air
conditioning press the left knob on the control
panel to turn the air conditioning system on or off.
An indicator light on the button will come on to
let you know the air conditioning is activated.
When the system is on, this setting cools
and dehumidifies the air entering your vehicle.
The air conditioning will not function if the fan is
turned off. If air conditioning is selected with
fan off, the LED light will flash three times and
then turn off.
You may notice a slight change in engine
performance when the air conditioning compressor
turns off and turns on again. This is normal. The
system is designed to make adjustments to
help with fuel economy while still maintaining the
selected temperature.
Air conditioning does not operate at temperature
below 40°F (4°C). In temperatures above 40°F
(4°C), the air conditioning cannot be turned off in
defrost, floor/defog, and recirculation modes
because it helps to remove moisture from the
vehicle. It also helps to keep the windows clear.
On hot days, open the windows to let the hot
inside air escape; then close them. This helps
reduce the time it takes for your vehicle to
cool down. It also helps the system to operate
more efficiently.
For
1.
2.
3.
quick cool down on hot days, do the following:
Select the vent mode.
Select recirculation mode.
Select the air conditioning to on.
4. Select the coolest temperature.
5. Select the highest fan speed.
Using these settings together for long periods of
time may cause the air inside of your vehicle
to become too dry. To prevent this from
happening, after the air in your vehicle has cooled,
turn the recirculation mode off.
123
9 (Fan): Turn the center knob on the control
panel to control the fan speed. Turn the knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to increase
or decrease the fan speed.
The right knob on the control panel is used to
direct the airflow inside your vehicle. Turn the knob
to select one of the following modes:
H (Vent): Turn the right knob on the control
turn the fan off.
panel to this mode to direct air to the instrument
panel outlets.
? (Recirculation): Press the center knob on
\ (Bi-Level): Turn the right knob on the control
the control panel to recirculate air inside the
vehicle and prevent outside air from coming in.
It can be used to prevent outside odors from
entering your vehicle and cool the air inside your
vehicle more quickly. Press this button to turn
the recirculation mode on or off. An indicator light
on the button will come on to let you know the
recirculation mode is activated.
panel to this mode to direct air to the instrument
panel outlets, and the remaining air to the
floor outlets and the defroster and side window
outlets. Cooler air is directed to the upper outlets
and warmer air to the floor outlets.
9 (Off): Turn the center knob to this position to
Recirculation is available in the bi-level and vent
modes. If recirculation is selected in either
floor/heat, floor/defog, or defrost mode, the LED
light will flash three times indicating it is not
available in that mode.
124
[ (Floor): Turn the right knob on the control
panel to this mode to direct most of the air to the
floor outlets. The remaining air is directed to
the side window and defroster outlets. If there is
little or no airflow on the passenger side, make
sure that the carpet covering is tucked under the
floor outlets.
Defogging and Defrosting
Fog on the inside of windows is a result of high
humidity (moisture) condensing on the cool window
glass. This can be minimized if the climate control
system is used properly. There are two modes to
clear fog or frost from your windshield and side
windows. Use the defog mode to clear the windows
of fog or moisture and warm the passengers. Use
the defrost mode to remove fog or frost from the
windshield more quickly. For best results, clear all
snow and ice from the windshield before defrosting.
Use a temperature setting that provides warm air.
The warmer the air the quicker the windows
will clear.
To prevent fogging on the inside of the windows in
modes other than floor/defog and defrost, make
sure the air conditioning compressor, if the vehicle
has one, is on and recirculation mode is off.
/ (Floor/Defog): Turn the right knob on the
control panel to this mode to direct the air to the
windshield, the side window outlets, and to the floor
outlets. When you select this mode, the system
runs the air conditioning compressor unless the
outside temperature is near freezing or below.
0 (Defrost): Turn the right knob on the control
panel to this mode to direct most of the air to
the windshield, and the side window outlets. When
you select this mode, the system runs the air
conditioning compressor unless the outside
temperature is near or below freezing.
Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows
are clear.
Rear Window Defogger
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog or frost from the rear window. Be
sure to clear as much snow from the rear window
as possible. An indicator light on the knob will
come on to let you know that the rear window
defogger is activated. The rear window defogger
will turn off about fifteen minutes after the
knob is pressed. If turned on again, the defogger
will run for about seven and one-half minutes
before turning off. If the vehicle speed is greater
than 50 mph (80 kph) and the rear defogger
is active, it will remain on as long as the speed is
greater than 50 mph (80 kph). The defogger
can also be turned off by pressing the knob again
or by turning off the engine.
125
= (Rear Defogger): Press the right knob on the
control panel to turn the rear window defogger
on or off.
Do not operate rear defogger when convertible top
is down.
Notice: Do not use anything sharp on the
inside of the rear window. If you do, you could
cut or damage the warming grid, and the
repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Do not attach a temporary vehicle license,
tape, a decal or anything similar to the
defogger grid.
Outlet Adjustment
Use the air outlets located in the center and on
the side of your instrument panel to direct
the airflow.
Your vehicle has air outlets that allow you to
adjust the direction and amount of airflow inside
the vehicle. Move the louvers up or down or
turn clockwise or counterclockwise to change the
direction of the airflow.
126
Your vehicle has flow through ventilation that
allows outside air to be forced through your
ventilation system when your vehicle is moving.
Outside air will enter the vehicle when the air
conditioning fan is running. Flow through
ventilation can be stopped in vent and bi-level
modes by pressing the recirculation button.
Operation Tips
• Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the
air inlets at the base of the windshield that
may block the flow of air into your vehicle.
• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors may
adversely affect the performance of the
system.
• Keep the path under the front seats clear of
objects to help circulate the air inside of
your vehicle more effectively.
Warning Lights, Gages, and
Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages
that may be on your vehicle. The pictures will
help you locate them.
Warning lights and gages can signal that
something is wrong before it becomes serious
enough to cause an expensive repair or
replacement. Paying attention to your warning
lights and gages could also save you or others
from injury.
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often
gages and warning lights work together to let you
know when there is a problem with your vehicle.
When one of the warning lights comes on and
stays on as you are driving, or when one of the
gages shows there may be a problem, check
the section that tells you what to do about
it. Please follow this manual’s advice. Waiting to
do repairs can be costly and even dangerous.
So please get to know your warning lights
and gages. They are a big help.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions.
As you will see in the details on the next
few pages, some warning lights come on briefly
when you start the engine just to let you know they
are working. If you are familiar with this section,
you should not be alarmed when this happens.
127
Instrument Panel Cluster
Your instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You
will know how fast you are going, about how much fuel is left in the tank, and many other things you will
need to drive safely and economically.
United States Cluster shown, Canada and Turbo model similar
128
Speedometer and Odometer
The speedometer lets you see your speed
in both miles per hour (mph) and kilometers
per hour (km/h).
The vehicle’s odometer works together with the
Driver Information Center (DIC), if your vehicle has
one. A Trip A and Trip B odometer can be set.
See “Trip Information” under DIC Operation
and Displays on page 146.
Tachometer
The tachometer
displays the engine
speed in revolutions per
minute (rpm).
The odometer mileage can be checked without the
vehicle running. Open the driver’s door and the
mileage will be displayed briefly.
If your vehicle ever needs a new odometer
installed, the new one will be set to the correct
mileage total of the old odometer.
Notice: If you operate the engine with the
tachometer in the shaded warning area, your
vehicle could be damaged, and the damages
would not be covered by your warranty. Do not
operate the engine with the tachometer in
the shaded warning area.
129
Safety Belt Reminder Light
When the key is turned to RUN or START, a
chime will come on for several seconds to remind
people to fasten their safety belts, unless the
driver’s safety belt is already buckled.
The safety belt light will
also come on and stay
on for several seconds,
then it will flash for
several more.
This chime and light will be repeated if the driver
remains unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion.
Passenger Safety Belt
Reminder Light
Several seconds after the key is turned to RUN or
START, a chime will sound for several seconds to
remind the front passenger to buckle their safety
belt. This would only occur if the passenger airbag
is enabled. See Passenger Sensing System on
page 50 for more information. The passenger
safety belt light will also come on and stay on for
several seconds, then it will flash for several more.
This chime and light will
be repeated if the
passenger remains
unbuckled and
the vehicle is in motion.
If the driver’s belt is already buckled, neither
the chime nor the light will come on.
If the passenger’s safety belt is buckled, neither
the chime nor the light will come on.
130
Airbag Readiness Light
There is an airbag readiness light on the
instrument panel, which shows the airbag symbol.
The system checks the airbag’s electrical
system for malfunctions. The light tells you if there
is an electrical problem. The system check
includes the airbag sensor, the airbag modules,
the wiring and the crash sensing and diagnostic
module. For more information on the airbag
system, see Airbag System on page 42.
This light will come on
when you start your
vehicle, and it will flash
for a few seconds.
Then the light should go
out. This means the
system is ready.
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you
start the vehicle or comes on when you are driving,
your airbag system may not work properly.
Have your vehicle serviced right away.
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light stays on after
you start your vehicle, it means the airbag
system may not be working properly. The
airbags in your vehicle may not inflate in
a crash, or they could even inflate without
a crash. To help avoid injury to yourself
or others, have your vehicle serviced right
away if the airbag readiness light stays on
after you start your vehicle.
The airbag readiness light should flash for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN
or START. If the light does not come on then, have
it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if
there is a problem.
131
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
Your vehicle has the passenger sensing system.
Your instrument panel has a passenger airbag
status indicator.
If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the
passenger airbag status indicator, it means that
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag is enabled
(may inflate).
{CAUTION:
United States
Canada
The indicator next to the passenger airbag status
indicator lights is the passenger safety belt
reminder light. See Passenger Safety Belt
Reminder Light on page 130 for more information
on that indicator.
When the ignition key is turned to RUN or START,
the passenger airbag status indicator will light
ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off,
for several seconds as a system check. Then,
after several more seconds, the status indicator
will light either ON or OFF, or either the on
or off symbol to let you know the status of the
right front passenger’s frontal airbag.
132
If the on indicator comes on when you have
a rear-facing child restraint installed in the
right front passenger’s seat, it means that
the passenger sensing system has not
turned off the passenger’s frontal airbag.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can
be seriously injured or killed if the right
front passenger’s airbag inflates. This is
because the back of the rear-facing child
restraint would be very close to the
inflating airbag. Do not use a rear-facing
child restraint in the right front passenger’s
seat if the airbag is turned on.
{CAUTION:
Even though the passenger sensing
system is designed to turn off the
passenger’s frontal airbag if the system
detects a rear-facing child restraint, no
system is fail-safe, and no one can
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend
that rear-facing child restraints be
transported in vehicles with a rear seat
that will accommodate a rear-facing child
restraint, whenever possible.
If, after several seconds, all status indicator lights
remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there
may be a problem with the lights or the passenger
sensing system. See your dealer for service.
{CAUTION:
If the off indicator and the airbag
readiness light ever come on together, it
means that something may be wrong with
the airbag system. If this ever happens,
have the vehicle serviced promptly,
because an adult-size person sitting in the
right front passenger seat may not have
the protection of the frontal airbag. See
Airbag Readiness Light on page 131.
If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the
airbag status indicator, it means that the
passenger sensing system has turned off the right
front passenger’s frontal airbag. See Passenger
Sensing System on page 50 for more on this,
including important safety information.
133
Charging System Light
The charging system
light will come on briefly
when you turn on the
ignition, and when
the engine is not
running, as a check to
show you it is working.
Brake System Warning Light
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided
into two parts. If one part is not working, the other
part can still work and stop you. For good
braking, though, you need both parts working well.
If the warning light comes on, there is a brake
problem. Have your brake system inspected
right away.
Then it should go out when the engine is started.
If it stays on, or comes on while you are driving,
you may have a problem with the electrical
charging system. Have it checked by your dealer.
Driving while this light is on could drain your
battery.
If you must drive a short distance with the light on,
be certain to turn off all your accessories, such
as the radio and air conditioner.
134
United States
Canada
This light should come on briefly when you turn
the ignition key to RUN. If it does not come
on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn
you if there is a problem.
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning
light will also come on when you set your parking
brake. The light will stay on if your parking brake
does not release fully. If it stays on after your
parking brake is fully released, it means you have
a brake problem.
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off
the road and stop carefully. Make sure the parking
brake is fully released. You may notice that the
pedal is harder to push or, the pedal may go closer
to the floor. It may take longer to stop. If the light is
still on, have the vehicle towed for service.
See Towing Your Vehicle on page 231.
Anti-Lock Brake System
Warning Light
Your vehicle may have
the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS).
This light will come on when your engine is
started and may stay on for several seconds.
That is normal.
{CAUTION:
Your brake system may not be working
properly if the brake system warning light
is on. Driving with the brake system
warning light on can lead to an accident.
If the light is still on after you have pulled
off the road and stopped carefully, have
the vehicle towed for service.
135
If the light stays on, turn the ignition off. If the
light comes on when you are driving, stop as
soon as possible and turn the ignition off. Then
start the engine again to reset the system. If the
light still stays on after driving at a speed of at least
13 mph (20 km/h), or comes on again while you are
driving, your vehicle needs service. If the regular
brake system warning light is not on, you still have
brakes, but you do not have anti-lock brakes. If the
regular brake system warning light is also on, you
do not have anti-lock brakes and there is a problem
with your regular brakes. See Brake System
Warning Light on page 134.
The ABS warning light will come on briefly when
you turn the ignition key to RUN. This is normal.
If the light does not come on then, have it fixed so
it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/
Traction Control System (TCS)
Indicator/Warning Light
(2.0L Engine Only)
This light is located in
the center of the
instrument panel cluster.
For vehicles that have the Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) system or the Traction Control
System (TCS), this warning light should come on
briefly when the engine is started.
If the warning light does not come on then, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a
problem. This light, along with the appropriate
Driver Information Center (DIC) messages,
indicates when the ESC system and the TCS are
working or are disabled.
136
If this light is on and not flashing, the TCS and
potentially the ESC system have been disabled.
Check your DIC messaging to determine
which feature(s) is no longer functioning and
whether it is because of the driver turning off the
feature(s), or the system may not be working
properly and your vehicle requires service. If the
TCS is disabled, wheel spin will not be limited.
If the ESC system is disabled, the system will not
aid in maintaining vehicle directional control. In
either case, adjust your driving accordingly.
Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Light
If the light is on and flashing, the TCS or the ESC
system is actively working. Check the DIC
messaging for details to determine which system
is working. If the LOW TRACTION message
appears, the system is limiting wheel spin. If the
ESC ACTIVE message appears, the system
is aiding in maintaining vehicle directional control.
If this happens you should pull over and turn off
the engine as soon as possible. See Engine
Overheating on page 260 for more information.
See Electronic Stability Control on page 200
and Traction Control System (TCS) on page 198
for more information.
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 148 for
more information on the messages associated
with this light.
The engine coolant
temperature warning
light will come on when
the engine has
overheated.
Notice: Driving with the engine coolant
temperature warning light on could cause your
vehicle to overheat. See Engine Overheating
on page 260. Your vehicle could be damaged,
and it might not be covered by your warranty.
Never drive with the engine coolant
temperature warning light on.
This light will also come on briefly when starting
your vehicle. If it does not, have your vehicle
serviced.
137
Low Coolant Warning Light
This light comes on
briefly when you turn
your ignition on.
If this light comes on and stays on, the coolant
level in your vehicle is low. If the light is on along
with an overheat warning, you may have a
serious overheating problem.
Notice: Driving with the low coolant warning
light on could cause your vehicle to overheat.
See “Engine Overheating” under Engine
Coolant on page 257. Your vehicle could be
damaged and the damages might not be
covered by your warranty.
See Engine Coolant on page 257 for information
on what to do. Your vehicle should be serviced as
soon as possible.
138
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
Your vehicle has a
computer which
monitors operation of
the fuel, ignition,
and emission control
systems.
This system is called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended
to assure that emissions are at acceptable
levels for the life of the vehicle, helping to produce
a cleaner environment. The check engine light
comes on to indicate that there is a problem and
service is required. Malfunctions often will be
indicated by the system before any problem is
apparent. This may prevent more serious damage
to your vehicle. This system is also designed to
assist your service technician in correctly
diagnosing any malfunction.
Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with
this light on, after awhile, your emission
controls may not work as well, your fuel
economy may not be as good, and your engine
may not run as smoothly. This could lead to
costly repairs that may not be covered by your
warranty.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system
of your vehicle or the replacement of the
original tires with other than those of the same
Tire Performance Criteria (TPC) can affect
your vehicle’s emission controls and may
cause this light to come on. Modifications to
these systems could lead to costly repairs not
covered by your warranty. This may also
result in a failure to pass a required Emission
Inspection/Maintenance test. See Accessories
and Modifications on page 235.
This light should come on, as a check to show
you it is working, when the ignition is on and the
engine is not running. If the light does not
come on, have it repaired. This light will also
come on during a malfunction in one of two ways:
• Light Flashing — A misfire condition has
been detected. A misfire increases vehicle
emissions and may damage the emission
control system on your vehicle. Diagnosis and
service may be required.
• Light On Steady — An emission control
system malfunction has been detected on your
vehicle. Diagnosis and service may be
required.
139
If the Light is Flashing
If the Light Is On Steady
The following may prevent more serious damage
to your vehicle:
• Reducing vehicle speed
• Avoiding hard accelerations
• Avoiding steep uphill grades
You may be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady,
see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do
so, stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park
your vehicle. Turn the key off, wait at least
10 seconds and restart the engine. If the light
remains on steady, see “If the Light Is On Steady”
following. If the light is still flashing, follow the
previous steps, and see your dealer for service as
soon as possible.
140
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully
install the cap. See Filling the Tank on page 240.
The diagnostic system can determine if the
fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed.
A loose or missing fuel cap will allow fuel to
evaporate into the atmosphere. A few driving trips
with the cap properly installed should turn the
light off.
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
If so, your electrical system may be wet. The
condition will usually be corrected when the
electrical system dries out. A few driving trips
should turn the light off.
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel.
See Gasoline Octane on page 237. Poor fuel
quality will cause your engine not to run as
efficiently as designed. You may notice this as
stalling after start-up, stalling when you put
the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation on
acceleration, or stumbling on acceleration. (These
conditions may go away once the engine is
warmed up.) This will be detected by the system
and cause the light to turn on.
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at
least one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the
light off.
If none of the above steps have made the light
turn off, your dealer can check the vehicle.
Your dealer has the proper test equipment and
diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical
problems that may have developed.
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Programs
Some state/provincial and local governments have
or may begin programs to inspect the emission
control equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass
this inspection could prevent you from getting a
vehicle registration.
Here are some things you need to know to help
your vehicle pass an inspection:
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the
check engine light is on or not working properly.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if
the OBD (on-board diagnostic) system determines
that critical emission control systems have not
been completely diagnosed by the system.
The vehicle would be considered not ready for
inspection. This can happen if you have recently
replaced your battery or if your battery has
run down. The diagnostic system is designed to
evaluate critical emission control systems
during normal driving. This may take several days
of routine driving. If you have done this and
your vehicle still does not pass the inspection for
lack of OBD system readiness, your dealer
can prepare the vehicle for inspection.
141
• If you are idling at a stop sign, the light may
Oil Pressure Light
If you have a low engine
oil pressure problem,
this light will stay on after
you start your engine, or
come on when you are
driving.
This indicates that your engine is not receiving
enough oil.
The engine could be low on oil, or could have
some other oil problem. Have it fixed immediately.
The oil light could also come on in three other
situations:
• When the ignition is on but the engine is not
running, the light will come on as a test to
show you it is working, but the light will go out
when you turn the ignition to START. If it
does not come on with the ignition on,
you may have a problem with the fuse or bulb.
Have it fixed right away.
142
blink on and then off.
• If you make a hard stop, the light may come
on for a moment. This is normal.
{CAUTION:
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is
low. If you do, your engine can become so
hot that it catches fire. You or others
could be burned. Check your oil as soon
as possible and have your vehicle
serviced.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance
may damage the engine. The repairs would
not be covered by your warranty. Always follow
the maintenance schedule in this manual for
changing engine oil.
Security Light
This light flashes when
the vehicle security
system is activated.
Reduced Engine Power Light
(2.4L Engine Only)
This light will come on
briefly when the ignition
is turned on.
If this light is on, a chime will sound and a
noticeable reduction in the vehicle’s
performance may occur.
Let the vehicle idle for a few minutes, if the
reduced engine power light is still on, but there is
no reduction in performance, proceed to your
destination. The performance may be reduced the
next time the vehicle is driven. The vehicle may
be driven at a reduced speed while the reduced
engine power light is on, but acceleration and
speed may be reduced.
Anytime the reduced engine power light stays on,
the vehicle should be taken to an authorized
dealer as soon as possible for service.
Highbeam On Light
This light comes on
when the high-beam
headlamps are in use.
See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on
page 112.
143
Trunk Ajar Light
Fuel Gage
This light will come on
and a chime will sound
if the trunk is ajar.
Service Vehicle Soon Light
(2.4L Engine Only)
This light will come on
briefly when the ignition
is turned on.
This light will come on if you have problems that
may require the vehicle to be taken in for service.
If the light comes on, take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
144
Your fuel gage tells you
about how much fuel
you have left.
Here are four things that some owners ask about.
None of these show a problem with your fuel gage:
• At the service station, the gas pump shuts off
before the gage reads full.
• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than
the gage indicated. For example, the gage may
have indicated the tank was half full, but it
actually took a little more or less than half the
tank’s capacity to fill the tank.
• The gage moves a little when you turn a corner
or speed up.
• The gage doesn’t go back to empty when you
turn off the ignition.
For your fuel tank capacity, see Capacities and
Specifications on page 332.
Low Fuel Warning Light
This light will come on
briefly when you are
starting the engine.
This light also comes on when the fuel tank is low
on fuel. When you add fuel the light should go
off. If it does not, have your vehicle serviced.
Driver Information Center (DIC)
Your vehicle may have a Driver Information Center
(DIC). The DIC display gives you the status of many
of your vehicle’s systems. The DIC is also used to
display driver personalization menu modes and
warning/status messages. All messages will appear
in the DIC display, located at the bottom of the
tachometer on the instrument panel cluster.
The DIC buttons are
located on the left side
of the steering wheel.
q (Information): Press this button to scroll
through the vehicle information mode displays.
r (Reset): Press this button to reset some
vehicle information mode displays, select a
personalization menu mode setting, or
acknowledge a warning message.
Press and hold the information and reset buttons
at the same time for one second, then release
the buttons to enter the personalization menu.
See DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 152 for
more information.
145
DIC Operation and Displays
TRIP A or TRIP B
The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. The
DIC has different modes which can be accessed
by pressing the DIC buttons. The button functions
are detailed in the following.
Press the information button until TRIP A or
TRIP B is displayed. These modes show the
current distance traveled since the last reset for
each trip odometer in either miles (mi) or
kilometers (km). Both odometers can be used at
the same time.
Information Modes
q (Information): Press this button to scroll
through the following vehicle information modes:
Odometer
Press the information button until the odometer is
displayed. This mode shows the total distance
the vehicle has been driven in either miles (mi) or
kilometers (km).
To change the DIC display to English or metric
units, see “UNITS” under DIC Vehicle
Personalization on page 152.
Each trip odometer can be reset to zero separately
by pressing and holding the reset button for a
few seconds while the desired trip odometer
is displayed.
FUEL RANGE
Press the information button until FUEL RANGE is
displayed. This mode shows the remaining
distance you can drive without refueling in either
miles (mi) or kilometers (km). It is based on
fuel economy and the fuel remaining in the tank.
When the fuel level is low, FUEL RANGE LOW
will display.
The fuel economy data used to determine fuel
range is an average of recent driving conditions.
As your driving conditions change, this data is
gradually updated. The FUEL RANGE mode
cannot be reset.
146
ECON (Economy)
OIL LIFE
Press the information button until ECON is
displayed. This mode shows how many miles per
gallon (mpg) or liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km)
your vehicle is getting based on current and
past driving conditions.
Press the information button until OIL LIFE is
displayed. The engine oil life system shows
an estimate of the oil’s remaining useful life. It will
show 100% when the system is reset after an
oil change. It will alert you to change your oil on a
schedule consistent with your driving conditions.
Press and hold the reset button while ECON is
displayed to reset the average fuel economy.
Average fuel economy will then be calculated
starting from that point. If the average fuel economy
is not reset, it will be continually updated each time
you drive.
AV (Average) SPEED
In addition to the engine oil life system monitoring
the oil life, additional maintenance is
recommended in the Maintenance Schedule in
this manual. See Engine Oil on page 247 and
Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services on
page 336.
Press the information button until AV SPEED is
displayed. This mode shows the vehicle’s average
speed in miles per hour (mph) or kilometers per
hour (km/h).
Always reset the engine oil life system after an oil
change. See “How to Reset the Engine Oil Life
System” under Engine Oil Life System on
page 252.
Press and hold the reset button while AV SPEED
is displayed to reset the average vehicle speed.
COOLANT
Press the information button until COOLANT is
displayed. This mode shows the temperature
of the engine coolant in either degrees
Fahrenheit (°F) or degrees Celsius (°C).
147
BOOST (Turbo Only)
AUTO (Automatic) LIGHTS ON
If your vehicle has this feature, press the
information button until BOOST is displayed. This
mode shows a graphic that indicates the amount
of boost the engine is receiving in either
pounds per square inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa).
This message displays if the automatic headlamp
system is enabled with the headlamp switch.
DIC Warnings and Messages
These messages appear if there is a problem
detected in one of your vehicle’s systems.
A message will clear when the vehicle’s condition
is no longer present. To acknowledge a message
and clear it from the display, press and hold
any of the DIC buttons. If the condition is still
present, the warning message will come back on
the next time the vehicle is turned off and back
on. With most messages, a warning chime sounds
when the message displays. Your vehicle may
have other warning messages.
AUTO (Automatic) LIGHTS OFF
This message displays if the automatic headlamp
system is disabled with the headlamp switch.
148
BRAKE FLUID
This message displays to inform the driver that the
brake fluid level is low while the ignition is on.
The brake system warning light on the instrument
panel cluster also comes on. See Brake System
Warning Light on page 134 for more information.
Have the brake system serviced by your dealer
as soon as possible.
CHANGE OIL SOON
This message displays when the life of the engine
oil has expired and it should be changed.
When you acknowledge the CHANGE OIL SOON
message by clearing it from the display, you
still must reset the engine oil life system
separately. See Engine Oil Life System on
page 252 and Part A: Scheduled Maintenance
Services on page 336 for more information.
CHECK GAS CAP
DOOR AJAR
This message displays if the fuel cap has not been
fully tightened. Recheck the fuel cap to make sure
that it is on properly. A few driving trips with the cap
properly installed should turn the message off.
This message displays if one or more of the
vehicle’s doors are not closed properly. When this
message displays, make sure that the door(s)
are closed completely.
COMPETITIVE MODE
ENGINE DISABLED
If your vehicle has this feature, this message
displays when the Competitive Driving mode is
selected. The Traction Control System (TCS) will
not be operating while in the Competitive Driving
mode and the ESC/TCS light on the instrument
panel cluster will be on solid. Adjust your driving
accordingly. See Electronic Stability Control on
page 200 and Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/
Traction Control System (TCS) Indicator/Warning
Light (2.0L Engine Only) on page 136 for more
information.
This message displays if the starting of the engine
is disabled. Have your vehicle serviced by your
dealer immediately.
CRUISE ENGAGED
ESC (Electronic Stability Control) ACTIVE
If your vehicle has Electronic Stability
Control (ESC), this message displays and the
ESC/TCS light on the instrument panel cluster
flashes when ESC is assisting you with directional
control of the vehicle. You may feel or hear the
system working and see this message displayed
in the DIC.
This message displays when the cruise control
system is active. See Cruise Control on page 115
for more information.
149
Slippery road conditions may exist when this
message is displayed, so adjust your driving
accordingly. This message may stay on for a few
seconds after ESC stops assisting you with
directional control of the vehicle. This is normal
when the system is operating. See Electronic
Stability Control on page 200 and Electronic
Stability Control (ESC)/Traction Control
System (TCS) Indicator/Warning Light (2.0L Engine
Only) on page 136 for more information.
ESC (Electronic Stability Control) OFF
If your vehicle has Electronic Stability
Control (ESC), this message displays and the
ESC/TCS light on the instrument panel cluster
comes on solid when ESC is turned off. Adjust
your driving accordingly. See Electronic Stability
Control on page 200 and Electronic Stability
Control (ESC)/Traction Control System (TCS)
Indicator/Warning Light (2.0L Engine Only) on
page 136 for more information.
KEY FOB BATT (Battery) LOW
This message displays if the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter battery is low. Replace the
battery in the transmitter. See “Battery
Replacement” under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation on page 62.
LOW TRACTION
If your vehicle has the Traction Control System
(TCS), this message displays and the ESC/TCS
light on the instrument panel cluster flashes
when the system is actively limiting wheel spin.
Slippery road conditions may exist if this message
is displayed, so adjust your driving accordingly.
This message stays on for a few seconds after the
system stops limiting wheel spin. See Traction
Control System (TCS) on page 198 and
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/Traction Control
System (TCS) Indicator/Warning Light (2.0L
Engine Only) on page 136 for more information.
PARKING BRAKE
This message displays if the parking brake is left
engaged. See Parking Brake on page 86 for
more information.
150
SERVICE AIR BAG
SERVICE TRACTION
This message displays when there is a problem
with the airbag system. Have your vehicle serviced
by your dealer immediately.
If your vehicle has the Traction Control
System (TCS), this message displays and a chime
sounds when the system is not functioning
properly. The ESC/TCS light also appears on the
instrument panel cluster. This light stays on
solid as long as the detected problem remains
present. When this message displays, the system
is not working. Adjust your driving accordingly.
See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 198
and Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/Traction
Control System (TCS) Indicator/Warning
Light (2.0L Engine Only) on page 136 for more
information. Have the TCS serviced by your dealer
as soon as possible.
SERVICE ESC (ELECTRONIC STABILITY
CONTROL)
If your vehicle has Electronic Stability
Control (ESC), this message displays and a chime
sounds if there has been a problem detected with
ESC. The ESC/TCS light also appears on the
instrument panel cluster. This light stays on solid as
long as the detected problem remains present.
When this message displays, the system is not
working. Adjust your driving accordingly. See
Electronic Stability Control on page 200 and
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/Traction Control
System (TCS) Indicator/Warning Light (2.0L Engine
Only) on page 136 for more information.
If this message turns on while you are driving, pull
off the road as soon as possible and stop
carefully. Try resetting the system by turning the
ignition off and then back on. If this message
still stays on or turns back on again while you are
driving, your vehicle needs service. Have the
ESC inspected by your dealer as soon as possible.
TRACTION OFF
If your vehicle has the Traction Control
System (TCS), this message displays and the
ESC/TCS light on the instrument panel cluster
comes on solid when the TCS is turned off. Adjust
your driving accordingly. See Traction Control
System (TCS) on page 198 and Electronic Stability
Control (ESC)/Traction Control System (TCS)
Indicator/Warning Light (2.0L Engine Only)
on page 136 for more information.
151
TRUNK AJAR
This message displays when the trunk lid is not
closed completely. Make sure that the trunk
lid is closed completely. See Trunk on page 68
and Trunk Ajar Light on page 144.
DIC Vehicle Personalization
Your vehicle has personalization capabilities that
allow you to program certain features to a
preferred setting. All of the features listed may not
be available on your vehicle. Only the features
available will be displayed on the DIC.
The default settings for the features were set
when your vehicle left the factory, but may have
been changed from their default state since
that time.
To change feature settings, use the following
procedure:
Entering Personalization Menu
1. Turn the ignition on while the vehicle is
stopped.
To avoid excessive drain on the battery, it is
recommended that the headlamps are
turned off.
152
2. Press and hold the information and reset
buttons at the same time for one second, then
release to enter the personalization menu.
If the vehicle speed is greater than 2 mph
(3 km/h), only the UNITS menu will be
accessible.
3. Press the information button to scroll through
the available personalization menu modes.
Press the reset button to scroll through
the available settings for each mode.
If you do not make a selection within ten
seconds, the display will go back to the
previous information displayed.
Personalization Menu Modes
OIL LIFE RESET
When this feature is displayed, you can reset the
engine oil life system. To reset the system,
see Engine Oil Life System on page 252. See
“OIL LIFE” under DIC Operation and Displays on
page 146 for more information.
UNITS
This feature allows you to select the units of
measurement in which the DIC will display the
vehicle information. When UNITS appears on the
display, press and hold the reset button for at least
one second to scroll through the available settings:
ENGLISH (default in United States): All
information will be displayed in English units.
METRIC (default in Canada): All information will
be displayed in metric units.
Choose one of the available settings and press
the information button to select it and move on to
the next feature.
LOCK HORN
If your vehicle has Remote Keyless Entry (RKE),
this feature, which allows the vehicle’s horn to
chirp every time the lock button on the RKE
transmitter is pressed, can be enabled or disabled.
When LOCK HORN appears on the display,
press and hold the reset button for at least
one second to scroll through the available settings:
OFF (default): The horn will not chirp on the
first press of the lock button on the RKE
transmitter. The horn will still chirp on the second
press.
ON: The horn will chirp on the first press of the
lock button on the RKE transmitter.
See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation on page 62 for more information.
Choose one of the available settings and press
the information button to select it and move on to
the next feature.
UNLOCK HORN
If your vehicle has Remote Keyless Entry (RKE),
this feature, which allows the vehicle’s horn to
chirp on the first press of the unlock button on the
RKE transmitter, can be enabled or disabled.
When UNLOCK HORN appears on the display,
press and hold the reset button for at least
one second to scroll through the available settings:
OFF (default): The horn will not chirp when the
unlock button on the RKE transmitter is pressed.
ON: The horn will chirp on the first press of
the unlock button on the RKE transmitter.
See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation on page 62 for more information.
Choose one of the available settings and press
the information button to select it and move on to
the next feature.
153
LIGHT FLASH
DELAY LOCK
If your vehicle has Remote Keyless Entry (RKE),
this feature, which allows the vehicle’s exterior
hazard/turn signal lighting to flash every time the
lock, unlock, or trunk release buttons on the
RKE transmitter are pressed, can be enabled or
disabled. When LIGHT FLASH appears on
the display, press and hold the reset button for at
least one second to scroll through the available
settings:
This feature, which delays the actual locking of the
vehicle, can be enabled or disabled. When
DELAY LOCK appears on the display, press and
hold the reset button for at least one second
to scroll through the available settings:
OFF: The exterior hazard/turn signal lighting will
not flash when the lock, unlock, or trunk release
buttons on the RKE transmitter are pressed.
ON (default): The exterior hazard/turn signal
lighting will flash when the lock, unlock, or trunk
release buttons on the RKE transmitter are
pressed.
See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation on page 62 for more information.
Choose one of the available settings and press
the information button to select it and move on to
the next feature.
154
ON (default): The doors will not lock until
five seconds after the last door is closed. You can
temporarily override delayed locking by pressing
the lock button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter a second time.
OFF: The doors will lock immediately when
pressing the lock button on the RKE transmitter.
See Delayed Locking on page 66 and Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 62
for more information.
Choose one of the available settings and press
the information button to select it and move on to
the next feature.
AUTO UNLK (Unlock)
This feature, which allows the vehicle to
automatically unlock certain doors, can be enabled
or disabled. When AUTO UNLK appears on the
display, press and hold the reset button for at least
one second to scroll through the available settings:
ALL (default): All of the doors will automatically
unlock.
DRIVER: The driver’s door will
automatically unlock.
NONE: None of the doors will automatically unlock.
You will need to manually unlock the doors.
If you have a manual transmission vehicle, the
door(s) will automatically unlock when the key is
turned off.
If you have an automatic transmission vehicle, you
can select when the automatic unlocking will occur.
See “UNLK (Unlock) (Automatic Transmission
Only)” following.
See Automatic Door Unlock on page 67 for more
information.
Choose one of the available settings and press
the information button to select it and move on to
the next feature.
UNLK (Unlock) (Automatic
Transmission Only)
This screen displays only if your vehicle has an
automatic transmission and DRIVER or ALL is
selected for the AUTO UNLK feature. This feature
determines when the automatic door unlocking will
occur. When UNLK appears on the display, press
and hold the reset button for at least one second to
scroll through the available settings:
KEY OFF: The door(s) will unlock when the key
is turned off.
SHIFT TO P (Park) (default): The door(s) will
unlock when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).
See Automatic Door Unlock on page 67 for
more information.
Choose one of the available settings and press
the information button to select it and move on to
the next feature.
155
EXT (Exterior) LIGHTS
LANGUAGE
If your vehicle has Remote Keyless Entry (RKE),
this feature, which allows the vehicle’s exterior
perimeter lighting to turn on each time the unlock
button on the RKE transmitter is pressed, can
be enabled or disabled. When EXT LIGHTS
appears on the display, press and hold the reset
button for at least one second to scroll through the
available settings:
This feature allows you to select the language in
which the DIC will display. When LANGUAGE
appears on the display, press and hold the reset
button for at least one second to scroll through the
available settings:
ENGLISH (default): The DIC will display all
information in English.
FRENCH: The DIC will display all information
in French.
SPANISH: The DIC will display all information
in Spanish.
GERMAN: The DIC will display all information
in German.
Choose one of the available settings and press
the information button to select it and exit out
of the personalization menu mode.
OFF: The exterior perimeter lighting will not turn
on when the unlock button on the RKE
transmitter is pressed.
ON (default): The exterior perimeter lighting will
turn on when the unlock button on the RKE
transmitter is pressed.
See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation on page 62 for more information.
Choose one of the available settings and press
the information button to select it and move on to
the next feature.
156
Exiting Personalization Menu
The personalization menu will be exited when any
of the following conditions occur:
• A ten second time period has elapsed.
• The ignition is turned off.
• The end of the personalization menu list is
reached.
Audio System(s)
Determine which radio your vehicle has and then
read the pages following to familiarize yourself
with its features.
Driving without distraction is a necessity for a
safer driving experience. See Defensive Driving on
page 190. By taking a few moments to read this
manual and get familiar with your vehicle’s
audio system, you can use it with less effort, as
well as take advantage of its features. While your
vehicle is parked, set up your audio system by
presetting your favorite radio stations, setting the
tone and adjusting the speakers. Then, when
driving conditions permit, you can tune to
your favorite stations using the presets and
steering wheel controls if the vehicle has them.
{CAUTION:
This system provides you with a far greater
access to audio stations and song listings.
Giving extended attention to entertainment
tasks while driving can cause a crash and
you or others can be injured or killed.
Always keep your eyes on the road and
your mind on the drive — avoid engaging
in extended searching while driving.
Keeping your mind on the drive is important for
safe driving. For more information, see Defensive
Driving on page 190.
157
Here are some ways in which you can help avoid
distraction while driving.
While your vehicle is parked:
• Familiarize yourself with all of its controls.
• Familiarize yourself with its operation.
• Set up your audio system by presetting your
favorite radio stations, setting the tone, and
adjusting the speakers. Then, when driving
conditions permit, you can tune to your favorite
radio stations using the presets and steering
wheel controls if the vehicle has them.
Notice: Before adding any sound equipment
to your vehicle, such as an audio system,
CD player, CB radio, mobile telephone,
or two-way radio, make sure that it can be
added by checking with your dealer. Also,
check federal rules covering mobile radio and
telephone units. If sound equipment can be
added, it is very important to do it properly.
Added sound equipment may interfere with the
operation of your vehicle’s engine, radio, or
other systems, and even damage them.
Your vehicle’s systems may interfere with the
operation of sound equipment that has
been added.
158
Your vehicle has a feature called Retained
Accessory Power (RAP). With RAP, the audio
system can be played even after the ignition is
turned off. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
on page 80 for more information.
Setting the Time (Without Date
Display)
If your vehicle has an AM/FM base radio with a
single CD player and preset buttons numbered
one through six, the radio will have a clock button
for setting the time. You can set the time by
following these steps:
1. Turn the ignition key to ACC (accessory) or
RUN. Press the power knob, located in the
center of the radio, to turn the radio on.
2. Press the clock button until the hour numbers
begin flashing on the display. Press the clock
button a second time and the minute
numbers will begin flashing on the display.
3. While either the hour or the minute numbers
are flashing, turn the tune knob, located on
the upper right side of the radio, clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease
the time.
4. Press the clock button again until the clock
display stops flashing to set the currently
displayed time; otherwise, the flashing will stop
after five seconds and the current time
displayed will be automatically set.
To change the time default setting from 12 hour to
24 hour, press the clock button and then the
pushbutton located under the forward arrow label.
Once the time 12H and 24H are displayed,
press the pushbutton located under the desired
option to select the default. Press the clock button
again to apply the selected default, or let the
screen time out.
Setting the Time (With Date Display)
If your vehicle has a radio with a single CD
player, the radio has a clock button for setting the
time and date.
To set the time and date, follow these instructions:
1. Turn the ignition key to ACC (accessory) or
RUN. Press the power knob, located in the
center of the radio, to turn the radio on.
2. Press the clock button and the HR, MIN, MM,
DD, YYYY (hour, minute, month, day, and
year) displays.
3. Press the pushbutton located under any
one of the labels that you want to change.
Every time the pushbutton is pressed again,
the time or the date if selected, increases
by one.
• Another way to increase the time or date, is
to press the right SEEK arrow or FWD
(forward) button.
• To decrease, press the left SEEK arrow or
REV (reverse) button. You can also turn the
tune knob, located on the upper right side of
the radio, to adjust the selected setting.
The date does not automatically display. The only
way to see the date is by pressing the clock
button when the radio is on. The date with display
times out after a few seconds and goes back to
the normal radio and time display.
159
If your vehicle has a radio with a six-disc CD
player, the radio has a MENU button instead of
the clock button to set the time and date.
To set the time and date, follow these instructions:
1. Turn the ignition key to ACC (accessory) or
RUN. Press the power knob, located in the
center of the radio, to turn the radio on.
2. Press the MENU button. Once the clock
option is displayed.
3. Press the pushbutton located under that label.
The HR, MIN, MM, DD, YYYY displays.
4. Press the pushbutton located under any
one of the labels that you want to change.
Every time the pushbutton is pressed again,
the time or the date if selected, increases
by one.
• Another way to increase the time or date, is
to press the right SEEK arrow or FWD
(forward) button.
• To decrease, press the left SEEK arrow or
REV (reverse) button. You can also turn
the tune knob, located on the upper
right side of the radio, to adjust the
selected setting.
160
The date does not automatically display. The only
way to see the date is by pressing the MENU
button and then the clock button when the radio
is on. The date with display times out after a
few seconds and goes back to the normal radio
and time display.
To change the time default setting from 12 hour to
24 hour or to change the date default setting
from month/day/year to day/month/year, follow
these instructions:
1. Press the clock button and then the
pushbutton located under the forward arrow
label. Once the time 12H and 24H, and
the date MM/DD/YYYY (month, day, and year)
and DD/MM/YYYY (day, month, and year)
displays.
2. Press the pushbutton located under the
desired option.
3. Press the clock or MENU button again to
apply the selected default, or let the screen
time out.
Radio with CD (Base)
Finding a Station
BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1,
FM2, or AM. The selection displays.
f (Tune): Turn this knob to select radio stations.
© SEEK ¨: Press the right or left SEEK
arrow to go to the next or to the previous station
and stay there.
To scan stations, press and hold either SEEK
arrow for a few seconds until a beep sounds. The
radio goes to a station, plays for a few seconds,
then goes to the next station. Press either
SEEK arrow again to stop scanning.
Playing the Radio
The radio only seeks and scans stations with a
strong signal that are in the selected band.
O (Power/Volume): Press this knob to turn the
4 (Information): Press this button to switch the
display between the radio station frequency
and the time. While the ignition is off, press this
button to display the time.
system on and off.
Turn this knob clockwise or counterclockwise to
increase or decrease the volume.
The radio goes to the previous volume setting
whenever the radio is turned on. The volume can
still be adjusted by using the volume knob.
161
Setting Preset Stations
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
Up to 18 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM),
can be programmed on the six numbered
pushbuttons, by performing the following steps:
1. Turn the radio on.
` BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To adjust the
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, or AM.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons for three seconds until a beep
sounds. When that pushbutton is pressed and
released, the station that was set, returns.
5. Repeat Steps 2 through 4 for each pushbutton.
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
BASS/TREB (Bass/Treble): To adjust the bass
or treble, press the tune knob or the
BASS/TREBLE pushbutton until the desired tone
control label displays. Turn the tune knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or
decrease the setting. The current bass or treble
level displays. If a station’s frequency is weak, or
has static, decrease the treble.
EQ (Equalization): Press this button to adjust
BASS and TREBLE Settings.
162
balance or fade, press this button or the tune knob
until the desired speaker control label displays.
Turn the tune knob clockwise or counterclockwise
to adjust the setting.
Radio Messages
Calibration Error: The audio system has been
calibrated for your vehicle from the factory. If
Calibration Error displays, it means that the radio
has not been configured properly for your vehicle
and it must be returned to your dealer for service.
Loc (Locked): This message is displayed while
the THEFTLOCK® system has locked up the radio.
Take the vehicle to your dealer for service.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot
be corrected, contact your dealer.
Playing a CD (Single CD Player)
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.
The player pulls it in and the CD should begin
playing.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the
player, it stays in the player. When the ignition or
radio is turned on, the CD starts playing where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol displays.
As each new track starts to play, the track
number displays.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)
single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs
and the smaller CDs are loaded in the same
manner.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be
reduced due to CD-R quality, the method of
recording, the quality of the music that has been
recorded, and the way the CD-R has been
handled. There can be an increase in skipping,
difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loading
and ejecting. If these problems occur, check the
bottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD
is damaged, such as cracked, broken, or
scratched, the CD will not play properly. If the
surface of the CD is soiled, see Care of Your CDs
on page 187 for more information.
Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insert
more than one CD into the slot at a time, or
attempt to play scratched or damaged CDs, you
could damage the CD player. When using the
CD player, use only CDs in good condition
without any label, load one CD at a time, and
keep the CD player and the loading slot free of
foreign materials, liquids, and debris.
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught
in the CD player. If a CD is recorded on a
personal computer and a description label is
needed, try labeling the top of the recorded CD
with a marking pen.
If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later in
this section.
Z EJECT: Press the CD eject button to eject
the CD. If the CD is not removed, after several
seconds, the CD automatically pulls back into
the player.
f (Tune): Turn this knob to select tracks on the
CD currently playing.
If there is no apparent damage, try a known
good CD.
163
© SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to
go to the start of the current track, if more than
ten seconds have played. Press the right SEEK
arrow to go to the next track. If either SEEK arrow is
held or pressed multiple times, the player continues
moving backward or forward through the CD.
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this button
to reverse playback quickly. You will hear sound at
a reduced volume. Release this pushbutton to
resume playing the track. The elapsed time of the
track displays.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold this
pushbutton to advance playback quickly. You will
hear sound at a reduced volume. Release this
pushbutton to resume playing the track. The
elapsed time of the track displays.
RDM (Random): With the random setting, you
can listen to CD tracks in random, rather than
sequential order. To use random, do the following:
1. Press this button to play tracks from the
CD you are listening to in random order.
The random icon displays.
2. Press this button again to turn off random play.
The random icon disappears from the display.
164
RPT (Repeat): With the repeat setting, one track
can be repeated.
To repeat the track you are listening to, press and
release the RPT button. An arrow symbol
displays. Press RPT again to turn off repeat play.
4 (Information): Press this button to switch
the display between the track number, elapsed
time of the track, and the time. When the ignition is
off, press this button to display the time.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio
while a CD is playing. The CD remains inside the
radio for future listening.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to play
a CD while listening to the radio. The CD icon
and track number displays while a CD is in
the player. Press this button again and the system
automatically searches for an auxiliary input
device such as a portable audio player.
CD Messages
Using the Auxiliary Input Jack
CHECK DISC: If an error message displays
and/or the CD comes out, it could be for one of
the following reasons:
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or
upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour
and try again.
• There could have been a problem while burning
the CD-R.
• The label could be caught in the CD player.
Your radio system has an auxiliary input jack
located on the lower right side of the faceplate.
This is not an audio output; do not plug the
headphone set into the front auxiliary input jack.
You can however, connect an external audio
device such as an iPod, laptop computer, MP3
player, CD changer, or cassette tape player, etc. to
the auxiliary input jack for use as another source
for audio listening.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other
reason, try a known good CD.
Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliary
device while the vehicle is in PARK (P). See
Defensive Driving on page 190 for more
information on driver distraction.
To use a portable audio player, connect a
3.5 mm (1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s front
auxiliary input jack. When a device is connected,
press the radio CD/AUX button to begin playing
audio from the device over the car speakers.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot
be corrected, contact your dealer. If the radio
displays an error message, write it down
and provide it to your dealer while reporting
the problem.
165
O (Power/Volume): Turn this knob clockwise or
Radio with CD (MP3)
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the
volume of the portable player. You might need to
make additional volume adjustments from the
portable device.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio
while a portable audio device is playing. The
portable audio device continues playing, so you
might want to stop it or turn it off.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to play
a CD while a portable audio device is playing.
Press this button again and the system begins
playing audio from the connected portable audio
player. If a portable audio player is not
connected, “No Aux” displays.
166
Radio with CD (MP3) shown, Radio with
Six-Disc CD (MP3) similar
Radio Data System (RDS)
The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).
The RDS feature is available for use only on FM
stations that broadcast RDS information. This
system relies upon receiving specific information
from these stations and only works when the
information is available. While the radio is tuned to
an FM-RDS station, the station name or call letters
appears on the display. In rare cases, a radio
station can broadcast incorrect information that
causes the radio features to work improperly. If this
happens, contact the radio station.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in the
48 contiguous United States and Canada. XM™
offers a large variety of coast-to-coast channels
including music, news, sports, talk, traffic/weather
(U.S. subscribers), and children’s programming.
XM™ provides digital quality audio and text
information that includes song title and artist name.
A service fee is required in order to receive the
XM™ service. For more information, contact XM™;
In the U.S. at www.xmradio.com or call
1-800-852-XMXM (9696) or in Canada at
www.xmradio.ca or call 1-877-GET-XMSR
(438-9677).
Playing the Radio
O (Power/Volume): Press this knob to turn the
system on and off.
Turn this knob clockwise or counterclockwise to
increase or decrease the volume.
Speed Compensated Volume (SCV): The radio
has Speed Compensated Volume (SCV). While
SCV is on, the radio volume automatically adjusts
to compensate for road and wind noise as your
speed changes while driving. That way, the volume
level should sound about the same as you
drive. To activate SCV:
1. Set the radio volume to the desired level.
2. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu.
3. Press the pushbutton under the AUTO VOLUM
(automatic volume) label on the radio display.
4. Press the pushbutton under the desired Speed
Compensated Volume setting (OFF, Low, Med
(medium), or High) to select the level of radio
volume compensation. The display times out
after approximately 10 seconds. Each higher
setting allows for more radio volume
compensation at faster vehicle speeds.
167
Finding a Station
Storing a Radio Station as a Favorite
BAND: Press this button to switch between AM,
FM, or XM™ (if equipped). The selection displays.
Drivers are encouraged to set up their radio station
favorites while the vehicle is parked. Tune to your
favorite stations using the presets, favorites button,
and steering wheel controls if the vehicle has this
feature. See Defensive Driving on page 190.
f (Tune): Turn this knob to select radio stations.
© SEEK ¨: Press the right or left SEEK arrow
to go to the next or to the previous station and stay
there.
To scan stations, press and hold either SEEK
arrow for a few seconds until a beep sounds. The
radio goes to a station, plays for a few seconds,
then goes on to the next station. Press either
SEEK arrow again to stop scanning.
The radio only seeks and scans stations with a
strong signal that are in the selected band.
4 (Information) (XM™ Satellite Radio Service,
MP3, and RDS Features): Press the information
button to display additional text information related
to the current FM-RDS or XM™ station, or MP3
song. A choice of additional information such as:
Channel, Song, Artist, and CAT (category) can
display. Continue pressing the information button to
highlight the desired label, or press the pushbutton
positioned under any one of the labels and the
information about that label displays.
While information is not available, No Info displays.
168
FAV (Favorites): A maximum of 36 stations
can be programmed as favorites using the
six pushbuttons positioned below the radio station
frequency labels and by using the radio favorites
page button (FAV button). Press the FAV button to
go through up to six pages of favorites, each
having six favorite stations available per page.
Each page of favorites can contain any
combination of AM, FM, or XM™ (if equipped)
stations. To store a station as a favorite, perform
the following steps:
1. Tune to the desired radio station.
2. Press the FAV button to display the page
where you want the station stored.
3. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons
until a beep sounds. When that pushbutton
is pressed and released, the station that was
set, returns.
4. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton radio
station you want stored as a favorite.
The number of favorites pages can be setup using
the MENU button. To setup the number of
favorites pages, perform the following steps:
1. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu.
2. Press the pushbutton located below the
FAV 1 through 6 label.
3. Select the desired number of favorites pages
by pressing the pushbutton located below the
displayed page numbers.
4. Press the FAV button, or let the menu time
out, to return to the original main radio
screen showing the radio station frequency
labels and to begin the process of
programming your favorites for the chosen
amount of numbered pages.
Setting the Tone
(Bass/Midrange/Treble)
BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, or
Treble): To adjust bass, midrange, or treble, press
the tune knob until the tone control labels display.
Continue pressing to highlight the desired label, or
press the pushbutton positioned under the desired
label. Turn the tune knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to adjust the highlighted setting.
The highlighted setting can be adjusted by pressing
either the SEEK, FWD (forward) or REV (reverse)
button until the desired levels are obtained. If a
station’s frequency is weak, or has static, decrease
the treble.
To quickly adjust bass, midrange, or treble to the
middle position, press the pushbutton positioned
under the BASS, MID, or TREB label for more than
two seconds. A beep sounds and the level adjusts
to the middle position.
To quickly adjust all tone and speaker controls to
the middle position, press the tune knob for more
than two seconds until a beep sounds.
169
EQ (Equalization): Press this button to select
preset equalization settings.
To return to the manual mode, press the EQ
button until Manual displays or start to manually
adjust the bass, midrange, or treble by pressing
the tune knob.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To adjust balance or
fade, press the tune knob until the speaker control
labels display. Continue pressing to highlight the
desired label, or press the pushbutton positioned
under the desired label. Turn the tune knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust the
highlighted setting. The highlighted setting can be
adjusted by pressing either the SEEK, FWD, or
REV button until the desired levels are obtained.
To quickly adjust balance or fade to the middle
position, press the pushbutton positioned under the
BAL or FADE label for more than two seconds.
A beep sounds and the level adjusts to the middle
position.
To quickly adjust all speaker and tone controls to
the middle position, press the tune knob for more
than two seconds until a beep sounds.
170
Finding a Category (CAT) Station
CAT (Category): The CAT button is used to find
XM™ stations while the radio is in the XM™
mode. To find XM™ channels within a desired
category, perform the following:
1. Press the BAND button until the XM™
frequency is displayed. Press the CAT button
to display the category labels on the radio
display. Continue pressing the CAT button
until the desired category name displays.
2. Press either of the two buttons below the
desired category label to immediately tune
to the first XM™ station associated with that
category.
3. Turn the tune knob, press the buttons below
the right or left arrows displayed, or press the
right or left SEEK buttons to go to the next
or previous XM™ station within the selected
category.
4. To exit the category search mode, press the
FAV button or BAND button to display your
favorites again.
Undesired XM™ categories can be removed
through the setup menu. To remove an undesired
category, perform the following:
1. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu.
2. Press the pushbutton located below the
XM CAT label.
3. Turn the tune knob to display the category
you want removed.
4. Press the pushbutton located under the
Remove label until the category name
along with the word Removed displays.
5. Repeat the steps to remove more categories.
Radio Messages
Calibration Error: The audio system has been
calibrated for your vehicle from the factory. If
Calibration Error displays, it means that the radio
has not been configured properly for your vehicle
and it must be returned to your dealer for service.
Locked: This message displays when the
THEFTLOCK® system has locked up the radio.
Take the vehicle to your dealer for service.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot
be corrected, contact your dealer.
Radio Messages for XM Only
Removed categories can be restored by pressing
the pushbutton under the Add label when a
removed category displays or by pressing the
pushbutton under the Restore All label.
See XM Radio Messages on page 183 later in this
section for further detail.
The radio does not let you to remove or add
categories while the vehicle is moving faster than
5 mph (8 km/h).
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.
The player pulls it in and the CD should begin
playing.
Playing a CD (Single CD Player)
171
Playing a CD(s) (Six-Disc CD Player)
LOAD ^: Press this button to load CDs into the
CD player. This CD player holds up to six CDs.
To insert one CD, do the following:
1. Press and release the load button.
2. Wait for the message to insert the disc.
3. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,
label side up. The player pulls the CD in.
To insert multiple CDs, do the following:
1. Press and hold the load button for
two seconds. You will hear a beep and Load
All Discs displays.
2. Follow the displayed instruction on when to
insert the discs. The CD player takes up to
six CDs.
3. Press the Load button again to cancel loading
more CDs.
If the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD in the
player, it stays in the player. When the ignition or
radio is turned on, the CD starts playing where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol displays on
the CD. As each new track starts to play, the
track number displays.
172
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)
single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and
the smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be
reduced due to CD-R quality, the method of
recording, the quality of the music that has been
recorded, and the way the CD-R has been
handled. There can be an increase in skipping,
difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loading
and ejecting. If these problems occur, check the
bottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD
is damaged, such as cracked, broken, or
scratched, the CD will not play properly. If the
surface of the CD is soiled, see Care of Your CDs
on page 187 for more information.
If there is no apparent damage, try a known
good CD.
Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insert
more than one CD into the slot at a time, or
attempt to play scratched or damaged CDs, you
could damage the CD player. When using the
CD player, use only CDs in good condition
without any label, load one CD at a time, and
keep the CD player and the loading slot free of
foreign materials, liquids, and debris.
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught
in the CD player. If a CD is recorded on a
personal computer and a description label is
needed, try labeling the top of the recorded CD
with a marking pen.
If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later in
this section.
Z EJECT: Press the CD eject button to eject
CD(s). To eject the CD that is currently playing,
press and release this button. A beep sounds and
Ejecting Disc displays. Once the disc is ejected,
Remove Disc displays. The CD can be removed.
If the CD is not removed after several seconds, the
CD automatically pulls back into the player and
begins playing.
For the Six-Disc CD player, press and hold the eject
button for two seconds to eject all discs.
© SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go to
the start of the current track, if more than ten
seconds have played. Press the right SEEK arrow
to go to the next track. If either SEEK arrow is held,
or pressed multiple times, the player continues
moving backward or forward through the tracks on
the CD.
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this button
to reverse playback quickly. You will hear sound at
a reduced volume. Release this pushbutton to
resume playing the track. The elapsed time of the
track displays.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold this
button to advance playback quickly. You will hear
sound at a reduced volume. Release this button
to resume playing the track. The elapsed time
of the track displays.
f (Tune): Turn this knob to select tracks on the
CD currently playing.
173
RDM (Random): With the random setting, you
can listen to the tracks in random, rather than
sequential order, on one CD or all CDs in
a six-disc CD player. To use random, do one of
the following:
• Press the CD/AUX button, or for a single
CD player, insert a disc partway into the slot of
the CD player. A RDM label displays.
To play the tracks from the single CD in
random order, press the pushbutton positioned
under the RDM label until Random Current
Disc displays. Press the pushbutton again to
turn off random play.
• Press the CD/AUX button, or for a six-disc
CD player, press and hold the LOAD
button. A beep sounds and Load All Discs
displays. Insert one or more discs partway into
the slot of the CD player.
To play tracks from all CDs loaded in a
six-disc CD player in random order, press the
pushbutton positioned under the RDM
label until Randomize All Discs displays. Press
the same pushbutton again to turn off
random play.
174
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio
while a CD is playing. The CD remains inside the
radio for future listening.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to play
a CD while listening to the radio. The CD icon
and a message showing disc and/or track number
displays when a CD is in the player. Press this
button again and the system automatically
searches for an auxiliary input device, such as a
portable audio player. If a portable audio player is
not connected, “No Aux Input Device” displays.
Playing an MP3 CD-R or CD-RW Disc
Your vehicle’s radio system may have the
MP3 feature. If it has this feature, it is capable of
playing an MP3 CD-R or CD-RW disc. For
more information on how to play an MP3 CD-R or
CD-RW disc, see Using an MP3 on page 176
later in this section.
CD Messages
Using the Auxiliary Input Jack
CHECK DISC: If an error message displays
and/or the CD comes out, it could be for one of
the following reasons:
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or
upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour
and try again.
• There could have been a problem while burning
the CD.
• The label could be caught in the CD player.
Your radio system has an auxiliary input jack
located on the lower right side of the faceplate.
This is not an audio output; do not plug the
headphone set into the front auxiliary input jack.
You can however, connect an external audio
device such as an iPod, laptop computer, MP3
player, CD changer, or cassette tape player, etc. to
the auxiliary input jack for use as another source
for audio listening.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other
reason, try a known good CD.
Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliary
device while the vehicle is in PARK (P). See
Defensive Driving on page 190 for more
information on driver distraction.
To use a portable audio player, connect a
3.5 mm (1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s front
auxiliary input jack. When a device is connected,
press the radio CD/AUX button to begin playing
audio from the device over the vehicle’s speakers.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot
be corrected, contact your dealer. If the radio
displays an error message, write it down
and provide it to your dealer while reporting
the problem.
175
O (Power/Volume): Turn this knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the
volume of the portable player. You might need to
make additional volume adjustments from the
portable device.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio
while a portable audio device is playing. The
portable audio device continues to play, so you
might want to stop it or turn it off.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to play
a CD while a portable audio device is playing.
Press this button again and the system begins to
play audio from the connected portable audio
player. If a portable audio player is not connected,
“No Aux Input Device” displays.
176
Using an MP3
MP3 CD-R or CD-RW Disc
The radio plays MP3 files that were recorded on a
CD-R or CD-RW disc. The files can be recorded
with the following fixed bit rates: 32 kbps, 40 kbps,
56 kbps, 64 kbps, 80 kbps, 96 kbps, 112 kbps,
128 kbps, 160 kbps, 192 kbps, 224 kbps,
256 kbps, and 320 kbps or a variable bit rate.
Song title, artist name, and album can display
when recorded using ID3 tags version 1 and 2.
Compressed Audio
The radio also plays discs that contain both
uncompressed CD audio (.CDA files) and MP3
files. By default the radio reads only the
uncompressed audio and ignores the MP3 files.
Pressing the CAT (category) button toggles
between compressed and uncompressed
audio format.
MP3 Format
• Minimize the length of the file, folder, or
If you burn your own MP3 disc on a personal
computer:
• Make sure the MP3 files are recorded on a
CD-R or CD-RW disc.
• Avoid mixing standard audio and MP3 files on
one disc.
• The CD player is able to read and play a
maximum of 50 folders, 50 playlists, and
255 files.
• Create a folder structure that makes it easy to
find songs while driving. Organize songs by
albums using one folder for each album.
Each folder or album should contain 18 songs
or less.
• Avoid subfolders. The system can support up
to 8 subfolders deep, however, keep the total
number of folders to a minimum in order to
reduce the complexity and confusion in trying
to locate a particular folder during playback.
• Make sure playlists have a .mp3 or .wpl
extension (other file extensions may not work).
playlist names. Long file, folder, or playlist
names, or a combination of a large number of
files and folders, or playlists can cause the
player to be unable to play up to the maximum
number of files, folders, playlists, or sessions.
If you wish to play a large number of files,
folders, playlists, or sessions, minimize
the length of the file, folder, or playlist name.
Long names also take up more space on
the display, and might not fully display.
• Finalize the audio disc before you burn it.
Trying to add music to an existing disc
can cause the disc not to function in the
player.
Change playlists by using the previous and next
folder buttons, the tuner knob, or the seek buttons.
An MP3 CD-R that was recorded using no file
folders can also be played. If a CD-R contains
more than the maximum of 50 folders, 50 playlists,
and 255 files, the player lets you access and
navigate up to the maximum, but all items over
the maximum are not accessible.
177
Root Directory
The root directory of the CD-R is treated as a
folder. If the root directory has compressed audio
files, the directory displays as F1 ROOT. All
files contained directly under the root directory are
accessed prior to any root directory folders.
However, playlists (Px) are always accessed
before root folders or files.
Empty Directory or Folder
If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in
the file structure that contains only folders/
subfolders and no compressed files directly
beneath them, the player advances to the next
folder in the file structure that contains compressed
audio files. The empty folder does not display.
No Folder
When the CD-R contains only compressed files,
the files are located under the root folder. The next
and previous folder functions are not displayed
on a CD-R that was recorded without folders
or playlists. When displaying the name of the folder
the radio displays ROOT.
178
When the CD-R contains only playlists and
compressed audio files, but no folders, all files are
located under the root folder. The folder down
and the folder up buttons search playlists (Px) first
and then goes to the root folder. When the
radio displays the name of the folder, the radio
displays ROOT.
Order of Play
Tracks recorded to the CD-R are played in the
following order:
• Play begins from the first track in the first
playlist and continues sequentially through
all tracks in each playlist. When the last track
of the last playlist has played, play continues
from the first track of the first playlist.
• Play begins from the first track in the first
folder and continues sequentially through
all tracks in each folder. When the last track of
the last folder has played, play continues
from the first track of the first folder.
When play enters a new folder, the display does
not automatically show the new folder name unless
the folder mode was chosen as the default
display. The new track name displays.
File System and Naming
Playing an MP3
The song name that displays is the song name that
is contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is not
present in the ID3 tag, then the radio displays the
file name without the extension (such as .mp3) as
the track name.
Insert a CD-R partway into the slot (Single CD
Player), or press the load button and wait for the
message to insert disc (Six-Disc CD Player),
label side up. The player pulls it in, and the CD-R
should begin playing.
Track names longer than 32 characters or
four pages are shortened. Parts of words on the
last page of text and the extension of the filename
does not display.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD-R in
the player, it stays in the player. When the
ignition or radio is turned on, the CD-R starts to
play where it stopped, if it was the last selected
audio source.
Preprogrammed Playlists
Preprogrammed playlists that were created using
WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™
software, can be accessed, however, they cannot
be edited using the radio. These playlists are
treated as special folders containing compressed
audio song files.
As each new track starts to play, the track number
and song title displays.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)
single CD-Rs with an adapter ring. Full-size
CD-Rs and the smaller CD-Rs are loaded in the
same manner.
179
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be
reduced due to CD-R quality, the method of
recording, the quality of the music that has been
recorded, and the way the CD-R has been
handled. There can be an increase in skipping,
difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loading
and ejecting. If these problems occur, check the
bottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD
is damaged, such as cracked, broken, or
scratched, the CD will not play properly. If the
surface of the CD is soiled, see Care of Your CDs
on page 187 for more information.
If there is no apparent damage, try a known
good CD.
Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insert
more than one CD into the slot at a time, or
attempt to play scratched or damaged CDs, you
could damage the CD player. When using the
CD player, use only CDs in good condition
without any label, load one CD at a time, and
keep the CD player and the loading slot free of
foreign materials, liquids, and debris.
180
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught
in the CD player. If a CD is recorded on a
personal computer and a description label is
needed, try labeling the top of the recorded CD
with a marking pen.
If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later in
this section.
Z EJECT: Press the CD eject button to eject
CD-R(s). To eject the CD-R that is currently
playing, press and release this button. A beep will
sound and Ejecting Disc displays. Once the
disc is ejected, Remove Disc displays. The CD-R
can be removed. If the CD-R is not removed,
after several seconds, the CD-R automatically pulls
back into the player and begins playing. For the
Six-Disc CD player, press and hold the eject button
for two seconds to eject all discs.
f (Tune): Turn this knob to select MP3 files on
the CD-R currently playing.
© SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go to
the start of the current MP3 file, if more than
ten seconds have played. Press the right SEEK
arrow to go to the next MP3 file. If either
SEEK arrow is held or pressed multiple times, the
player continues moving backward or forward
through MP3 files on the CD.
S c (Previous Folder): Press the pushbutton
positioned under the Folder label to go to the
first track in the previous folder.
c T (Next Folder): Press the pushbutton
positioned under the Folder label to go to the first
track in the next folder.
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this button
to reverse playback quickly within an MP3 file. You
will hear sound at a reduced volume. Release
this button to resume playing the file. The elapsed
time of the file displays.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold this
button to advance playback quickly within an
MP3 file. You will hear sound at a reduced volume.
Release this button to resume playing the file.
The elapsed time of the file displays.
RDM (Random): With the random setting, MP3
files on the CD-R can be played in random, rather
than sequential order, on one CD-R or all discs
in a six-disc CD player. To use random, do one of
the following:
1. To play MP3 files in random order from the
CD-R that is currently playing, press the
pushbutton positioned under the RDM label
until Random Current Disc displays. Press the
same pushbutton again to turn off random play.
2. To play songs from all CDs loaded in a six-disc
CD player in random order, press the
pushbutton positioned under the RDM label
until Randomize All Discs displays. Press the
same pushbutton again to turn off random play.
h (Music Navigator): Use the music navigator
feature to play MP3 files on the CD-R in order
by artist or album. Press the pushbutton located
below the music navigator label. The player scans
the disc to sort the files by artist and album ID3
tag information. It can take several minutes to scan
the disc depending on the number of MP3 files
recorded to the CD-R. The radio can begin playing
while it is scanning the disc in the background.
When the scan is finished, the CD-R begins
playing again.
181
Once the disc has been scanned, the player
defaults to playing MP3 files in order by artist. The
current artist playing is shown on the second line of
the display between the arrows. Once all songs by
that artist are played, the player moves to the next
artist in alphabetical order on the CD-R and begins
playing MP3 files by that artist. If you want to listen
to MP3 files by another artist, press the pushbutton
located below either arrow button. The CD goes to
the next or previous artist in alphabetical order.
Continue pressing either button until the desired
artist displays.
To change from playback by artist to playback by
album, press the pushbutton located below the Sort
By label. From the sort screen, push one of the
buttons below the album button. Press the
pushbutton below the back label to return to the
main music navigator screen. The album name
displays on the second line between the arrows and
songs from the current album and begins to play.
Once all songs from that album are played, the
player moves to the next album in alphabetical
order on the CD-R and begins playing MP3 files
from that album.
182
To exit music navigator mode, press the pushbutton
below the Back label to return to normal MP3
playback.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio
while a CD is playing. The CD remains inside the
radio for future listening.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to play
a CD while listening to the radio. The CD icon
and a message showing disc and/or track number
displays while a CD is in the player. Press this
button again and the system automatically
searches for an auxiliary input device such as a
portable audio player. If a portable audio player is
not connected, “No Aux Input Device” displays.
XM Radio Messages
Radio Display Message
Condition
Action Required
XL (Explicit Language
Channels)
XL on the radio display,
after the channel name,
indicates content with
explicit language.
These channels, or any others, can be blocked at a
customer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
XM Updating
Updating encryption code The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, and
no action is required. This process should take no longer
than 30 seconds.
No XM Signal
Loss of signal
The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in a
location that is blocking the XM™ signal. When you move
into an open area, the signal should return.
Loading XM
Acquiring channel audio
(after four second delay)
The audio system is acquiring and processing audio and
text data. No action is needed. This message should
disappear shortly.
Channel Off Air
Channel not in service
This channel is not currently in service. Tune to another
channel.
Channel Unavail
Channel no
longer available
This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.
Tune to another station. If this station was one of the
presets, choose another station for that preset button.
No Artist Info
Artist Name/Feature
not available
No artist information is available at this time on this channel.
The system is working properly.
No Title Info
Song/Program Title
not available
No song title information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
183
Radio Display Message
Condition
Action Required
No CAT Info
Category Name
not available
No category information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
No Information
No Text/Informational
message available
No text or informational messages are available at this time
on this channel. The system is working properly.
CAT Not Found
No channel available for
the chosen category
There are no channels available for the selected category.
The system is working properly.
XM TheftLocked
Theftlock® active
The XM™ receiver in the vehicle may have previously been
in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM™ receivers
cannot be swapped between vehicles. If this message
displays after having your vehicle serviced, check with your
dealer.
XM Radio ID
Radio ID label (channel 0) If tuned to channel 0, this message alternates with the
XM™ Radio eight digit radio ID label. This label is needed
to activate the service.
Unknown
Radio ID not known
(should only be if
hardware failure)
If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, there
could be a receiver fault. Consult with your dealer.
Check XM Receivr
Hardware failure
If this message does not clear within a short period of time,
the receiver could have a fault. Consult with your dealer.
XM Not Available
XM™ Not Available
If this message does not clear within a short period of time,
the receiver could have a fault. Consult with your dealer.
184
Theft-Deterrent Feature
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
®
THEFTLOCK is designed to discourage theft of
your vehicle’s radio. The feature works
automatically by learning a portion of the Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN). If the radio is
moved to a different vehicle, it will not operate and
LOCK or LOCKED will appear on the display.
With THEFTLOCK® activated, the radio will
not operate if stolen.
Radio controls are
located on the right side
of the steering wheel.
If your vehicle has
this feature, some audio
controls can be
adjusted at this location.
They include the
following:
x w: Press the up or the down arrow to go to
the next or to the previous stored radio station and
stay there. Press and hold the up or down arrow
longer than three-quarters of a second to advance
to the next or previous station with a strong
signal in the selected band.
When a CD is playing, press the up or the down
arrow to go to the next or previous track. Press
and hold the up or down arrow longer than
three-quarters of a second to continue advancing
ahead or reversing back, to other tracks within
the disc.
185
+ − (Volume): Press the plus or minus button to
increase or to decrease the volume.
g (Mute/Voice Activation): Press this button to
silence the system. Press this button again to turn
the sound on. If your vehicle is equipped with
OnStar®, press and hold this button for two seconds
to activate voice on the OnStar system. See the
OnStar® System on page 94 in this manual for
more information.
reduce these levels during the night. Static can also
occur when things like storms and power lines
interfere with radio reception. When this happens,
try reducing the treble on your radio.
FM Stereo
FM stereo will give the best sound, but FM signals
will reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).
Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM
signals, causing the sound to fade in and out.
Radio Reception
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
You may experience frequency interference and
static during normal radio reception if items
such as cellphone chargers, vehicle convenience
accessories, and external electronic devices
are plugged into the accessory power outlet.
If there is interference or static, unplug the item
from the accessory power outlet.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio
reception from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous
United States, and in Canada. Just as with FM,
tall buildings or hills can interfere with satellite
radio signals, causing the sound to fade in and out.
In addition, traveling or standing under heavy
foliage, bridges, garages, or tunnels may cause
loss of the XM™ signal for a period of time.
The radio may display NO XM SIGNAL to indicate
interference.
AM
The range for most AM stations is greater than for
FM, especially at night. The longer range can cause
station frequencies to interfere with each other. For
better radio reception, most AM radio stations will
boost the power levels during the day, and then
186
Care of Your CDs
Fixed Mast Antenna
Handle CDs carefully. Store them in their original
cases or other protective cases and away from
direct sunlight and dust. The CD player scans the
bottom surface of the disc. If the surface of a
CD is damaged, such as cracked, broken,
or scratched, the CD will not play properly or not
at all. If the surface of a CD is soiled, take a
soft, lint free cloth or dampen a clean, soft cloth in
a mild, neutral detergent solution mixed with
water, and clean it. Make sure the wiping process
starts from the center to the edge.
The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car
washes without being damaged. If the mast should
ever become slightly bent, straighten it out by
hand. If the mast is badly bent, replace it.
Do not touch the bottom side of a CD while
handling it; this could damage the surface. Pick up
CDs by grasping the outer edges or the edge of
the hole and the outer edge.
Care of the CD Player
Check occasionally to make sure the mast is
still tightened to the fender. If tightening is
required, tighten by hand, then with a wrench
one quarter turn.
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
System
Your vehicle may have the XM™ Satellite Radio
antenna that is located on the trunk of your
vehicle. Keep this antenna clear of snow and ice
build up for clear radio reception.
Do not use CD lens cleaners for CD players
because the lens of the CD optics can become
contaminated by lubricants.
187
✍ NOTES
188
Section 4
Driving Your Vehicle
Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle .... 190
Defensive Driving ...................................... 190
Drunken Driving ........................................ 191
Control of a Vehicle .................................. 194
Braking ...................................................... 194
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 195
Braking in Emergencies ............................. 197
Traction Control System (TCS) .................. 198
Limited-Slip Rear Axle ............................... 200
Electronic Stability Control ......................... 200
Steering .................................................... 203
Off-Road Recovery .................................... 206
Passing ..................................................... 206
Loss of Control .......................................... 208
Driving at Night ......................................... 209
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ............ 211
City Driving ............................................... 214
Freeway Driving ........................................ 215
Before Leaving on a Long Trip .................. 216
Highway Hypnosis ..................................... 217
Hill and Mountain Roads ........................... 218
Winter Driving ........................................... 220
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud,
Ice, or Snow .......................................... 224
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out ........... 225
Loading Your Vehicle ................................ 226
Towing ........................................................ 231
Towing Your Vehicle ................................. 231
Recreational Vehicle Towing ...................... 231
Towing a Trailer ........................................ 231
189
Your Driving, the Road, and
Your Vehicle
Defensive Driving
The best advice anyone can give about driving is:
Drive defensively.
Please start with a very important safety device in
your vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: They
Are for Everyone on page 12.
190
{CAUTION:
Defensive driving really means “Be ready
for anything.” On city streets, rural roads,
or expressways, it means “Always expect
the unexpected.” Assume that pedestrians
or other drivers are going to be careless
and make mistakes. Anticipate what they
might do and be ready. Rear-end collisions
are about the most preventable of
accidents. Yet they are common. Allow
enough following distance. Defensive
driving requires that a driver concentrate
on the driving task. Anything that distracts
from the driving task makes proper
defensive driving more difficult and can
even cause a collision, with resulting
injury. Ask a passenger to help do these
things, or pull off the road in a safe place to
do them. These simple defensive driving
techniques could save your life.
Drunken Driving
Death and injury associated with drinking and
driving is a national tragedy. It is the number
one contributor to the highway death toll,
claiming thousands of victims every year.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to
drive a vehicle:
• Judgment
• Muscular Coordination
• Vision
• Attentiveness
Police records show that almost half of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most
cases, these deaths are the result of someone who
was drinking and driving. In recent years, more
than 16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths
have been associated with the use of alcohol, with
more than 300,000 people injured.
Many adults — by some estimates, nearly half
the adult population — choose never to drink
alcohol, so they never drive after drinking.
For persons under 21, it is against the law in
every U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are good
medical, psychological, and developmental
reasons for these laws.
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink
alcohol and then drive. But what if people do?
How much is “too much” if someone plans
to drive? It is a lot less than many might think.
Although it depends on each person and situation,
here is some general information on the problem.
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of
someone who is drinking depends upon four
things:
• The amount of alcohol consumed
• The drinker’s body weight
• The amount of food that is consumed before
and during drinking
• The length of time it has taken the drinker to
consume the alcohol
191
According to the American Medical Association,
a 180 lb (82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce
(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up
with a BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person
would reach the same BAC by drinking three
4 ounce (120 ml) glasses of wine or three mixed
drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces (45 ml) of
liquors like whiskey, gin, or vodka.
It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For example,
if the same person drank three double martinis
(3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour,
the person’s BAC would be close to 0.12 percent.
A person who consumes food just before or during
drinking will have a somewhat lower BAC level.
There is a gender difference, too. Women
generally have a lower relative percentage of
body water than men. Since alcohol is carried in
body water, this means that a woman generally
will reach a higher BAC level than a man of
her same body weight will when each has the
same number of drinks.
The law in most U.S. states, and throughout
Canada, sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent. In
some other countries, the limit is even lower.
For example, it is 0.05 percent in both France
and Germany. The BAC limit for all commercial
drivers in the United States is 0.04 percent.
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to
six drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we have
seen, it depends on how much alcohol is in the
drinks, and how quickly the person drinks them.
192
But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC
of 0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving
skills of many people are impaired at a BAC
approaching 0.05 percent, and that the effects are
worse at night. All drivers are impaired at BAC
levels above 0.05 percent. Statistics show that the
chance of being in a collision increases sharply for
drivers who have a BAC of 0.05 percent or above.
A driver with a BAC level of 0.06 percent has
doubled his or her chance of having a collision.
At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance of
this driver having a collision is 12 times greater;
at a level of 0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times
greater!
The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the
alcohol in one drink. No amount of coffee or
number of cold showers will speed that up.
“I will be careful” is not the right answer. What if
there is an emergency, a need to take sudden
action, as when a child darts into the street?
A person with even a moderate BAC might not
be able to react quickly enough to avoid the
collision.
There is something else about drinking and driving
that many people do not know. Medical research
shows that alcohol in a person’s system can make
crash injuries worse, especially injuries to the
brain, spinal cord, or heart. This means that when
anyone who has been drinking — driver or
passenger — is in a crash, that person’s chance
of being killed or permanently disabled is
higher than if the person had not been drinking.
{CAUTION:
Drinking and then driving is very
dangerous. Your reflexes, perceptions,
attentiveness, and judgment can be
affected by even a small amount of
alcohol. You can have a serious — or
even fatal — collision if you drive after
drinking. Please do not drink and drive
or ride with a driver who has been
drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if you
are with a group, designate a driver
who will not drink.
193
Control of a Vehicle
Braking
You have three systems that make your
vehicle go where you want it to go. They are the
brakes, the steering, and the accelerator. All
three systems have to do their work at the places
where the tires meet the road.
Braking action involves perception time and
reaction time.
Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow or
ice, it is easy to ask more of those control systems
than the tires and road can provide. That means
you can lose control of your vehicle. See Traction
Control System (TCS) on page 198 and
Electronic Stability Control on page 200.
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your
vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 235.
See Brake System Warning Light on page 134.
First, you have to decide to push on the brake
pedal. That is perception time. Then you have to
bring up your foot and do it. That is reaction time.
Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a
second. But that is only an average. It might be less
with one driver and as long as two or three seconds
or more with another. Age, physical condition,
alertness, coordination, and eyesight all play a part.
So do alcohol, drugs, and frustration. But even in
three-fourths of a second, a vehicle moving at
60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m). That
could be a lot of distance in an emergency, so
keeping enough space between your vehicle and
others is important.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary
greatly with the surface of the road, whether it is
pavement or gravel; the condition of the road,
whether it is wet, dry, or icy; tire tread; the
condition of the brakes; the weight of the vehicle;
and the amount of brake force applied.
194
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive
in spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic.
This is a mistake. The brakes may not have time to
cool between hard stops. The brakes will wear out
much faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you
keep pace with the traffic and allow realistic
following distances, you will eliminate a lot of
unnecessary braking. That means better braking
and longer brake life.
If your vehicle’s engine ever stops while you are
driving, brake normally but do not pump the
brakes. If you do, the pedal may get harder to
push down. If the engine stops, you will still have
some power brake assist. But you will use it
when you brake. Once the power assist is used
up, it may take longer to stop and the brake pedal
will be harder to push.
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your
vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 235.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
Your vehicle may have the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS), an advanced electronic braking
system that will help prevent a braking skid.
If your vehicle has ABS,
this warning light on the
instrument panel will
come on briefly when
you start your vehicle.
When you start your engine, or when you begin to
drive away, your ABS will check itself. You may
hear a momentary motor or clicking noise
while this test is going on, and you may even
notice that your brake pedal moves or pulses a
little. This is normal.
195
ABS can change the brake pressure faster than
any driver could. The computer is programmed to
make the most of available tire and road
conditions. This can help you steer around the
obstacle while braking hard.
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving
safely. Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of
you. You slam on the brakes and continue braking.
Here is what happens with ABS:
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down.
If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the
computer will separately work the brakes at each
wheel.
196
As you brake, your computer keeps receiving
updates on wheel speed and controls braking
pressure accordingly.
Remember: ABS does not change the time you
need to get your foot up to the brake pedal
or always decrease stopping distance. If you get
too close to the vehicle in front of you, you will not
have time to apply your brakes if that vehicle
suddenly slows or stops. Always leave enough
room up ahead to stop, even though you
have ABS.
Using ABS
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake
pedal down firmly and let anti-lock work for you.
You may feel a slight brake pedal pulsation
or notice some noise, but this is normal.
Braking in Emergencies
At some time, nearly every driver gets into a
situation that requires hard braking.
Momentum will carry it in whatever direction it was
headed when the wheels stopped rolling. That
could be off the road, into the very thing you were
trying to avoid, or into traffic.
If you do not have ABS, use a “squeeze” braking
technique. This will give you maximum braking
while maintaining steering control. You can do this
by pushing on the brake pedal with steadily
increasing pressure.
In an emergency, you will probably want to
squeeze the brakes hard without locking the
wheels. If you hear or feel the wheels sliding, ease
off the brake pedal. This will help you retain
steering control. If you do have ABS, it is different.
See Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) on page 195.
In many emergencies, steering can help you
more than even the very best braking.
If you have ABS, you can steer and brake at the
same time. However, if you do not have ABS, your
first reaction — to hit the brake pedal hard and
hold it down — may be the wrong thing to do.
Your wheels can stop rolling. Once they do, the
vehicle cannot respond to your steering.
197
Traction Control System (TCS)
Your vehicle may have a Traction Control System
(TCS) that limits wheel spin. This is especially
useful in slippery road conditions. The system
operates only if it senses that the rear wheels are
spinning too much or are beginning to lose
traction. When this happens, the system works the
rear brakes and reduces engine power by
closing the throttle and managing engine spark to
limit wheel spin.
This light will flash
when your traction
control system is limiting
wheel spin.
You may feel or hear the system working, but this
is normal.
See Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/Traction
Control System (TCS) Indicator/Warning Light
(2.0L Engine Only) on page 136 for more
information.
198
If your vehicle is in cruise control when TCS
begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise control will
automatically disengage. When road conditions
allow you to safely use it again, you may
re-engage the cruise control. See Turn
Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 111.
When this light is on
solid and either the
SERVICE TRACTION
or TRACTION OFF
message is displayed,
the system will not
limit wheel spin.
Adjust your driving accordingly. See DIC Warnings
and Messages on page 148 for more information.
The Traction Control System is automatically
enabled whenever you start your vehicle. To limit
wheel spin, especially in slippery road conditions,
you should always leave the system enabled.
You can turn TCS off if you ever need to.
It is recommended to leave the system on for
normal driving conditions, but it may be necessary
to turn the system off if your vehicle is stuck in
sand, mud, ice or snow, and you want to
“rock” your vehicle to attempt to free it. It may also
be necessary to turn off the system when driving
in extreme off-road conditions where high
wheel spin is required. See If Your Vehicle is
Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 224.
To turn the system off
or on, press and release
this button located on
the instrument panel.
The DIC will display the appropriate message as
described previously when you press the button.
Traction Control Operation
Traction control limits wheel spin by reducing
engine power to the wheels (engine speed
management) and by applying brakes to each
individual wheel (brake-traction control) as
necessary.
The traction control system is enabled
automatically when you start your vehicle, and it
will activate and flash the ESC/TCS light and
display the LOW TRACTION message if it senses
that any of the wheels are spinning or beginning
to lose traction while driving. For more information
on the LOW TRACTION message, see Driver
Information Center (DIC) on page 145.
Notice: If you allow the wheel(s) of one axle to
spin excessively while the ESC/TCS, ABS and
Brake warning lights and the SERVICE ESC
and/or SERVICE TRACTION messages are
displayed, you could damage the differential.
The repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Reduce engine power and do not spin
the wheel(s) excessively while these lights and
this message are displayed.
199
Notice: When traction control is turned off,
or Competitive Driving Mode is active, it is
possible to lose traction. If you attempt to shift
with the rear wheels spinning with a loss of
traction, it is possible to cause damage to the
transmission. Do not attempt to shift when the
rear wheels do not have traction. Damage
caused by misuse of the vehicle is not covered.
See your warranty book for additional
information.
Limited-Slip Rear Axle
The traction control system may activate on dry or
rough roads or under conditions such as heavy
acceleration while turning or abrupt upshifts/
downshifts of the transmission. When this
happens, you may notice a reduction in
acceleration, or may hear a noise or vibration.
This is normal.
During a sudden shift, such as shifting from
FIRST (1) to SECOND (2) gear at low engine
speeds or suddenly applying the clutch, you may
feel or hear a clunking or rattling noise. This is
normal.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the system
activates, the ESC/TCS light will flash and the
cruise control will automatically disengage. When
road conditions allow you to use cruise control
again, you may re-engage the cruise control. See
Cruise Control on page 115.
Your vehicle may be equipped with an Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system which combines
antilock brake, traction and stability control
systems and helps the driver maintain directional
control of the vehicle in most driving conditions.
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your
vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 235 for more information.
200
Your vehicle may have a limited-slip rear
differential which provides maximum power and
performance. It is designed to give you additional
traction on snow, mud, ice, sand or gravel. It
works like a standard axle most of the time, but
when one of the rear wheels has no traction
and the other does, this feature will allow
the wheel with traction to move the vehicle.
Electronic Stability Control
When you first start your vehicle and begin to drive
away, the system performs several diagnostic
checks to ensure there are no problems. You may
hear or feel the system working.
This is normal and does not mean there is
a problem with your vehicle. The system
should initialize before the vehicle reaches
20 mph (32 km/h).
If the system fails to turn on or activate, the
ESC/TCS light will be on solid, and the ESC OFF
or SERVICE ESC message will be displayed.
For more information, see Driver Information
Center (DIC) on page 145 and Electronic Stability
Control (ESC)/Traction Control System (TCS)
Indicator/Warning Light (2.0L Engine Only)
on page 136.
This light will flash on
the instrument panel
cluster when the
ESC system is both
on and activated.
You may also feel or hear the system working;
this is normal.
When the light is on solid and either the
SERVICE ESC or ESC OFF message is displayed,
the system will not assist the driver in maintaining
directional control of the vehicle. Adjust your
driving accordingly. See DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 148.
See Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/Traction
Control System (TCS) Indicator/Warning Light
(2.0L Engine Only) on page 136 for more
information.
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system is
automatically enabled whenever you start
your vehicle. To assist the driver with vehicle
directional control, especially in slippery road
conditions, you should always leave the system
on. But, you can turn ESC off if you ever need to.
If the vehicle is in cruise control when the system
begins to assist the driver maintain directional
control of the vehicle, the ESC/TCS light will flash
and the cruise control will automatically disengage.
When road conditions allow you to use cruise
again, you may re-engage the cruise control.
See Cruise Control on page 115.
201
The ESC/TCS button
is located on the
instrument panel.
The traction control system can be turned off
or back on by pressing the ESC/TCS button.
To disable both traction control and ESC, press
and hold the button briefly.
When the ESC system is turned off, the
TRACTION OFF and ESC OFF messages will
appear, and the ESC/TCS light will be on solid
to warn the driver that both traction control
and ESC are disabled.
It is recommended to leave the system on for
normal driving conditions, but it may be necessary
to turn the system off if your vehicle is stuck in
sand, mud, ice or snow, and you want to
“rock” your vehicle to attempt to free it. It may also
be necessary to turn off the system when driving
in extreme off-road conditions where high
wheel spin is required. See If Your Vehicle is
202
Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 224.
Also, see “Competitive Driving Mode” later in
this section.
ESC may also turn off automatically if it determines
that a problem exists with the system. The ESC
OFF and SERVICE ESC messages and the
ESC/TCS light will be on solid to warn the driver
that ESC is disabled and requires service. If
the problem does not clear after restarting the
vehicle, you should see your dealer for service.
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 148 for
more information.
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your
vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 235 for more information.
Competitive Driving Mode
The driver can select this optional handling mode
by pressing the ESC/TCS button on the console
two times within a five second time period.
COMPETITIVE MODE will be displayed in the DIC.
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 148 for
more information. Competitive Driving Mode allows
the driver to have full control of the rear wheels
while the ESC system helps maintain directional
control of the vehicle by selective brake application.
The ESC/TCS light will be on and the traction
control system will not be operating. Adjust your
driving accordingly. This electronic stability control
mode is recommended only for use during closed
track events and competitive driving venues.
When you press the ESC button again, or restart
the vehicle, the ESC and TCS will be turned
back on.
Notice: When traction control is turned off,
or Competitive Driving Mode is active, it
is possible to lose traction. If you attempt to
shift with the rear wheels spinning with a loss
of traction, it is possible to cause damage
to the transmission. Do not attempt to shift
when the rear wheels do not have traction.
Damage caused by misuse of the vehicle is
not covered. See your warranty book for
additional information.
Steering
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because the
engine stops or the system is not functioning,
you can steer but it will take much more effort.
Steering Tips
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents
mentioned on the news happen on curves.
Here is why:
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is
subject to the same laws of physics when driving on
curves. The traction of the tires against the road
surface makes it possible for the vehicle to change
its path when you turn the front wheels. If there is
no traction, inertia will keep the vehicle going in the
same direction. If you have ever tried to steer a
vehicle on wet ice, you will understand this.
203
The traction you can get in a curve depends on
the condition of your tires and the road surface,
the angle at which the curve is banked, and
your speed. While you are in a curve, speed is the
one factor you can control.
Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.
Then you suddenly apply the brakes. Both
control systems — steering and braking — have
to do their work where the tires meet the road.
Unless you have four-wheel anti-lock brakes,
adding the hard braking can demand too much of
those places. You can lose control.
The same thing can happen if you are steering
through a sharp curve and you suddenly
accelerate. Those two control systems — steering
and acceleration — can overwhelm those
places where the tires meet the road and make
you lose control. See Traction Control System
(TCS) on page 198 and Electronic Stability Control
on page 200.
204
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up
on the brake or accelerator pedal, steer the
vehicle the way you want it to go, and slow down.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you
should adjust your speed. Of course, the posted
speeds are based on good weather and road
conditions. Under less favorable conditions you will
want to go slower.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach
a curve, do it before you enter the curve, while
your front wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive”
through the curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady
speed. Wait to accelerate until you are out of
the curve, and then accelerate gently into
the straightaway.
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your
vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 235.
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more
effective than braking. For example, you come over
a hill and find a truck stopped in your lane, or a car
suddenly pulls out from nowhere, or a child darts
out from between parked cars and stops right in
front of you. You can avoid these problems by
braking — if you can stop in time. But sometimes
you cannot; there is not room. That is the time for
evasive action — steering around the problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies
like these. First apply your brakes — but, unless
you have anti-lock brakes, not enough to lock your
wheels.
See Braking on page 194. It is better to remove as
much speed as you can from a possible collision.
Then steer around the problem, to the left or
right depending on the space available.
An emergency like this requires close attention
and a quick decision. If you are holding the
steering wheel at the recommended 9 and
3 o’clock positions, you can turn it a full
180 degrees very quickly without removing either
hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly,
and just as quickly straighten the wheel once you
have avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive
driving at all times and wear safety belts properly.
205
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
You may find that your right wheels have dropped
off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while
you are driving.
The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a
two-lane highway waits for just the right moment,
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then
goes back into the right lane again. A simple
maneuver?
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a
two-lane highway is a potentially dangerous move,
since the passing vehicle occupies the same
lane as oncoming traffic for several seconds.
A miscalculation, an error in judgment, or a brief
surrender to frustration or anger can suddenly
put the passing driver face to face with the worst
of all traffic accidents — the head-on collision.
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off
the accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the
way, steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge
of the pavement. You can turn the steering wheel
up to one-quarter turn until the right front tire
contacts the pavement edge. Then turn your
steering wheel to go straight down the roadway.
206
So here are some tips for passing:
• Drive ahead. Look down the road, to the
sides, and to crossroads for situations
that might affect your passing patterns. If you
have any doubt whatsoever about making
a successful pass, wait for a better time.
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings,
and lines. If you can see a sign up ahead
that might indicate a turn or an intersection,
delay your pass. A broken center line
usually indicates it is all right to pass, providing
the road ahead is clear. Never cross a solid
line on your side of the lane or a double solid
line, even if the road seems empty of
approaching traffic.
• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want
to pass while you are awaiting an opportunity.
For one thing, following too closely reduces
your area of vision, especially if you are
following a larger vehicle. Also, you will not
have adequate space if the vehicle ahead
suddenly slows or stops. Keep back a
reasonable distance.
• When it looks like a chance to pass is coming
up, start to accelerate but stay in the right
lane and do not get too close. Time your move
so you will be increasing speed as the time
comes to move into the other lane.
If the way is clear to pass, you will have a
running start that more than makes up for the
distance you would lose by dropping back.
And if something happens to cause you
to cancel your pass, you need only slow down
and drop back again and wait for another
opportunity.
• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slow
vehicle, wait your turn. But take care that
someone is not trying to pass you as you pull
out to pass the slow vehicle. Remember to
glance over your shoulder and check the
blind spot.
• Check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance over your
shoulder, and start your left lane change
signal before moving out of the right lane to
pass. When you are far enough ahead of
the passed vehicle to see its front in
your vehicle’s inside mirror, activate the right
lane change signal and move back into
the right lane. Remember that your vehicle’s
passenger side outside mirror is convex.
The vehicle you just passed may seem to be
farther away from you than it really is.
207
• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a
time on two-lane roads. Reconsider before
passing the next vehicle.
• Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle too
rapidly. Even though the brake lamps are
not flashing, it may be slowing down or starting
to turn.
• If you are being passed, make it easy for the
following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps
you can ease a little to the right.
Loss of Control
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not have enough
friction where the tires meet the road to do what the
driver has asked.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to
steer and constantly seek an escape route or
area of less danger.
208
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking
reasonable care suited to existing conditions, and
by not overdriving those conditions. But skids
are always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your
vehicle’s three control systems. In the braking skid,
your wheels are not rolling. In the steering or
cornering skid, too much speed or steering in a
curve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force.
And in the acceleration skid, too much throttle
causes the driving wheels to spin.
A cornering skid and an acceleration skid
are best handled by easing your foot off the
accelerator pedal.
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off
the accelerator pedal and quickly steer the
way you want the vehicle to go. If you start
steering quickly enough, your vehicle may
straighten out. Always be ready for a second skid
if it occurs.
Of course, traction is reduced when water,
snow, ice, gravel, or other material is on the
road. For safety, you will want to slow down and
adjust your driving to these conditions. It is
important to slow down on slippery surfaces
because stopping distance will be longer and
vehicle control more limited.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction,
try your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration,
or braking, including reducing vehicle speed by
shifting to a lower gear. Any sudden changes could
cause the tires to slide. You may not realize the
surface is slippery until your vehicle is skidding.
Learn to recognize warning clues — such as
enough water, ice, or packed snow on the road to
make a mirrored surface — and slow down when
you have any doubt.
If you have the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS),
remember: It helps avoid only the braking skid.
If you do not have ABS, then in a braking skid,
where the wheels are no longer rolling, release
enough pressure on the brakes to get the wheels
rolling again. This restores steering control. Push
the brake pedal down steadily when you have to
stop suddenly. As long as the wheels are rolling,
you will have steering control.
Driving at Night
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving.
One reason is that some drivers are likely to
be impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with night
vision problems, or by fatigue.
Here are some tips on night driving.
• Drive defensively.
• Do not drink and drive.
• Adjust the inside rearview mirror to reduce the
glare from headlamps behind you.
• Since you cannot see as well, you may need
to slow down and keep more space between
you and other vehicles.
• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads.
Your vehicle’s headlamps can light up only so
much road ahead.
• In remote areas, watch for animals.
• If you are tired, pull off the road in a safe
place and rest.
209
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.
But as we get older these differences increase.
A 50-year-old driver may require at least twice as
much light to see the same thing at night as a
20-year-old.
What you do in the daytime can also affect your
night vision. For example, if you spend the
day in bright sunshine you are wise to wear
sunglasses. Your eyes will have less trouble
adjusting to night. But if you are driving, do not
wear sunglasses at night. They may cut down on
glare from headlamps, but they also make a
lot of things invisible.
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching
headlamps. It can take a second or two, or
even several seconds, for your eyes to re-adjust
to the dark. When you are faced with severe glare,
as from a driver who does not lower the high
beams, or a vehicle with misaimed headlamps,
slow down a little. Avoid staring directly into
the approaching headlamps.
210
Keep the windshield and all the glass on your
vehicle clean — inside and out. Glare at night is
made much worse by dirt on the glass. Even
the inside of the glass can build up a film caused
by dust. Dirty glass makes lights dazzle and
flash more than clean glass would, making the
pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.
Remember that the headlamps light up far less of a
roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep your
eyes moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimly
lighted objects. Just as the headlamps should be
checked regularly for proper aim, so should your
eyes be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer
from night blindness — the inability to see in dim
light — and are not even aware of it.
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
much tread left, you will get even less traction. It is
always wise to go slower and be cautious if rain
starts to fall while you are driving. The surface may
get wet suddenly when your reflexes are tuned for
driving on dry pavement.
The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see.
Even if your windshield wiper blades are in good
shape, a heavy rain can make it harder to see
road signs and traffic signals, pavement markings,
the edge of the road, and even people walking.
It is wise to keep your windshield wiping equipment
in good shape and keep your windshield washer
fluid reservoir filled with washer fluid. Replace your
windshield wiper inserts when they show signs
of streaking or missing areas on the windshield,
or when strips of rubber start to separate from
the inserts.
Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a
wet road, you cannot stop, accelerate, or turn as
well because your tire-to-road traction is not as
good as on dry roads. And, if your tires do not have
211
{CAUTION:
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They
may not work as well in a quick stop and
may cause pulling to one side. You could
lose control of the vehicle.
After driving through a large puddle of
water or a car wash, apply your brake pedal
lightly until your brakes work normally.
Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it can
if your tires do not have much tread or if the
pressure in one or more is low. It can happen if a
lot of water is standing on the road. If you can
see reflections from trees, telephone poles,
or other vehicles, and raindrops dimple the water’s
surface, there could be hydroplaning.
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds.
There just is not a hard and fast rule about
hydroplaning. The best advice is to slow down
when it is raining.
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
Driving too fast through large water puddles or
even going through some car washes can cause
problems, too. The water may affect your
brakes. Try to avoid puddles. But if you cannot,
try to slow down before you hit them.
Hydroplaning
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can
build up under your tires that they can actually ride
on the water. This can happen if the road is wet
enough and you are going fast enough. When your
vehicle is hydroplaning, it has little or no contact
with the road.
212
Notice: If you drive too quickly through deep
puddles or standing water, water can come in
through your engine’s air intake and badly
damage your engine. Never drive through water
that is slightly lower than the underbody of your
vehicle. If you cannot avoid deep puddles or
standing water, drive through them very slowly.
Driving Through Flowing Water
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
• Besides slowing down, allow some extra
{CAUTION:
Flowing or rushing water creates strong
forces. If you try to drive through flowing
water, as you might at a low water
crossing, your vehicle can be carried
away. As little as six inches of flowing
water can carry away a smaller vehicle.
If this happens, you and other vehicle
occupants could drown. Do not ignore
police warning signs, and otherwise
be very cautious about trying to drive
through flowing water.
following distance. And be especially careful
when you pass another vehicle. Allow yourself
more clear room ahead, and be prepared to
have your view restricted by road spray.
• Have good tires with proper tread depth.
See Tires on page 284.
213
City Driving
One of the biggest problems with city streets is
the amount of traffic on them. You will want
to watch out for what the other drivers are doing
and pay attention to traffic signals.
214
Here are ways to increase your safety in city
driving:
• Know the best way to get to where you are
going. Get a city map and plan your trip
into an unknown part of the city just as you
would for a cross-country trip.
• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross
most large cities. You will save time and
energy. See Freeway Driving on page 215.
• Treat a green light as a warning signal.
A traffic light is there because the corner
is busy enough to need it. When a light turns
green, and just before you start to move,
check both ways for vehicles that have not
cleared the intersection or may be running
the red light.
Freeway Driving
The most important advice on freeway driving
is: Keep up with traffic and keep to the right.
Drive at the same speed most of the other drivers
are driving. Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks
a smooth traffic flow. Treat the left lane on
a freeway as a passing lane.
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads
to the freeway. If you have a clear view of the
freeway as you drive along the entrance ramp, you
should begin to check traffic. Try to determine
where you expect to blend with the flow. Try to
merge into the gap at close to the prevailing speed.
Switch on your turn signal, check your mirrors, and
glance over your shoulder as often as necessary.
Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.
Mile for mile, freeways — also called thruways,
parkways, expressways, turnpikes, or
superhighways — are the safest of all roads.
But they have their own special rules.
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed
to the posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it
is slower. Stay in the right lane unless you want
to pass.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors.
Then use your turn signal.
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly
over your shoulder to make sure there is not
another vehicle in your blind spot.
215
Once you are moving on the freeway, make
certain you allow a reasonable following distance.
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
When you want to leave the freeway, move to the
proper lane well in advance. If you miss your
exit, do not, under any circumstances, stop and
back up. Drive on to the next exit.
Make sure you are ready. Try to be well rested.
If you must start when you are not fresh — such as
after a day’s work — do not plan to make too
many miles that first part of the journey. Wear
comfortable clothing and shoes you can easily
drive in.
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite
sharply. The exit speed is usually posted. Reduce
your speed according to your speedometer, not
to your sense of motion. After driving for any
distance at higher speeds, you may tend to think
you are going slower than you actually are.
Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it
serviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If it needs
service, have it done before starting out. Of course,
you will find experienced and able service experts
in GM dealerships all across North America. They
will be ready and willing to help if you need it.
Expect to move slightly slower at night.
Here are some things you can check before a trip:
• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir
full? Are all windows clean inside and outside?
• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you
checked all levels?
• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses
clean?
216
• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough
for long-distance driving? Are the tires
all inflated to the recommended pressure?
• Weather Forecasts: What is the weather
outlook along your route? Should you
delay your trip a short time to avoid a major
storm system?
• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?
Highway Hypnosis
Is there actually such a condition as highway
hypnosis? Or is it just plain falling asleep at the
wheel? Call it highway hypnosis, lack of
awareness, or whatever.
What can you do about highway hypnosis?
First, be aware that it can happen.
Then here are some tips:
• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with
a comfortably cool interior.
• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead
and to the sides. Check your rearview mirrors
and your instruments frequently.
• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,
service, or parking area and take a nap, get
some exercise, or both. For safety, treat
drowsiness on the highway as an emergency.
There is something about an easy stretch of road
with the same scenery, along with the hum of the
tires on the road, the drone of the engine, and the
rush of the wind against the vehicle that can make
you sleepy. Do not let it happen to you! If it does,
your vehicle can leave the road in less than a
second, and you could crash and be injured.
217
Hill and Mountain Roads
If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you are
planning to visit there, here are some tips that
can make your trips safer and more enjoyable.
• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check
all fluid levels and also the brakes, tires,
cooling system, and transmission. These parts
can work hard on mountain roads.
{CAUTION:
If you do not shift down, your brakes
could get so hot that they would not work
well. You would then have poor braking or
even none going down a hill. You could
crash. Shift down to let your engine assist
your brakes on a steep downhill slope.
Driving on steep hills or mountains is different
from driving in flat or rolling terrain.
218
• Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane
{CAUTION:
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with
the ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes
will have to do all the work of slowing
down. They could get so hot that they
would not work well. You would then have
poor braking or even none going down a
hill. You could crash. Always have your
engine running and your vehicle in gear
when you go downhill.
roads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wide
or cut across the center of the road. Drive at
speeds that let you stay in your own lane.
• As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There
could be something in your lane, like a stalled
car or an accident.
• You may see highway signs on mountains that
warn of special problems. Examples are long
grades, passing or no-passing zones, a falling
rocks area, or winding roads. Be alert to these
and take appropriate action.
• Know how to go down hills. The most important
thing to know is this: let your engine do some of
the slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when
you go down a steep or long hill.
• Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift
down to a lower gear. The lower gears help
cool your engine and transmission, and you can
climb the hill better.
219
Winter Driving
Here are some tips for winter driving:
• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
• You may want to put winter emergency
supplies in your trunk.
Also see Tires on page 284.
220
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom,
a supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some
winter outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight,
a red cloth, and a couple of reflective warning
triangles. And, if you will be driving under severe
conditions, include a small bag of sand, a piece
of old carpet, or a couple of burlap bags to help
provide traction. Be sure you properly secure these
items in your vehicle.
Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where the tires
meet the road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between the tires
and the road, you can have a very slippery
situation. You will have a lot less traction, or grip,
and will need to be very careful.
What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very cold
snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on.
But wet ice can be even more trouble because it
may offer the least traction of all. You can get
wet ice when it is about freezing, 32°F (0°C), and
freezing rain begins to fall. Try to avoid driving
on wet ice until salt and sand crews can get there.
The Traction Control System (TCS) improves
your ability to accelerate when driving on a slippery
road. But you can turn the TCS off if you ever
need to. You should turn the system off if
your vehicle ever gets stuck in sand, mud, ice,
or snow. See If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 224. Even though your
vehicle has the Traction Control System (TCS),
you will want to slow down and adjust your driving
to the road conditions. Under certain conditions,
you may want to turn the TCS off, such as
when driving through deep snow and loose gravel,
to help maintain vehicle motion at lower speeds.
See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 198
and Electronic Stability Control on page 200.
221
Accelerate gently. Try not to break the fragile
traction. If you accelerate too fast, the drive wheels
will spin and polish the surface under the tires
even more.
Unless you have the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS), you will want to brake very gently, too.
If you do have ABS, see Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) on page 195. This system improves
your vehicle’s stability when you make a hard
stop on a slippery road. Whether you have ABS or
not, you will want to begin stopping sooner than
you would on dry pavement. Without ABS, if
you feel your vehicle begin to slide, let up on
the brakes a little. Push the brake pedal down
steadily to get the most traction you can.
Remember, unless you have ABS, if you brake so
hard that your wheels stop rolling, you will just
slide. Brake so your wheels always keep rolling
and you can still steer.
• Whatever your braking system, allow greater
following distance on any slippery road.
• Watch for slippery spots. The road might
be fine until you hit a spot that is covered
with ice. On an otherwise clear road, ice
222
patches may appear in shaded areas where
the sun cannot reach, such as around clumps
of trees, behind buildings, or under bridges.
Sometimes the surface of a curve or an
overpass may remain icy when the
surrounding roads are clear. If you see a
patch of ice ahead of you, brake before you
are on it. Try not to brake while you are
actually on the ice, and avoid sudden steering
maneuvers.
If You Are Caught in a Blizzard
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could
be in a serious situation. You should probably
stay with your vehicle unless you know for
sure that you are near help and you can hike
through the snow. Here are some things to do
to summon help and keep yourself and your
passengers safe:
• Turn on your hazard flashers.
• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police
that you have been stopped by the snow.
• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around
you. If you do not have blankets or extra
clothing, make body insulators from
newspapers, burlap bags, rags, floor
mats — anything you can wrap around yourself
or tuck under your clothing to
keep warm.
{CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your
vehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbon
monoxide) gas to get inside. CO could
overcome you and kill you. You cannot
see it or smell it, so you might not know it
is in your vehicle. Clear away snow from
around the base of your vehicle, especially
any that is blocking your exhaust pipe.
And check around again from time to time
to be sure snow does not collect there.
Open a window just a little on the side of
the vehicle that is away from the wind.
This will help keep CO out.
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be
careful.
223
Run your engine only as long as you must. This
saves fuel. When you run the engine, make it
go a little faster than just idle. That is, push the
accelerator slightly. This uses less fuel for the heat
that you get and it keeps the battery charged.
You will need a well-charged battery to restart the
vehicle, and possibly for signaling later on with
your headlamps. Let the heater run for a while.
Then, shut the engine off and close the window
almost all the way to preserve the heat. Start
the engine again and repeat this only when you
feel really uncomfortable from the cold. But do it as
little as possible. Preserve the fuel as long as
you can. To help keep warm, you can get out of
the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises
every half hour or so until help comes.
224
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice, or Snow
In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck,
you will need to spin the wheels, but you do not
want to spin your wheels too fast. The method
known as rocking can help you get out when you
are stuck, but you must use caution.
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out
{CAUTION:
If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at high
speed, they can explode, and you or others
could be injured. And, the transmission or
other parts of the vehicle can overheat.
That could cause an engine compartment
fire or other damage. When you are stuck,
spin the wheels as little as possible. Do not
spin the wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h)
as shown on the speedometer.
Notice: Spinning the wheels can destroy
parts of your vehicle as well as the tires. If you
spin the wheels too fast while shifting the
transmission back and forth, you can destroy
the transmission.
First, turn the steering wheel left and right.
That will clear the area around the front wheels.
If your vehicle has traction control, you should
turn the traction control system off. See Traction
Control System (TCS) on page 198 and Electronic
Stability Control on page 200. Then shift back
and forth between REVERSE (R) and a forward
gear, or with a manual transmission between
FIRST (1) or SECOND (2) and REVERSE (R),
spinning the wheels as little as possible. To
prevent transmission wear, allow the wheels to
stop spinning before shifting gears. Release
the accelerator pedal while you shift, and press
lightly on the accelerator pedal when the
transmission is in gear.
For information about using tire chains on your
vehicle, see Tire Chains on page 302.
225
By slowly spinning the wheels in the forward
and reverse directions, you will cause a rocking
motion that may free your vehicle. If that does
not get your vehicle out after a few tries, it
may need to be towed out. If your vehicle does
need to be towed out, see Towing Your Vehicle
on page 231.
Loading Your Vehicle
It is very important to know how much weight
your vehicle can carry. This weight is called the
vehicle capacity weight and includes the weight of
all occupants, cargo, and all nonfactory-installed
options. Two labels on your vehicle show how
much weight it may properly carry, the Tire
and Loading Information label and the
Certification label.
226
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
or either the maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, and it
can change the way your vehicle handles.
These could cause you to lose control
and crash. Also, overloading can shorten
the life of your vehicle.
Tire and Loading Information Label
The Tire and Loading Information label also shows
the size of the original equipment tires (C) and
the recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D).
For more information on tires and inflation see
Tires on page 284 and Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 292.
There is also important loading information on the
vehicle Certification label. It tells you the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front and
rear axle. See “Certification Label” later in
this section.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
Label Example
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to the center pillar (B-pillar)
of your vehicle. With the driver’s door open,
you will find the label attached below the door
latch. This label shows the number of occupant
seating positions (A), and the maximum vehicle
capacity weight (B) in kilograms and pounds.
1. Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should never
exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your
vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver
and passengers that will be riding in your
vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
227
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals
1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated
in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how
this reduces the available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.
Your vehicle is neither designed nor intended
to tow a trailer.
228
Example 1
Item
A
B
C
Description
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for Example 1 =
Subtract
Occupant Weight @
150 lbs (68 kg) x 1 =
Available Occupant
and Cargo Weight =
Total
400 lbs (181 kg)
150 lbs (68 kg)
250 lbs (113 kg)
Example 2
Item
A
B
C
Description
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for Example 2 =
Subtract
Occupant Weight @
150 lbs (68 kg) x 2 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
Example 3
Total
Item
400 lbs (181 kg)
A
300 lbs (136 kg)
B
100 lbs (45 kg)
C
Description
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for Example 3 =
Subtract
Occupant Weight @
200 lbs (91 kg) x 2 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
Total
400 lbs (181 kg)
400 lbs (181 kg)
0 lbs (0 kg)
Refer to your vehicle’s Tire and Loading
Information label for specific information about
your vehicle’s capacity weight and seating
positions. The combined weight of the driver,
passengers, and cargo should never exceed
your vehicle’s capacity weight.
229
Certification Label
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
or either the maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, and it
can change the way your vehicle handles.
These could cause you to lose control
and crash. Also, overloading can shorten
the life of your vehicle.
A vehicle specific Certification label is attached
to the rear edge of the driver’s door. It tells
you the gross weight capacity of your vehicle,
called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).
The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle,
all occupants, fuel and cargo. Never exceed
the GVWR for your vehicle, or the Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR) for either the front or
rear axle.
230
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.
If you put things inside your vehicle — like
suitcases, tools, packages, or anything
else — they will go as fast as the vehicle goes.
If you have to stop or turn quickly, or if there
is a crash, they will keep going.
{CAUTION:
Things you put inside your vehicle can
strike and injure people in a sudden stop
or turn, or in a crash.
• Put things in the rear area of your
vehicle. Try to spread the weight
evenly.
• Never stack heavier things, like
suitcases, inside the vehicle so that
some of them are above the tops of
the seats.
• Do not leave an unsecured child
restraint in your vehicle.
• When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
Towing
Towing Your Vehicle
Consult your dealer or a professional towing
service if you need to have your disabled vehicle
towed. See Roadside Assistance Program on
page 368.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Notice: Dolly towing or dinghy towing your
vehicle may cause damage because of reduced
ground clearance. Always put your vehicle
on a flatbed truck.
Your vehicle was neither designed nor intended to
be towed with any of its wheels on the ground.
If your vehicle must be towed, see “Towing Your
Vehicle” earlier in this section.
Towing a Trailer
Your vehicle is neither designed nor intended to
tow a trailer.
231
✍ NOTES
232
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Service ........................................................ 235
Accessories and Modifications ................... 235
California Proposition 65 Warning .............. 236
Doing Your Own Service Work .................. 236
Adding Equipment to the Outside
of Your Vehicle ...................................... 237
Fuel ............................................................. 237
Gasoline Octane ........................................ 237
Gasoline Specifications .............................. 237
California Fuel ........................................... 238
Additives ................................................... 238
Fuels in Foreign Countries ........................ 239
Filling the Tank ......................................... 240
Filling a Portable Fuel Container ............... 242
Checking Things Under the Hood .............. 242
Hood Release ........................................... 243
Engine Compartment Overview .................. 244
Engine Oil ................................................. 247
Engine Oil Life System .............................. 252
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ............................ 254
Automatic Transmission Fluid .................... 256
Manual Transmission Fluid ........................ 256
Hydraulic Clutch ........................................ 256
Engine Coolant .......................................... 257
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap ............ 260
Engine Overheating ................................... 260
Cooling System ......................................... 262
Power Steering Fluid ................................. 268
Windshield Washer Fluid ........................... 269
Brakes ...................................................... 270
Battery ...................................................... 273
Jump Starting ............................................ 274
Rear Axle .................................................... 279
Bulb Replacement ....................................... 280
Halogen Bulbs ........................................... 280
Headlamps ................................................ 280
Front Turn Signal, Parking and
Fog Lamps ............................................ 281
Taillamps, Turn Signal, and Stoplamps ...... 281
Back-Up Lamps ......................................... 282
License Plate Lamp ................................... 282
Replacement Bulbs ................................... 283
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ....... 283
Tires ............................................................ 284
Winter Tires .............................................. 285
Tire Sidewall Labeling ............................... 286
Tire Terminology and Definitions ............... 289
233
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................. 292
Tire Inspection and Rotation ...................... 293
When It Is Time for New Tires .................. 295
Buying New Tires ...................................... 296
Different Size Tires and Wheels ................ 297
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..................... 298
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ............ 299
Wheel Replacement .................................. 299
Tire Chains ............................................... 302
If a Tire Goes Flat .................................... 302
Tire Inflator Kit .......................................... 303
Appearance Care ........................................ 314
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .......... 314
Fabric/Carpet ............................................. 315
Leather ...................................................... 316
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces ..................................... 317
Care of Safety Belts .................................. 317
Weatherstrips ............................................ 317
Washing Your Vehicle ............................... 318
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses ................ 318
Finish Care ............................................... 319
234
Windshield and Wiper Blades .................... 320
Convertible Top ......................................... 320
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ......... 321
Tires ......................................................... 322
Sheet Metal Damage ................................. 322
Finish Damage .......................................... 322
Underbody Maintenance ............................ 323
Chemical Paint Spotting ............................ 323
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ............ 324
Vehicle Identification .................................. 325
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ........... 325
Service Parts Identification Label ............... 325
Electrical System ........................................ 326
Add-On Electrical Equipment ..................... 326
Headlamp Wiring ....................................... 326
Power Windows and Other
Power Options ....................................... 326
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ....................... 326
Floor Console Fuse Block ......................... 327
Underhood Fuse Block .............................. 329
Capacities and Specifications .................... 332
Service
Accessories and Modifications
Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants
you to be happy with it. We hope you will go
to your dealer for all your service needs. You will
get genuine GM parts and GM-trained and
supported service people.
When you add non-GM accessories to your vehicle
they can affect your vehicle’s performance and
safety, including such things as, airbags, braking,
stability, ride and handling, emissions systems,
aerodynamics, durability, and electronic systems
like anti-lock brakes, traction control and
stability control. Some of these accessories may
even cause malfunction or damage not covered
by warranty.
We hope you will want to keep your GM vehicle all
GM. Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
GM Accessories are designed to complement
and function with other systems on your vehicle.
Your GM dealer can accessorize your vehicle
using genuine GM Accessories. When you go to
your GM dealer and ask for GM Accessories,
you will know that GM-trained and supported
service technicians will perform the work using
genuine GM Accessories.
235
California Proposition 65 Warning
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain
and/or emit chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and
systems (including some inside the vehicle), many
fluids, and some component wear by-products
contain and/or emit these chemicals.
Doing Your Own Service Work
{CAUTION:
You can be injured and your vehicle could
be damaged if you try to do service work
on a vehicle without knowing enough
about it.
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement
parts, and tools before you attempt
any vehicle maintenance task.
CAUTION:
236
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts,
and other fasteners. English and metric
fasteners can be easily confused. If you
use the wrong fasteners, parts can later
break or fall off. You could be hurt.
If you want to do some of your own service work,
you will want to use the proper service manual.
It tells you much more about how to service
your vehicle than this manual can. To order the
proper service manual, see Service Publications
Ordering Information on page 380.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before
attempting to do your own service work, see
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
on page 54.
You should keep a record with all parts receipts
and list the mileage and the date of any service
work you perform. See Part E: Maintenance
Record on page 357.
Adding Equipment to the Outside
of Your Vehicle
Things you might add to the outside of your
vehicle can affect the airflow around it. This may
cause wind noise and affect windshield washer
performance. Check with your dealer before
adding equipment to the outside of your vehicle.
Fuel
Use of the recommended fuel is an important
part of the proper maintenance of your vehicle.
To help keep your engine clean and maintain
optimum vehicle performance, GM recommends
the use of gasoline advertised as TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline.
If the octane is less than 87, you may notice a
heavy knocking noise when you drive. If this
occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher
as soon as possible. Otherwise, you might
damage your engine. If you are using gasoline
rated at 87 octane or higher and you hear heavy
knocking, your engine needs service.
Gasoline Specifications
At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM
specification D 4814 in the United States or
CAN/CGSB-3.5 in Canada. Some gasolines may
contain an octane-enhancing additive called
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT). General Motors recommends against the
use of gasolines containing MMT. See Additives
on page 238 for additional information.
Gasoline Octane
Use premium unleaded gasoline with a posted
octane rating of 91 or higher. You may also
use regular unleaded gasoline rated at 87 octane
or higher, but your vehicle’s acceleration may
be slightly reduced, and you may notice a slight
audible knocking noise, commonly referred to
as spark knock.
237
California Fuel
Additives
If your vehicle is certified to meet California
Emissions Standards, it is designed to operate
on fuels that meet California specifications.
See the underhood emission control label. If this
fuel is not available in states adopting California
emissions standards, your vehicle will operate
satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal
specifications, but emission control system
performance may be affected. The malfunction
indicator lamp may turn on and your vehicle may
fail a smog-check test. See Malfunction Indicator
Lamp on page 138. If this occurs, return to
your authorized GM dealer for diagnosis. If it is
determined that the condition is caused by the
type of fuel used, repairs may not be covered
by your warranty.
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United
States are now required to contain additives
that will help prevent engine and fuel system
deposits from forming, allowing your emission
control system to work properly. In most cases,
you should not have to add anything to your fuel.
However, some gasolines contain only the
minimum amount of additive required to meet
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency regulations.
To help keep fuel injectors and intake valves
clean, or if your vehicle experiences problems due
to dirty injectors or valves, look for gasoline that
is advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.
Also, your dealer has additives that will help
correct and prevent most deposit-related problems.
238
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers
and ethanol, and reformulated gasolines may
be available in your area. General Motors
recommends that you use these gasolines if they
comply with the specifications described earlier.
However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuels
containing more than 10% ethanol must not be
used in vehicles that were not designed for
those fuels.
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for
fuel that contains methanol. Do not use
fuel containing methanol. It can corrode metal
parts in your fuel system and also damage
the plastic and rubber parts. That damage
would not be covered under your warranty.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions may contain an octane-enhancing
additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant where you
buy gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT.
General Motors recommends against the use of
such gasolines. Fuels containing MMT can reduce
the life of spark plugs and the performance of
the emission control system may be affected. The
malfunction indicator lamp may turn on. If this
occurs, return to your dealer for service.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside
the United States or Canada, the proper fuel may
be hard to find. Never use leaded gasoline or
any other fuel not recommended in the previous
text on fuel. Costly repairs caused by use of
improper fuel would not be covered by your
warranty.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business
in the country where you will be driving.
239
Filling the Tank
{CAUTION:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire
can cause bad injuries. To help avoid
injuries to you and others, read and follow
all the instructions on the pump island.
Turn off your engine when you are
refueling. Do not smoke if you are near
fuel or refueling your vehicle. Keep
sparks, flames, and smoking materials
away from fuel. Do not leave the fuel
pump unattended when refueling your
vehicle. This is against the law in some
places. Keep children away from the fuel
pump; never let children pump fuel.
The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged
fuel door on the driver side of the vehicle.
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly
counterclockwise. The fuel cap has a spring in it; if
the cap is released too soon, it will spring back
to the right.
While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap from
the hook on the fuel door.
240
{CAUTION:
If you spill fuel and then something
ignites it, you could be badly burned.
Fuel can spray out on you if you open
the fuel cap too quickly. This spray can
happen if your tank is nearly full, and is
more likely in hot weather. Open the fuel
cap slowly and wait for any hiss noise to
stop. Then unscrew the cap all the way.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill
the tank and wait a few seconds after you have
finished pumping before removing the nozzle.
Clean fuel from painted surfaces as soon as
possible. See Washing Your Vehicle on page 318.
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise until
it clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed. The
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap
has been left off or improperly installed. This would
allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 138.
If your vehicle has a Driver Information Center
(DIC), the CHECK GAS CAP message will
be displayed if the fuel cap is not properly
installed. See DIC Warnings and Messages on
page 148 for more information.
{CAUTION:
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do
not remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow
of fuel by shutting off the pump or by
notifying the station attendant. Leave the
area immediately.
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to
get the right type. Your dealer can get one
for you. If you get the wrong type, it may not
fit properly. This may cause your malfunction
indicator lamp to light and may damage
your fuel tank and emissions system. See
Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 138.
241
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
Checking Things Under
the Hood
{CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it
is in your vehicle. Static electricity
discharge from the container can ignite the
gasoline vapor. You can be badly burned
and your vehicle damaged if this occurs.
To help avoid injury to you and others:
• Dispense gasoline only into approved
containers.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup
bed, or on any surface other than the
ground.
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before
operating the nozzle. Contact should
be maintained until the filling is
complete.
• Do not smoke while pumping gasoline.
242
{CAUTION:
An electric fan under the hood can start up
and injure you even when the engine is not
running. Keep hands, clothing, and tools
away from any underhood electric fan.
{CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine
parts and start a fire. These include
liquids like fuel, oil, coolant, brake fluid,
windshield washer and other fluids, and
plastic or rubber. You or others could be
burned. Be careful not to drop or spill
things that will burn onto a hot engine.
Hood Release
To open the hood, do the following:
1. Locate the interior
hood release lever.
It is located below
the instrument panel
on the driver’s side
of the vehicle.
3. Go to the side of the vehicle and pull up on
the rear edge of the hood, near the windshield
to open the hood.
Notice: Closing the hood with the doors open
may damage the hood and/or doors. Always
close the doors before closing the hood.
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps
are on properly. Then, pull the hood down and
close it firmly.
2. Pull down on the
rear edge of the
lever to release
the hood latch.
243
Engine Compartment Overview
When you open the hood on the 2.4L L4 engine, this is what you will see:
244
A. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See
“Adding Washer Fluid” under Windshield
Washer Fluid on page 269.
B. Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap. See
Cooling System on page 262.
C. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake
Fluid” under Brakes on page 270 and Hydraulic
Clutch on page 256.
D. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of View). See
“Checking Engine Oil” under Engine Oil on
page 247.
E. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 254.
F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine
Oil” under Engine Oil on page 247.
G. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power
Steering Fluid on page 268.
H. Remote Negative (−) Ground (Out of View).
See Jump Starting on page 274.
I. Battery (Out of View). See Battery on page 273.
J. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump
Starting on page 274.
K. Underhood Fuse Block. See Underhood Fuse
Block on page 329.
245
When you open the hood on the 2.0L L4 engine, this is what you will see:
246
A. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See
“Adding Washer Fluid” under Windshield
Washer Fluid on page 269.
B. Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap. See
Cooling System on page 262.
C. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake
Fluid” under Brakes on page 270 and Hydraulic
Clutch on page 256.
D. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 247.
E. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 254.
F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine
Oil” under Engine Oil on page 247.
G. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power
Steering Fluid on page 268.
H. Remote Negative (−) Ground (Out of View).
See Jump Starting on page 274.
I. Battery (Out of View). See Battery on page 273.
J. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump
Starting on page 274.
K. Underhood Fuse Block. See Underhood Fuse
Block on page 329.
Engine Oil
Checking Engine Oil
It is a good idea to check the engine oil every time
you get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading,
the oil must be warm and the vehicle must be
on level ground.
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 244
for the location of the engine oil dipstick.
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several
minutes to drain back into the oil pan. If you
do not do this, the oil dipstick might not
show the actual level.
2. Pull the dipstick and clean it with a paper
towel or cloth, then push it back in all the
way. Remove it again, keeping the tip down
and check the level.
247
When to Add Engine Oil
If the oil is below the MIN (minimum) mark, you
will need to add at least one quart/liter of oil.
But you must use the right kind. This section
explains what kind of oil to use. For engine
oil crankcase capacity, see Capacities and
Specifications on page 332.
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine
has so much oil that the oil level gets above
the upper mark that shows the proper
operating range, the engine could be damaged.
248
2.4L L4 Engine
2.0L L4 Engine
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 244
for the location of the engine oil fill cap.
Be sure to add enough oil to put the level
somewhere in the proper operating range. Push
the dipstick all the way back in when you are
through.
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
For Vehicles With the 2.0L L4 Engine
Look for two things:
• GM4718M
Your vehicle’s engine requires a special oil
meeting GM Standard GM4718M, such
as Mobil 1® or equivalent. Oils meeting this
standard may be identified as synthetic.
However, not all synthetic oils will meet this
GM standard. You should look for and use only
an oil that meets GM Standard GM4718M.
Notice: If you use oils that do not have the
GM4718M Standard designation, you can cause
engine damage not covered by your warranty.
• SAE 5W-30
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30
is best for your vehicle.
These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other
viscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50.
Oils meeting these
requirements should
also have the
starburst symbol on
the container. This
symbol indicates
that the oil has been
certified by the
American Petroleum
Institute (API).
You should look for this on the oil container, and
use only those oils that are identified as meeting
GM Standard GM4718M and have the starburst
symbol on the front of the oil container.
249
Your vehicle’s engine is filled at the factory with
a synthetic oil which meets all requirements
for your vehicle.
For Vehicles With the 2.4L L4 Engine
Substitute Engine Oil: When adding oil to maintain
engine oil level, oil meeting GM Standard
GM4718M may not be available. You can add
substitute oil designated SAE 5W-30 with
the starburst symbol at all temperatures. Substitute
oil not meeting GM Standard GM4718M should
not be used for an oil change.
Look for two things:
• GM6094M
Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting
GM Standard GM6094M. You should look for
and use only an oil that meets GM Standard
GM6094M.
• SAE 5W-30
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30
is best for your vehicle.
250
These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other
viscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50.
Oils meeting these
requirements should
also have the starburst
symbol on the
container. This symbol
indicates that the oil
has been certified by the
American Petroleum
Institute (API).
You should look for this information on the oil
container, and use only those oils that are identified
as meeting GM Standard GM6094M and have the
starburst symbol on the front of the oil container.
Notice: Use only engine oil identified as
meeting GM Standard GM6094M and showing
the American Petroleum Institute Certified
For Gasoline Engines starburst symbol. Failure
to use the recommended oil can result in
engine damage not covered by your warranty.
If you are in an area of extreme cold, where the
temperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it is
recommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both will
provide easier cold starting and better protection
for the engine at extremely low temperatures.
Engine Oil Additives
Do not add anything to the oil. The recommended
oils with the starburst symbol that meet GM
Standard GM6094M are all you will need for good
performance and engine protection.
When to Change Engine Oil (Vehicles
Without a Driver Information Center)
If your vehicle does not have a Driver Information
Center (DIC), change the engine oil and filter
at the intervals specified in the maintenance
schedule. See Scheduled Maintenance on
page 337.
If your vehicle has a DIC, it has the Engine Oil
Life System. See Engine Oil Life System on
page 252 for information on when to change the
engine oil.
GM Goodwrench® oil meets all the requirements
for your vehicle.
251
Engine Oil Life System
When to Change Engine Oil (Vehicles
With Driver Information Center)
If your vehicle has a Driver Information Center
(DIC), it has the Engine Oil Life System, a
computer system that lets you know when to
change the engine oil and filter. This is based on
engine revolutions and engine temperature,
and not on mileage. Based on driving conditions,
the mileage at which an oil change will be
indicated can vary considerably. For the oil life
system to work properly, you must reset the
system every time the oil is changed.
When the system has calculated that oil life has
been diminished, it will indicate that an oil change
is necessary. A CHANGE OIL SOON message
will come on. See DIC Warnings and Messages on
page 148. Change the oil as soon as possible
within the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible
that, if you are driving under the best conditions,
the oil life system may not indicate that an oil
change is necessary for over a year.
252
However, the engine oil and filter must be changed
at least once a year and at this time the system
must be reset. Your dealer has GM-trained service
people who will perform this work using genuine
GM parts and reset the system. It is also important
to check your oil regularly and keep it at the
proper level.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must
change the oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since
the last oil change. Remember to reset the oil life
system whenever the oil is changed.
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life
System
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to
change your engine oil and filter based on vehicle
use. Anytime your oil is changed, reset the
system so it can calculate when the next oil
change is required. If a situation occurs where you
change your oil prior to a CHANGE OIL SOON
message being turned on, reset the system.
After changing the engine oil, the system must be
reset as follows:
1. Turn the ignition to RUN, with the engine off.
2. Press the information and reset buttons
on the DIC at the same time to enter the
personalization menu. See DIC Vehicle
Personalization on page 152.
3. Press the information button to scroll through
the available personalization menu modes
until the DIC display shows OIL-LIFE RESET.
4. Press and hold the reset button until the DIC
display shows ACKNOWLEDGED. This will
tell you the system has been reset.
5. Turn the key to LOCK.
If the CHANGE OIL SOON message comes back
on when you start your vehicle, the engine oil
life system has not reset. Repeat the reset
procedure.
What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains certain elements that
may be unhealthy for your skin and could
even cause cancer. Do not let used oil stay on
your skin for very long. Clean your skin and nails
with soap and water, or a good hand cleaner.
Wash or properly dispose of clothing or rags
containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s
warnings about the use and disposal of oil
products.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from
the filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by
putting it in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into
sewers, or into streams or bodies of water. Instead,
recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used
oil. If you have a problem properly disposing of
used oil, ask your dealer, a service station, or a
local recycling center for help.
253
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
2.0L L4 Engine
2.4L L4 Engine
254
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 244
for the location of the engine air cleaner/filter.
When to Inspect the Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter
Inspect the air cleaner/filter element at each
scheduled Maintenance II service interval and
replace the air cleaner/filter element at the
first oil change after 50,000 miles (85 000 km).
If you are driving in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect
the filter at each engine oil change.
How to Inspect the Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter
To inspect the air cleaner/filter remove the filter
from the vehicle and lightly shake the filter to
release loose dust and dirt. If the filter remains
caked with dirt, a new filter is required.
To inspect or replace the filter, open the clamps
that hold the cover on and lift off the cover.
Be sure to reinstall the cover tightly.
{CAUTION:
Operating the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off can cause you or others
to be burned. The air cleaner not only
cleans the air; it helps to stop flames if
the engine backfires. If it is not there
and the engine backfires, you could be
burned. Do not drive with it off, and be
careful working on the engine with the
air cleaner/filter off.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire
can cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt
can easily get into your engine, which will
damage it. Always have the air cleaner/filter in
place when you are driving.
255
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Manual Transmission Fluid
It is not necessary to check the transmission
fluid level. A transmission fluid leak is the only
reason for fluid loss. If a leak occurs, take
your vehicle to the dealership service department
and have it repaired as soon as possible.
It is not necessary to check the manual
transmission fluid level. A transmission fluid leak
is the only reason for fluid loss. If a leak occurs,
take the vehicle to the dealership service
department and have it repaired as soon as
possible. You may also have your fluid level
checked by your dealer when you have your
oil changed. See Part D: Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 353 for the proper
fluid to use.
Change the fluid and filter at the intervals
listed in the Maintenance Schedule. See
Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services on
page 336. Be sure to use the transmission fluid
listed in Part D: Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 353.
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic
transmission fluid may damage your
vehicle, and the damages may not be
covered by your warranty. Always use
the automatic transmission fluid listed
in Part D: Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 353.
256
Hydraulic Clutch
The hydraulic clutch linkage in your vehicle is
self-adjusting. This system does not have its own
reservoir. It receives fluid from the brake master
cylinder reservoir.
See Brakes on page 270 for more information.
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is
designed to remain in your vehicle for five years or
150,000 miles (240 000 km), whichever occurs
first, if you add only DEX-COOL® extended
life coolant.
The following explains your cooling system and
how to add coolant when it is low. If you have
a problem with engine overheating, see Engine
Overheating on page 260.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL®
may cause premature engine, heater core,
or radiator corrosion. In addition, the engine
coolant may require changing sooner, at
the first maintenance service after each
30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,
whichever occurs first. Any repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your
vehicle.
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant will:
• Give freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C).
• Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
• Protect against rust and corrosion.
• Help keep the proper engine temperature.
• Let the warning lights and gages work as
they should.
257
What to Use
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water
and one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which will
not damage aluminum parts. If you use this coolant
mixture, you do not need to add anything else.
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can
boil before the proper coolant mixture will.
Your vehicle’s coolant warning system is
set for the proper coolant mixture. With
plain water or the wrong mixture, your
engine could get too hot but you would
not get the overheat warning. Your engine
could catch fire and you or others could
be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
258
Notice: If you use an improper coolant
mixture, your engine could overheat and be
badly damaged. The repair cost would not be
covered by your warranty. Too much water
in the mixture can freeze and crack the engine,
radiator, heater core, and other parts.
If you have to add coolant more than four times a
year, have your dealer check your cooling
system.
Notice: If you use extra inhibitors and/or
additives in your vehicle’s cooling system,
you could damage your vehicle. Use only the
proper mixture of the engine coolant listed
in this manual for the cooling system. See
Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 353 for more information.
Checking Coolant
{CAUTION:
Turning the surge tank pressure cap when
the engine and radiator are hot can allow
steam and scalding liquids to blow out
and burn you badly. Never turn the surge
tank pressure cap — even a little — when
the engine and radiator are hot.
The vehicle must be on a level surface. When
your engine is cold, the coolant level should be at
the COLD FILL line.
The coolant surge tank is located in the engine
compartment on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 244
for more information on location.
Do not overfill the surge tank. Too much coolant
can result in an overflow condition when the fluid
is hot.
259
Adding Coolant
If you need more coolant, add the proper
DEX-COOL® coolant mixture at the coolant surge
tank, but only when the engine is cool. If the
coolant surge tank is empty, a special fill
procedure is necessary. See Engine Overheating
on page 260 for instructions on “How to Add
Coolant to the Coolant Surge Tank.”
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly
installed, coolant loss and possible engine
damage may occur. Be sure the cap is properly
and tightly secured.
The coolant surge tank pressure cap must be fully
installed on the coolant surge tank. See Engine
Compartment Overview on page 244 for more
information on location.
{CAUTION:
Engine Overheating
You can be burned if you spill coolant
on hot engine parts. Coolant contains
ethylene glycol, and it will burn if the
engine parts are hot enough. Do not spill
coolant on a hot engine.
When replacing the pressure cap, make sure it is
hand-tight and fully seated.
260
There is an engine coolant temperature warning
light on your vehicle’s instrument panel. See
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light on
page 137 for more information.
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
{CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can
burn you badly, even if you just open the
hood. Stay away from the engine if you
see or hear steam coming from it. Just
turn it off and get everyone away from
the vehicle until it cools down. Wait until
there is no sign of steam or coolant
before you open the hood.
If you keep driving when your engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire.
You or others could be badly burned.
Stop your engine if it overheats, and get
out of the vehicle until the engine is cool.
Notice: If your engine catches fire because
you keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle
can be badly damaged. The costly repairs
would not be covered by your warranty.
If No Steam Is Coming From Your
Engine
An engine coolant temperature warning can
indicate a serious problem. See Engine Coolant
Temperature Warning Light on page 137.
If you get an engine coolant temperature warning,
but see or hear no steam, the problem may not
be too serious. Sometimes the engine can
get a little too hot when you:
• Climb a long hill on a hot day.
• Stop after high-speed driving.
• Idle for long periods in traffic.
If you get the engine coolant temperature warning
with no sign of steam, try this for a minute or so:
1. If your air conditioner is on, turn it off.
2. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in
NEUTRAL (N) while stopped. If it is safe to
do so, pull off the road, shift to PARK (P)
or NEUTRAL (N) and let the engine idle.
3. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest
fan speed and open the windows as
necessary.
261
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you
can drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for
about 10 minutes. If the warning does not come
back on, you can drive normally.
Cooling System
When you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here is
what you will see:
If the warning continues and you have not
stopped, pull over, stop, and park your vehicle
right away.
If there is still no sign of steam, you can idle the
engine for three minutes while you are parked.
If you still have the warning, turn off the engine
and get everyone out of the vehicle until it
cools down.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get
service help right away.
2.4L L4 Engine
A. Electric Engine Cooling Fan (Out of View)
B. Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap
262
{CAUTION:
An electric engine cooling fan under the
hood can start up even when the engine is
not running and can injure you. Keep
hands, clothing, and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
2.0L L4 Engine
If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is
boiling, do not do anything else until it cools down.
The vehicle should be parked on a level surface.
A. Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap
B. Electric Engine Cooling Fan (Out of View)
263
The coolant level should be at the COLD FILL line.
If it is not, you may have a leak at the pressure cap
or in the radiator hoses, heater hoses, radiator,
water pump, or somewhere in the cooling system.
{CAUTION:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other
engine parts, can be very hot. Do not touch
them. If you do, you can be burned.
Do not run the engine if there is a leak.
If you run the engine, it could lose all
coolant. That could cause an engine fire,
and you could be burned. Get any leak
fixed before you drive the vehicle.
If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on,
check to see if the electric engine cooling fan
are running. If the engine is overheating, the fan
should be running. If they are not, your vehicle
needs service.
264
Notice: Engine damage from running your
engine without coolant is not covered by your
warranty.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL®
may cause premature engine, heater core,
or radiator corrosion. In addition, the engine
coolant could require changing sooner, at
30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,
whichever occurs first. Any repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your
vehicle.
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Surge Tank
Notice: Your engine has a specific cooling
system drain and fill procedure. Failure
to follow this procedure could cause your
engine to overheat and be severely damaged.
If your engine’s cooling system needs to
be drained and re-filled, please see your dealer.
If you have not found a problem yet, check to
see if coolant is visible in the coolant surge tank.
If coolant is visible but the coolant level is not at
the COLD FILL line, add a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant at the
coolant surge tank, but be sure the cooling system,
including the coolant surge tank pressure cap, is
cool before you do it. See Engine Coolant on
page 257 for more information.
If no coolant is visible in the coolant surge tank,
add coolant as follows:
{CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot
cooling system can blow out and burn
you badly. They are under pressure, and if
you turn the coolant surge tank pressure
cap — even a little — they can come out at
high speed. Never turn the cap when the
cooling system, including the coolant
surge tank pressure cap, is hot. Wait for
the cooling system and coolant surge
tank pressure cap to cool if you ever have
to turn the pressure cap.
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can
boil before the proper coolant mixture will.
Your vehicle’s coolant warning system is
set for the proper coolant mixture. With
plain water or the wrong mixture, your
engine could get too hot but you would
not get the overheat warning. Your engine
could catch fire and you or others could
be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and
crack the engine, radiator, heater core and
other parts. Use the recommended coolant and
the proper coolant mixture.
265
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant
on hot engine parts. Coolant contains
ethylene glycol and it will burn if the
engine parts are hot enough. Do not spill
coolant on a hot engine.
1. Remove the coolant surge tank pressure cap
when the cooling system, including the
coolant surge tank pressure cap and upper
radiator hose, is no longer hot. Turn the
pressure cap slowly counterclockwise about
two or two and one-half turns. If you hear
a hiss, wait for that to stop. This will allow any
pressure still left to be vented out the
discharge hose.
266
2. Then keep turning
the pressure cap
slowly, and
remove it.
4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off,
start the engine and let it run until you can
feel the upper radiator hose getting hot.
Watch out for the engine cooling fan.
By this time, the coolant level inside the
coolant surge tank may be lower. If the level
is lower than the COLD FILL line, add more of
the proper mixture to the coolant surge tank
until the level reaches the COLD FILL line.
5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure the
pressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated.
See your dealer, if necessary.
3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper
mixture, to the COLD FILL line. Wait about
five minutes, then check to see if the level is
below the COLD FILL line. If the level is
below the line, add additional coolant to bring
the level up to the line. Repeat this procedure
until the level remains constant at the
COLD FILL line for at least five minutes.
267
Power Steering Fluid
See Engine
Compartment Overview
on page 244 for
reservoir location.
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
To check the power steering fluid, do the following:
1. Turn the key off and let the engine
compartment cool down.
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean.
3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a
clean rag.
4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.
5. Remove the cap again and look at the
fluid level on the dipstick.
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
It is not necessary to regularly check power
steering fluid unless you suspect there is a leak
in the system or you hear an unusual noise.
A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem.
Have the system inspected and repaired.
268
The level should be between the COLD and HOT
marks. If necessary, add only enough fluid to
bring the level up to the COLD mark.
What to Use
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
page 353. Always use the proper fluid. Failure
to use the proper fluid can cause leaks and
damage hoses and seals.
Windshield Washer Fluid
What to Use
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure
to read the manufacturer’s instructions before
use. If you will be operating your vehicle in an area
where the temperature may fall below freezing,
use a fluid that has sufficient protection against
freezing.
Adding Washer Fluid
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it.
Add washer fluid until
the tank is full. See
Engine Compartment
Overview on page 244
for reservoir location.
Notice:
• When using concentrated washer fluid,
follow the manufacturer’s instructions
for adding water.
• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer
fluid. Water can cause the solution to
freeze and damage your washer fluid tank
and other parts of the washer system.
Also, water does not clean as well
as washer fluid.
• Fill your washer fluid tank only
three-quarters full when it is very cold.
This allows for expansion if freezing
occurs, which could damage the tank if it
is completely full.
• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in
your windshield washer. It can damage
your washer system and paint.
269
Brakes
Brake Fluid
Your brake master
cylinder reservoir is
filled with DOT-3 brake
fluid. See Engine
Compartment Overview
on page 244 for the
location of the reservoir.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid
level in the reservoir might go down. The first
is that the brake fluid goes down to an acceptable
level during normal brake lining wear. When
new linings are put in, the fluid level goes back
up. The other reason is that fluid is leaking out
of the brake and/or clutch hydraulic system.
If it is, you should have your brake and/or clutch
system fixed, since a leak means that sooner
or later your brakes and/or clutch will not
work well, or will not work at all.
270
So, it is not a good idea to top off your brake/clutch
fluid. Adding fluid will not correct a leak. If you
add fluid when your brake linings are worn, then
you will have too much fluid when you get
new brake linings. You should add or remove
fluid, as necessary, only when work is done on the
brake/clutch hydraulic system.
{CAUTION:
If your vehicle has too much brake fluid, it
can spill on the engine. The fluid will burn
if the engine is hot enough. You or others
could be burned, and your vehicle could
be damaged. Add brake fluid only when
work is done on the brake and/or clutch
hydraulic system.
When your brake fluid falls to a low level, your
brake warning light will come on. See Brake
System Warning Light on page 134.
What to Add
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3
brake fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed
container only. See Part D: Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 353.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the
area around the cap before removing it. This
will help keep dirt from entering the reservoir.
{CAUTION:
With the wrong kind of fluid in the
brake/clutch system, the brakes/clutch
may not work well, or they may not even
work at all. This could cause a crash.
Always use the proper brake fluid.
Notice:
• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage
brake/clutch system parts. For example,
just a few drops of mineral-based oil, such
as engine oil, in the brake/clutch hydraulic
system can damage brake/clutch system
parts so badly that they will have to
be replaced. Do not let someone put in the
wrong kind of fluid.
• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s
painted surfaces, the paint finish can
be damaged. Be careful not to spill brake
fluid on your vehicle. If you do, wash it
off immediately. See Washing Your Vehicle
on page 318.
271
Brake Wear
Your vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes.
Front disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators
that make a high-pitched warning sound when
the brake pads are worn and new pads are
needed. The sound may come and go or be heard
all the time your vehicle is moving, except when
you are pushing on the brake pedal firmly.
{CAUTION:
Some driving conditions or climates may cause a
brake squeal when the brakes are first applied
or lightly applied. This does not mean something
is wrong with your brakes.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated,
inspect brake pads for wear and evenly tighten
wheel nuts in the proper sequence to GM torque
specifications.
Brake linings should always be replaced as
complete axle sets.
Brake Pedal Travel
The brake wear warning sound means that
soon the brakes will not work well. That
could lead to an accident. When you hear
the brake wear warning sound, have your
vehicle serviced.
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out
brake pads could result in costly brake repair.
272
See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return
to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase
in pedal travel. This could be a sign of brake
trouble.
Brake Adjustment
Every time you apply the brakes, with or without
the vehicle moving, your brakes adjust for wear.
Replacing Brake System Parts
The braking system on a vehicle is complex.
Its many parts have to be of top quality and work
well together if the vehicle is to have really good
braking. Your vehicle was designed and tested
with top-quality GM brake parts. When you replace
parts of your braking system — for example, when
your brake linings wear down and you need new
ones put in — be sure you get new approved GM
replacement parts. If you do not, your brakes may
no longer work properly. For example, if someone
puts in brake linings that are wrong for your vehicle,
the balance between your front and rear brakes can
change — for the worse. The braking performance
you have come to expect can change in many other
ways if someone puts in the wrong replacement
brake parts.
Battery
Your vehicle has a maintenance free battery.
When it is time for a new battery, get one that has
the replacement number shown on the original
battery’s label. We recommend an ACDelco®
replacement battery. See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 244 for battery location.
Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer and reproductive harm. Wash
hands after handling.
Vehicle Storage
If you are not going to drive your vehicle for
25 days or more, remove the black, negative (−)
cable from the battery. This will help keep
your battery from running down.
{CAUTION:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and
gas that can explode. You can be badly
hurt if you are not careful. See Jump
Starting on page 274 for tips on working
around a battery without getting hurt.
273
Jump Starting
If your vehicle’s battery has run down, you may
want to use another vehicle and some jumper
cables to start your vehicle. Be sure to use
the following steps to do it safely.
{CAUTION:
Batteries can hurt you. They can be
dangerous because:
• They contain acid that can burn you.
• They contain gas that can explode
or ignite.
• They contain enough electricity to
burn you.
If you do not follow these steps exactly,
some or all of these things can hurt you.
274
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in
costly damage to your vehicle that would
not be covered by your warranty.
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or
pulling it will not work, and it could damage
your vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a
12-volt battery with a negative ground system.
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a
12-volt system with a negative ground,
both vehicles can be damaged. Only use
vehicles with 12-volt systems with negative
grounds to jump start your vehicle.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper
cables can reach, but be sure the vehicles are
not touching each other. If they are, it could
cause a ground connection you do not
want. You would not be able to start your
vehicle, and the bad grounding could damage
the electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling,
set the parking brake firmly on both vehicles
involved in the jump start procedure. Put
an automatic transmission in PARK (P) or a
manual transmission in NEUTRAL before
setting the parking brake.
Notice: If you leave your radio or other
accessories on during the jump starting
procedure, they could be damaged. The repairs
would not be covered by your warranty.
Always turn off your radio and other
accessories when jump starting your vehicle.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles.
Unplug unnecessary accessories plugged into
the cigarette lighter or the accessory power
outlet. Turn off the radio and all lamps that
are not needed. This will avoid sparks
and help save both batteries. And it could
save the radio!
4. Open the hood on the other vehicle and
locate the positive (+) and negative (−)
terminal locations on that vehicle.
You will not need to access your battery for
jump starting. Your vehicle has a remote
positive (+) and a remote negative (−) jump
starting terminal.
The remote positive (+)
terminal is located
under a red plastic
cover on the engine
compartment fuse block.
Open the cover to
access the terminal.
275
The remote negative (−)
ground bracket is
located in the rear of the
engine compartment,
on the passenger’s side
of the vehicle, and is
marked GND (−).
See Engine Compartment Overview on
page 244 for more information on the location
of the positive (+) and negative (−) terminals
on your vehicle.
{CAUTION:
An electric fan can start up even when
the engine is not running and can injure
you. Keep hands, clothing and tools away
from any underhood electric fan.
276
{CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause
battery gas to explode. People have been
hurt doing this, and some have been
blinded. Use a flashlight if you need
more light.
Be sure the battery has enough water.
You do not need to add water to the
battery installed in your new vehicle. But
if a battery has filler caps, be sure the
right amount of fluid is there. If it is low,
add water to take care of that first. If you
don’t, explosive gas could be present.
Battery fluid contains acid that can
burn you. Do not get it on you. If you
accidentally get it in your eyes or on your
skin, flush the place with water and get
medical help immediately.
{CAUTION:
Fans or other moving engine parts can
injure you badly. Keep your hands away
from moving parts once the engine is
running.
5. Check that the jumper cables do not have
loose or missing insulation. If they do, you
could get a shock. The vehicles could
be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+)
will go to positive (+) or to a remote positive (+)
terminal if the vehicle has one. Negative (−)
will go to a heavy, unpainted metal engine part
or to a remote negative (−) terminal if the
vehicle has one.
Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−)
or you will get a short that would damage the
battery and maybe other parts too. And do
not connect the negative (−) cable to the
negative (−) terminal on the dead battery
because this can cause sparks.
6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the
positive (+) terminal location on the vehicle
with the dead battery. Use a remote
positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect
it to the positive (+) terminal of the good
battery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one.
8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to
the negative (−) terminal of the good battery.
Use a remote negative (−) terminal if the
vehicle has one.
Do not let the other end touch anything until
the next step. The other end of the negative (−)
cable does not go to the dead battery.
It goes to a heavy, unpainted metal engine
part or to a remote negative (−) terminal on
the vehicle with the dead battery.
277
9. Connect the other end of the negative (−)
cable to the negative (−) terminal location
on the vehicle with the dead battery.
Your vehicle has a remote negative (−)
ground bracket for this purpose.
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery
and run the engine for a while.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead
battery. If it will not start after a few tries,
it probably needs service.
Notice: If the jumper cables are connected
or removed in the wrong order, electrical
shorting may occur and damage the vehicle.
The repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Always connect and remove
the jumper cables in the correct order,
making sure that the cables do not touch
each other or other metal.
278
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or
Remote Negative (−) Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and
Remote Negative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
To disconnect the jumper cables from both
vehicles, do the following:
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from
the vehicle that had the dead battery.
How to Check Lubricant
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from
the vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
other vehicle.
5. Return the positive (+) terminal cover to its
original position.
Rear Axle
When to Check Lubricant
It is not necessary to regularly check rear axle
fluid unless you suspect there is a leak or you
hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate
a problem. Have it inspected and repaired.
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be
on a level surface.
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug
hole, located on the rear axle, you’ll need to add
some lubricant. Add enough lubricant to raise
the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine
what kind of lubricant to use. See Part D:
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 353.
279
Bulb Replacement
For the proper type of replacement bulbs, see
Replacement Bulbs on page 283.
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your dealer.
Halogen Bulbs
{CAUTION:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas
inside and can burst if you drop or
scratch the bulb. You or others could be
injured. Be sure to read and follow the
instructions on the bulb package.
Headlamps
To replace the low/high-beam/Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) headlamp bulb, do the following:
1. Open the hood. See Hood Release on
page 243 for more information.
2. Locate the headlamp bulb socket.
280
3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and
pull it from the headlamp assembly.
4. Holding the base of the socket, pull the old
bulb from the socket.
5. Replace with a new bulb.
6. Reverse Steps 3 through 4 to reinstall.
Front Turn Signal, Parking and
Fog Lamps
A. Front Turn Signal/
Parking Lamp
B. Fog Lamp
(If Equipped)
To replace one of these bulbs, do the following:
1. Open the hood. See Hood Release on
page 243 for more information.
2. Reach underneath the front bumper and
locate the bulb assembly.
3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and
pull out the bulb assembly.
4. Disconnect the bulb socket from the wiring
harness.
5. Install a new bulb.
6. Reverse the steps to reinstall the bulb
assembly and headlamp assembly.
Taillamps, Turn Signal, and
Stoplamps
To replace one of these bulbs, do the following:
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 68
for more information.
2. Remove the two screws, which hold the
taillamp assembly, from inside the vehicle.
3. Remove the taillamp assembly.
4. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to
remove.
5. Pull the bulb from the socket.
6. Install a new bulb.
7. Reverse the steps to reinstall the taillamp
assembly.
281
Back-Up Lamps
License Plate Lamp
The back-up lamps
are located in the
rear bumper.
To replace the license plate lamp bulb, do the
following:
1. Remove the two screws holding the license
plate lamp assembly to the fascia.
To replace a bulb, do the following:
1. Reach behind, up and under the rear bumper
and locate the bulb socket.
2. Turn it counterclockwise to remove from the
bulb assembly.
3. Pull the bulb from the bulb socket.
4. Push in a new bulb into the bulb socket.
5. Reinstall the bulb socket by lining up the tabs
in the lamp assembly and turn it clockwise to
secure it.
282
2. Turn and pull the license plate lamp forward
through the fascia opening.
3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and
pull the bulb straight out of the socket.
4. Install the new bulb.
5. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall the
lamp assembly.
Replacement Bulbs
Exterior Lamp
Bulb Number
Back-Up Lamps
3047
Fog Lamp
Front Parking/Turn Signal Lamp
Replacement blades come in different types and
are removed in different ways. For proper type and
length, see Normal Maintenance Replacement
Parts on page 355.
898*
3757NAK
Front Sidemarker Lamp
194
Headlamps, High/Low-Beam/
Daytime Running Lights
H13
License Plate Lamp
168
Stoplamp, Taillamp and
Turn Signal Lamp
3157K
* Uplevel Model
For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact
your dealer.
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
To replace the windshield wiper blade assembly
do the following:
1. Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield.
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for
wear and cracking. See At Least Twice a Year
on page 347 for more information.
283
Tires
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires
made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever
have questions about your tire warranty and where
to obtain service, see your GM Warranty booklet
for details. For additional information refer to
the tire manufacturer’s booklet included with your
vehicle’s Owner Manual.
{CAUTION:
2. Push the release lever (B) to disengage the
hook and push the wiper arm (A) out of the
blade (C).
3. Push the new wiper blade securely on the
wiper arm until you hear the release lever
click into place.
Poorly maintained and improperly used
tires are dangerous.
• Overloading your vehicle’s tires can
cause overheating as a result of too
much friction. You could have an
air-out and a serious accident. See
Loading Your Vehicle on page 226.
CAUTION:
284
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
• Underinflated tires pose the same
danger as overloaded tires. The
resulting accident could cause serious
injury. Check all tires frequently to
maintain the recommended pressure.
Tire pressure should be checked when
your vehicle’s tires are cold. See
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 292.
• Overinflated tires are more likely to
be cut, punctured, or broken by a
sudden impact — such as when you
hit a pothole. Keep tires at the
recommended pressure.
• Worn, old tires can cause accidents.
If the tire’s tread is badly worn, or
if your vehicle’s tires have been
damaged, replace them.
Notice: If your vehicle has P245/45R18 size
tires, they are classified as low-profile
tires. Low-profile tires are more susceptible to
damage from road hazards or curb impact
than standard profile tires. Tire and or wheel
assembly damage can occur when coming into
contact with road hazards like, potholes or
sharp edged objects or when sliding into
a curb. Your GM warranty does not cover this
type of damage. Keep tires set to the correct
inflation pressure and when possible avoid
contact with curbs, potholes and other
road hazards.
Winter Tires
If your vehicle has P245/45R18 size tires, they are
classified as low-profile performance tires. These
tires are designed for very responsive driving on
wet or dry pavement. If you expect to drive on snow
or ice covered roads often, you may want to get
winter tires for your vehicle. The low-profile
performance tires may not offer the traction you
would like or the same level of performance as
winter tires on snow or ice covered roads.
285
Winter tires, in general, are designed for increased
traction on snow and ice covered roads. With winter
tires, there may be decreased dry road traction,
increased road noise, and shorter tire tread life.
After switching to winter tires, be alert for changes
in vehicle handling and braking.
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is molded into its
sidewall. The example below shows a typical
passenger (p-metric) tire sidewall.
See your dealer for details regarding winter tire
availability and proper tire selection. Also,
see Buying New Tires on page 296.
If you choose to use winter tires:
• Use tires of the same brand and tread type
on all four wheel positions.
• Use only radial ply tires of the same size,
load range, and speed rating as the original
equipment tires.
Winter tires with the same speed rating as your
original equipment tires may not be available for H,
V, W, Y, and ZR speed rated tires. If you choose
winter tires with a lower speed rating, never
exceed the tire’s maximum speed capability.
286
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example
(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination of
letters and numbers used to define a particular
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type,
and service description. See the “Tire Size”
illustration later in this section for more detail.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have
a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all
federal safety guidelines.
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation):
The Department of Transportation (DOT) code
indicates that the tire is in compliance with the
U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards.
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following DOT code are the Tire
Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows
the manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and
date the tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded
onto both sides of the tire, although only one
side may have the date of manufacture.
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG):
Tire manufacturers are required to grade
tires based on three performance factors:
treadwear, traction and temperature resistance.
For more information see Uniform Tire Quality
Grading on page 298.
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:
Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that load.
287
Tire Size
The following illustration shows an example of a
typical passenger (p-metric) vehicle tire size.
(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United States
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter P
as the first character in the tire size means a
passenger vehicle tire engineered to standards set
by the U. S. Tire and Rim Association.
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates
the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall
to sidewall.
288
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that
indicates the tire height-to-width measurements.
For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is
60, as shown in item C of the illustration, it would
mean that the tire’s sidewall is 60 percent as
high as it is wide.
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire.
The letter R means radial ply construction;
the letter D means diagonal or bias ply
construction; and the letter B means belted-bias
ply construction.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in inches.
(F) Service Description: These characters
represent the load range and speed rating of the
tire. The load index represents the load carry
capacity a tire is certified to carry. The load index
can range from 1 to 279. The speed rating is
the maximum speed a tire is certified to carry a
load. Speed ratings range from A to Z.
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire
pressing outward on each square inch of the
tire. Air pressure is expressed in pounds
per square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).
Accessory Weight: This means the combined
weight of optional accessories. Some examples of
optional accessories are, automatic transmission/
transaxle, power steering, power brakes, power
windows, power seats, and air conditioning.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height
to its width.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is
located between the plies and the tread. Cords
may be made from steel or other reinforcing
materials.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped
by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the
plies are laid at alternate angles less than
90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.
Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressure
in a tire, measured in pounds per square
inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has
built up heat from driving. See Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 292.
Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motor
vehicle with standard and optional equipment
including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and
coolant, but without passengers and cargo.
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall
of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance
with the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)
motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT code
includes the Tire Identification Number (TIN),
an alphanumeric designator which can also identify
the tire manufacturer, production plant, brand,
and date of production.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. See
Loading Your Vehicle on page 226.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the
front axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 226.
289
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear
axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 226.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of
an asymmetrical tire, that must always face
outward when mounted on a vehicle.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
light duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger
vehicles.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging from
1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying
capacity of a tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum
air pressure to which a cold tire may be inflated.
The maximum air pressure is molded onto the
sidewall.
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire
at the maximum permissible inflation pressure
for that tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of
curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacity
weight, and production options weight.
290
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of
occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied
by 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 226.
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating
positions.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that
faces outward when mounted on a vehicle.
The side of the tire that contains a whitewall,
bears white lettering, or bears manufacturer,
brand, and/or model name molding that is higher
or deeper than the same moldings on the
other sidewall of the tire.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
passenger cars and some light duty trucks and
multipurpose vehicles.
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation
pressure as shown on the tire placard. See
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 292 and
Loading Your Vehicle on page 226.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the
ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at
90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which
the tire beads are seated.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread
and the bead.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned
to a tire indicating the maximum speed at
which a tire can operate.
Traction: The friction between the tire and the
road surface. The amount of grip provided.
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into
contact with the road.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called wear bars, that show across the tread
of a tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread
remains. See When It Is Time for New Tires
on page 295.
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards): A tire information system that
provides consumers with ratings for a tire’s
traction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings
are determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The ratings are
molded into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform
Tire Quality Grading on page 298.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of
designated seating positions multiplied by
150 lbs (68 kg) plus the rated cargo load.
See Loading Your Vehicle on page 226.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on
an individual tire due to curb weight, accessory
weight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached
to a vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity
weight and the original equipment tire size and
recommended inflation pressure. See “Tire
and Loading Information Label” under Loading
Your Vehicle on page 226.
291
Inflation - Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to
operate effectively.
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that
under-inflation or over-inflation is all right.
It is not. If your tires do not have enough air
(under-inflation), you can get the following:
• Too much flexing
• Too much heat
• Tire overloading
• Premature or irregular wear
• Poor handling
• Reduced fuel economy
If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),
you can get the following:
• Unusual wear
• Poor handling
• Rough ride
• Needless damage from road hazards
292
A Tire and Loading Information label is attached
to the vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar), below
the driver’s door latch. This label shows your
vehicle’s original equipment tires and the correct
inflation pressures for your tires when they
are cold. The recommended cold tire inflation
pressure, shown on the label, is the minimum
amount of air pressure needed to support
your vehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.
For additional information regarding how much
weight your vehicle can carry, and an example
of the Tire and Loading Information label,
see Loading Your Vehicle on page 226. How you
load your vehicle affects vehicle handling and
ride comfort, never load your vehicle with more
weight than it was designed to carry.
When to Check
Check your tires once a month or more.
How to Check
Tire Inspection and Rotation
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check
tire pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are
properly inflated simply by looking at them. Radial
tires may look properly inflated even when they
are under-inflated. Check the tire’s inflation
pressure when the tires are cold. Cold means your
vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours
or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km).
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.
Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to
get a pressure measurement. If the cold tire
inflation pressure matches the recommended
pressure on the Tire and Loading Information
label, no further adjustment is necessary. If the
inflation pressure is low, add air until you reach
the recommended amount.
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your
tires as soon as possible and check wheel
alignment. Also check for damaged tires or wheels.
See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 295
and Wheel Replacement on page 299 for
more information.
The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more
uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The
first rotation is the most important. See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 337.
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on
the metal stem in the center of the tire valve.
Re-check the tire pressure with the tire gage.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve
stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out
dirt and moisture.
293
Non-Directional Tires
When rotating Goodyear Eagle RSA P245/45R18
non-directional tires, always use the correct
rotation pattern shown here.
Directional Tires
If your vehicle has Goodyear Eagle F1-GS1
P245/45R18 size tires, they are directional tires
and must roll in a certain direction for the
best overall performance. The direction is shown
by an arrow on the tire sidewall. Because
these tires are directional, they should be rotated
as shown here. These tires should only be
moved from front to rear and rear to front on the
same side of the vehicle.
294
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front
and rear inflation pressures as shown on the
Tire and Loading Information label. See Loading
Your Vehicle on page 226 for an example of
the Tire and Loading Information label and
its location on your vehicle. Make certain that all
wheel nuts are properly tightened. See “Wheel
Nut Torque” under Capacities and Specifications
on page 332.
When It Is Time for New Tires
One way to tell when it
is time for new tires is
to check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires
have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of
tread remaining.
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel
could come off and cause a crash. When
you change a wheel, remove any rust or
dirt from places where the wheel attaches
to the vehicle. In an emergency, you can
use a cloth or a paper towel to do this;
but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush
later, if you need to, to get all the rust or
dirt off.
You need a new tire if any of the following
statements are true:
• You can see the indicators at three or more
places around the tire.
• You can see cord or fabric showing through
the tire’s rubber.
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or
snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric.
• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.
• The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage
that cannot be repaired well because of the
size or location of the damage.
295
Buying New Tires
GM has developed and matched specific tires for
your vehicle. The original equipment tires installed
on your vehicle, when it was new, were designed to
meet General Motors Tire Performance Criteria
Specification (TPC spec) system rating. If you need
replacement tires, GM strongly recommends that
you get tires with the same TPC Spec rating. This
way, your vehicle will continue to have tires that are
designed to give the same performance and vehicle
safety, during normal use, as the original tires.
GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers over a
dozen critical specifications that impact the overall
performance of your vehicle, including brake
system performance, ride and handling, traction
control, and tire pressure monitoring performance.
GM’s TPC Spec number is molded onto the tire’s
sidewall by the tire manufacturer. If the tires have
an all-season tread design, the TPC spec number
will be followed by a MS, for mud and snow. See
Tire Sidewall Labeling on page 286 for additional
information.
296
{CAUTION:
Mixing tires could cause you to lose
control while driving. If you mix tires of
different sizes, brands, or types (radial
and bias-belted tires) the vehicle may
not handle properly, and you could have
a crash. Using tires of different sizes,
brands, or types may also cause damage
to your vehicle. Be sure to use the correct
size, brand, and type of tires on your
vehicle’s wheels.
{CAUTION:
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle,
the wheel rim flanges could develop
cracks after many miles of driving. A tire
and/or wheel could fail suddenly, causing
a crash. Use only radial-ply tires with the
wheels on your vehicle.
If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with those
that do not have a TPC Spec number, make
sure they are the same size, load range, speed
rating, and construction type (radial and
bias-belted tires) as your vehicle’s original tires.
Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed
on the Tire and Loading Information label.
This label is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar
(B-pillar). See Loading Your Vehicle on page 226,
for more information about the Tire and Loading
Information label.
Different Size Tires and Wheels
If you add wheels or tires that are a different size
than your original equipment wheels and tires, this
may affect the way your vehicle performs, including
its braking, ride and handling characteristics,
stability, and resistance to rollover. Additionally,
if your vehicle has electronic systems such as,
anti-lock brakes, traction control, and electronic
stability control, the performance of these systems
can be affected.
{CAUTION:
If you add different sized wheels, your
vehicle may not provide an acceptable
level of performance and safety if tires
not recommended for those wheels are
selected. You may increase the chance
that you will crash and suffer serious
injury. Only use GM specific wheel and
tire systems developed for your vehicle,
and have them properly installed by a
GM certified technician.
See Buying New Tires on page 296 and
Accessories and Modifications on page 235
for additional information.
297
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Treadwear
Quality grades can be found where applicable on
the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For example:
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and a half (1.5) times
as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from
the norm due to variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road characteristics
and climate.
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), which
grades tires by treadwear, traction, and
temperature performance. This applies only to
vehicles sold in the United States. The grades are
molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car
tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver, or temporary use
spare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of
10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some
limited-production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors
passenger cars and light trucks may vary with
respect to these grades, they must also conform
to federal safety requirements and additional
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC)
standards.
298
Traction – AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s
ability to stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.
A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire
is based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature – A, B, C
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The temperature grades are A (the highest),
B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under
the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels
of performance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.
The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned
and balanced carefully at the factory to give you
the longest tire life and best overall performance.
Adjustments to wheel alignment and tire
balancing will not be necessary on a regular basis.
However, if you notice unusual tire wear or your
vehicle pulling to one side or the other, the
alignment may need to be checked. If you notice
your vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth
road, your tires and wheels may need to be
rebalanced. See your dealer for proper diagnosis.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated
and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly
rusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming
loose, the wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts
should be replaced. If the wheel leaks air, replace
it (except some aluminum wheels, which can
sometimes be repaired). See your dealer if any of
these conditions exist.
Wheel Replacement
299
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.
Each new wheel should have the same
load-carrying capacity, diameter, width, offset
and be mounted the same way as the one
it replaces.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel
bolts or wheel nuts, replace them only with
new GM original equipment parts. This way,
you will be sure to have the right wheel, wheel
bolts and wheel nuts for your vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Using the wrong replacement wheels,
wheel bolts, or wheel nuts on your vehicle
can be dangerous. It could affect the
braking and handling of your vehicle,
make your tires lose air and make you
lose control. You could have a collision
in which you or others could be injured.
Always use the correct wheel, wheel bolts,
and wheel nuts for replacement.
300
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause
problems with bearing life, brake cooling,
speedometer or odometer calibration,
headlamp aim, bumper height, vehicle ground
clearance, and tire clearance to the body
and chassis.
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel
could come off and cause a crash. When
you change a wheel, remove any rust or
dirt from places where the wheel attaches
to the vehicle. In an emergency, you can
use a cloth or a paper towel to do this;
but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush
later, if you need to, to get all the rust or
dirt off.
{CAUTION:
Never use oil or grease on studs or the
threads of the wheel nuts. If you do, the
wheel nuts might come loose and the
wheel could fall off, causing a crash.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can
lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage.
To avoid expensive brake repairs, evenly
tighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequence
and to the proper torque specification.
Used Replacement Wheels
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly
tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel
to become loose and even come off. This
could lead to a crash. Be sure to use the
correct wheel nuts. If you have to replace
them, be sure to get new GM original
equipment wheel nuts.
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You cannot know how it has
been used or how far it has been driven.
It could fail suddenly and cause a crash.
If you have to replace a wheel, use a new
GM original equipment wheel.
301
Tire Chains
{CAUTION:
Do not use tire chains. There is not
enough clearance. Tire chains used on a
vehicle without the proper amount of
clearance can cause damage to the brakes,
suspension, or other vehicle parts. The
area damaged by the tire chains could
cause you to lose control of your vehicle
and you or others may be injured in a
crash. Use another type of traction device
only if its manufacturer recommends
it for use on your vehicle and tire size
combination and road conditions. Follow
that manufacturer’s instructions. To help
avoid damage to your vehicle, drive slowly,
re-adjust or remove the device if it is
contacting your vehicle, and do not spin
your wheels. If you do find traction devices
that will fit, install them on the rear tires.
302
If a Tire Goes Flat
Your vehicle has a tire inflator kit. There is no
spare tire, no tire changing equipment, and
no place to store a tire.
It is unusual for a tire to blow out while you are
driving, especially if you maintain your tires
properly. See Tires on page 284. If air goes out
of a tire, it is much more likely to leak out slowly.
But, if you should ever have a blow out, here are
a few tips about what to expect and what to do:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that
pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your
foot off the accelerator pedal and grip the steering
wheel firmly. Steer to maintain lane position,
and then gently brake to a stop well out of the
traffic lane.
A rear blow out, particularly on a curve, acts much
like a skid and may require the same correction
you would use in a skid. In any rear blow out,
remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Get
the vehicle under control by steering the way
you want the vehicle to go. It may be very bumpy
and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently brake
to a stop, well off the road if possible.
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel
damage by driving slowly to a level place
and stopping. Then do this:
1. Turn on the hazard warning flashers. See
Hazard Warning Flashers on page 110.
2. Park your vehicle. If your vehicle has an
automatic transmission, set the parking
brake firmly and put the shift lever in
PARK (P). See Shifting Into Park (P)
(Automatic Transmission) on page 87.
If your vehicle has a manual transmission,
move the shift lever to REVERSE (R) and
set the parking brake firmly. See Parking
Your Vehicle (Manual Transmission) on
page 89 for additional information.
3. Turn off the engine.
4. Inspect the flat tire.
If the flat tire is due to a slow leak caused by a
nail or other similar road hazard, the tire inflator
kit may be used to repair the damaged tire
temporarily. The kit uses a liquid tire sealant to
seal small punctures in the tread area of the tire.
After repairing a tire with the tire inflator kit,
take your vehicle to an authorized GM dealer to
have the tire inspected and repaired as soon
as possible. The tire sealant is a temporary repair
only. See Tire Inflator Kit on page 303.
Tire Inflator Kit
Your vehicle has a tire inflator kit. There is no jack
or spare tire. The kit uses a liquid tire sealant
and air at the same time to seal small punctures
in the tread area of the tire. Be sure to read
and follow all of the tire inflator kit instructions.
If the tire has been separated from the wheel or
has damaged sidewalls or large tears that
allow rapid air loss, call a tire repair facility. See
Roadside Assistance Program on page 368.
303
The kit includes the following:
If the flat tire is due to a slow leak caused by a
nail or other similar road hazard, the tire inflator
kit can be used to temporarily repair the
damaged tire.
After temporarily repairing the tire with the inflator
kit, it is recommended to take your vehicle to a
dealer within 100 miles (161 kilometers) of driving
to have the tire inspected and repaired. If the
sealant is not removed from the tire within
100 miles (161 kilometers) of driving, it is more
likely that the tire can get damaged and have to
be replaced.
A. Air Compressor
B. Tire Sealant Canister
C. Air Compressor
Accessory Plug
D. On/Off Switch
304
E. Air Pressure Gage
F. Air Compressor
Inflator Hose
G. Sealant Filling Hose
Accessing the Tire Inflator Kit
To access the tire inflator kit, do the following:
1. Make sure the convertible top is in the up
position before accessing the tire inflator kit.
2. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 68 for
more information.
4. Remove the tire
inflator kit strap
by squeezing
the two tabs of
the quick release
buckle.
5. Remove the inflator kit from its foam
container.
3. Locate the tire inflator kit on the driver’s
side of the vehicle, near the back corner of
the trunk.
305
Tire Sealant
The kit contains a liquid sealant that when injected
into a flat tire, can temporarily repair nail holes
or cuts in the tread area of the tire. The tire sealant
cannot repair tire damage caused while driving
on a flat tire or a tire that has had a “blow out” or
a tire that has punctures in the sidewall areas.
The tire sealant solution is to be used for a single
tire and can only be used once.
3. Remove the valve stem cap from the flat tire
by turning it counterclockwise.
If an object, such as a nail, has penetrated the
tire, do not remove it.
Check the tire sealant expiration date on the
sealant canister. The sealant might not be
as effective beyond the expiration date. If needed,
see your dealer for a replacement canister.
Using the Tire Inflator Kit
To use the tire inflator kit, do the following:
1. Place the inflator kit on the ground and unwrap
the sealant filling hose from the compressor.
2. Remove the air compressor accessory plug
from the unit. To do this, pull the top portion
of the wrapped cord out first, then the bottom,
and then unsnap the plug. Do not insert the
plug into an accessory outlet yet.
306
4. Attach the sealant filling hose (A) onto the tire
valve stem. Turn it clockwise until it is tight.
Make sure the inflator kit on/off switch (B) is in
the O (off) position.
5. Plug the air compressor accessory plug (C)
into an accessory power outlet in the vehicle.
See Accessory Power Outlet(s) on page 121
for more information.
{CAUTION:
Idling the engine in a closed-in place or
with the climate control system off can
cause deadly carbon monoxide (CO).
See Engine Exhaust on page 91.
6. Start the vehicle. See Starting the Engine
on page 80 for more information. The
vehicle must be running while using the
air compressor.
{CAUTION:
Inflating something too much can make
it explode, and you or others could be
injured. Be sure to read the inflator
instructions, and inflate the tire to its
recommended pressure. Do not exceed
36 psi (248 kPa).
7. Move the inflator kit switch to the I (on) position.
The inflator kit forces sealant and air into the
tire. Sealant might leak from the puncture
hole until the vehicle is driven and the hole
has sealed.
8. Make sure there is a proper connection
between the tire valve stem and the
sealant filling hose by looking at the air
pressure gage. If there is not a pressure
reading while the compressor is running,
the connection between the inflator kit and
the tire is bad.
Check the attachment between the sealant
filling hose and the tire valve stem.
307
9. Inflate the tire up to the recommended
inflation pressure, found on the Tire and
Loading Information label located on
the vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar) below the
vehicle’s door latch, using the air pressure
gage on the top of the unit.
The pressure gage reading is slightly high
while the compressor is on. Turn the
compressor off to get an accurate pressure
reading.
Notice: If the recommended pressure cannot
be reached after 15 minutes, the vehicle
should not be driven farther. Damage to the
tire is severe and the sealant will not be
effective. Remove the air compressor plug
from the accessory power outlet and unscrew
the inflating hose from the tire valve. See
Roadside Assistance Program on page 368.
10. Move the inflator kit switch to the O (off)
position once the correct tire pressure is
obtained.
308
11. Turn off the engine.
12. Unplug the air compressor accessory plug
from the accessory power outlet in the
vehicle.
13. Disconnect the sealant filling hose from the
tire valve stem, by turning it counterclockwise,
and replace the tire valve stem cap.
Be careful when handling the tire inflator
components as they could be hot after usage.
14. Wrap the sealant filling hose around the air
compressor channel to stow it in its original
location.
15. Stow the air compressor accessory plug back
in the air compressor. To do this, wrap the
air compressor accessory plug, snap in
the plug, and then push in the bottom and
then the top of the wrapped air compressor
accessory plug.
16. If the flat tire was
able to inflate to
the recommended
inflation pressure,
remove the
maximum speed
label from the
sealant canister.
Place it in a highly visible location such
as the inside of the upper left corner of the
windshield or to the face of the radio/clock.
The maximum speed label reminds you
to drive cautiously and not to exceed 55 mph
(90 km/h) until you have the damaged tire
inspected and repaired.
{CAUTION:
Storing the tire inflator kit or other
equipment in the passenger compartment
of the vehicle could cause injury. In a
sudden stop or collision, loose equipment
could strike someone. Store the tire
inflator kit in the proper place.
17. Return the equipment to the proper storage
location in the trunk of your vehicle. You may
need to loosen the retention strap to wrap
it around the inflator kit and foam container.
To do this, pull apart the strap and loosen
the strap at the quick release buckle.
Then snap the buckle together, pull the
strap tight, and secure the loose end of the
strap by mating the ends.
309
18. Immediately drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km)
to distribute the sealant evenly in the tire.
Stop at a safe location and check the
tire pressure, refer to Steps 1 through 8 under
“Using the Air Compressor without Sealant”
next in this section. If the tire pressure
has fallen more then 10 psi (68 kPa), below
the recommended inflation pressure, stop
driving the vehicle. The tire is too damaged for
the sealant to work. See Roadside Assistance
Program on page 368.
If the tire pressure has not dropped more than
10 psi (68 kPa) from the recommended
inflation pressure, you can inflate the tire back
up to the recommended inflation pressure.
19. Dispose of the sealant canister at a local
dealer or in accordance with your local
state codes and practices.
After using the sealant canister, replace it with
a new canister from a dealer.
20. After temporarily repairing a tire with the
emergency flat tire repair kit, take your
vehicle to a dealer to have the tire inspected
and repaired.
310
Using the Air Compressor without
Sealant
To use the air compressor by itself to inflate a tire,
do the following:
1. Remove the air compressor accessory plug
from the air compressor.
2. Unlock the air compressor hose from the
sealant canister by pulling up on the lever.
3. Pull the air compressor inflator hose from the
sealant canister.
4. Push the air compressor inflator hose onto the
tire valve stem and push the lever down to
secure in place.
5. Plug the air compressor accessory plug into
an accessory power outlet in the vehicle. See
Accessory Power Outlet(s) on page 121 for
more information.
{CAUTION:
Idling the engine in a closed-in place or
with the climate control system off can
cause deadly carbon monoxide (CO).
See Engine Exhaust on page 91.
6. Start the vehicle. See Starting the Engine
on page 80 for more information. The
vehicle must be running while using the
air compressor.
{CAUTION:
Inflating something too much can make
it explode, and you or others could be
injured. Be sure to read the inflator
instructions, and inflate the tire to its
recommended pressure. Do not exceed
36 psi (248 kPa).
7. Move the inflator kit switch to the I (on)
position.
8. Make sure there is a proper connection
between the tire valve stem and the air
compressor hose by looking at the air
pressure gage. If there is not a pressure
reading while the compressor is running,
the connection between the inflator kit and
the tire is bad.
Check the attachment between the air
compressor hose and the tire valve stem.
311
9. Inflate the tire up to the recommended
inflation pressure using the air pressure gage
on the top of the unit.
10. Turn off the air compressor by moving the
switch to the O (off) position.
Removal and Installation of the
Sealant Canister
To remove the sealant canister, do the following:
{CAUTION:
Storing the tire inflator kit or other
equipment in the passenger compartment
of the vehicle could cause injury. In a
sudden stop or collision, loose equipment
could strike someone. Store the tire
inflator kit in the proper place.
11. Disconnect the compressor inflator hose and
wrap the hose in the bottom of the inflator kit.
12. Place the equipment in the original location in
the trunk of your vehicle.
312
1. Unlock the air compressor inflator hose from
the sealant canister by pulling the lever up.
2. Disconnect the air compressor inflator hose
from the sealant canister.
3. Unwrap the sealant filling hose from the
compressor.
To install a new sealant canister, do the following:
1. Align the sealant filling hose with the slot in
the air compressor.
2. Push the sealant canister down and turn it
clockwise.
3. Wrap the sealant filling hose around the air
compressor channel to stow it in its original
location.
4. Push the air compressor inflator hose onto
the sealant canister inlet and push the
lever down.
4. Turn the sealant canister so the inflator filling
hose is aligned with the slot in the
compressor.
5. Lift the sealant canister from the compressor
and replace with a new sealant canister.
See your dealer for more information.
313
Appearance Care
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
Your vehicle’s interior will continue to look its
best if it is cleaned often. Although not always
visible, dust and dirt can accumulate on your
upholstery. Dirt can damage carpet, fabric, leather,
and plastic surfaces. Regular vacuuming is
recommended to remove particles from your
upholstery. It is important to keep your upholstery
from becoming and remaining heavily soiled.
Soils should be removed as quickly as possible.
Your vehicle’s interior may experience extremes
of heat that could cause stains to set rapidly.
Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent
cleaning. Use care because newspapers and
garments that transfer color to your home
furnishings may also transfer color to your
vehicle’s interior.
When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only use
cleaners specifically designed for the surfaces
being cleaned. Permanent damage may result from
using cleaners on surfaces for which they were
not intended. Use glass cleaner only on glass.
314
Remove any accidental over-spray from other
surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray, apply
cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.
Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when
cleaning glass surfaces on your vehicle, you
could scratch the glass and/or cause damage
to the rear window defogger. When cleaning
the glass on your vehicle, use only a soft cloth
and glass cleaner.
Many cleaners contain solvents that may become
concentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space.
Before using cleaners, read and adhere to
all safety instructions on the label. While cleaning
your vehicle’s interior, maintain adequate
ventilation by opening your vehicle’s doors and
windows.
Dust may be removed from small buttons and
knobs using a small brush with soft bristles.
Your dealer has a product for cleaning your
vehicle’s glass. Should it become necessary, you
can also obtain a product from your dealer to
remove odors from your vehicle’s upholstery.
Do not clean your vehicle using the following
cleaners or techniques:
• Never use a knife or any other sharp object to
remove a soil from any interior surface.
• Never use a stiff brush. It can cause damage
to your vehicle’s interior surfaces.
• Never apply heavy pressure or rub
aggressively with a cleaning cloth. Use of
heavy pressure can damage your interior and
does not improve the effectiveness of soil
removal.
• Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Avoid
laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps with
degreasers. Using too much soap will leave
a residue that leaves streaks and attracts dirt.
For liquid cleaners, about 20 drops per
gallon (3.78 L) of water is a good guide.
• Do not heavily saturate your upholstery while
cleaning.
• Damage to your vehicle’s interior may result
from the use of many organic solvents such
as naptha, alcohol, etc.
Fabric/Carpet
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush
attachment frequently to remove dust and loose
dirt. A canister vacuum with a beater bar in
the nozzle may only be used on floor carpet and
carpeted floor mats. For soils, always try to remove
them first with plain water or club soda. Before
cleaning, gently remove as much of the soil
as possible using one of the following techniques:
• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil
with a paper towel. Allow the soil to absorb
into the paper towel until no more can
be removed.
• For solid dry soils: remove as much as
possible and then vacuum.
To clean, use the following instructions:
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with
water or club soda.
2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.
315
3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and
gently rub toward the center. Continue
cleaning, using a clean area of the cloth each
time it becomes soiled.
4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until
the cleaning cloth remains clean.
5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a
mild soap solution and repeat the cleaning
process that was used with plain water.
If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric
cleaner or spot lifter may be necessary. When a
commercial upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be
used, test a small hidden area for colorfastness
first. If the locally cleaned area gives any
impression that a ring formation may result, clean
the entire surface.
After the cleaning process has been completed,
a paper towel can be used to blot excess moisture
from the fabric or carpet.
316
Leather
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used
to remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning
is necessary, a soft cloth dampened with a mild
soap solution can be used. Allow the leather to
dry naturally. Do not use heat to dry. Never
use steam to clean leather. Never use spot lifters
or spot removers on leather. Many commercial
leather cleaners and coatings that are sold
to preserve and protect leather may permanently
change the appearance and feel of your leather
and are not recommended. Do not use silicone or
wax-based products, or those containing organic
solvents to clean your vehicle’s interior because
they can alter the appearance by increasing
the gloss in a non-uniform manner. Never use
shoe polish on your leather.
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is
necessary, a clean soft cloth dampened with a
mild soap solution can be used to gently remove
dust and dirt. Never use spot lifters or removers
on plastic surfaces. Many commercial cleaners and
coatings that are sold to preserve and protect
soft plastic surfaces may permanently change
the appearance and feel of your interior and
are not recommended. Do not use silicone or
wax-based products, or those containing organic
solvents to clean your vehicle’s interior because
they can alter the appearance by increasing
the gloss in a non-uniform manner.
Some commercial products may increase gloss
on your instrument panel. The increase in
gloss may cause annoying reflections in the
windshield and even make it difficult to see through
the windshield under certain conditions.
Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.
{CAUTION:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you
do, it may severely weaken them. In a
crash, they might not be able to provide
adequate protection. Clean safety belts
only with mild soap and lukewarm water.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them
last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.
Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth. During
very cold, damp weather frequent application may
be required. See Part D: Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 353.
317
Washing Your Vehicle
The paint finish on the vehicle provides beauty,
depth of color, gloss retention, and durability.
The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is to
keep it clean by washing it often with lukewarm
or cold water.
Do not wash the vehicle in the direct rays of the
sun. Use a car washing soap. Do not use
strong soaps or chemical detergents. Be sure
to rinse the vehicle well, removing all soap residue
completely. Approved cleaning products can be
obtained from your dealer.
318
See Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on
page 324. Do not use cleaning agents that are
petroleum based, or that contain acid or abrasives.
All cleaning agents should be flushed promptly
and not allowed to dry on the surface, or they
could stain. Dry the finish with a soft, clean
chamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid surface
scratches and water spotting.
High pressure car washes may cause water to
enter the vehicle.
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and
a car washing soap to clean exterior lamps
and lenses. Follow instructions under Washing
Your Vehicle on page 318.
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicle
by hand may be necessary to remove residue
from the paint finish. Approved cleaning products
can be obtained from your dealer. See Vehicle
Care/Appearance Materials on page 324.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint
finish may damage it. Use only non-abrasive
waxes and polishes that are made for a
basecoat/clearcoat paint finish on your vehicle.
The vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint
finish. The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss
to the colored basecoat. Always use waxes
and polishes that are non-abrasive and made for
a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and
other salts, ice melting agents, road oil and
tar, tree sap, bird droppings, chemicals from
industrial chimneys, etc., can damage the vehicle’s
finish if they remain on painted surfaces. Wash
the vehicle as soon as possible. If necessary, use
non-abrasive cleaners that are marked safe for
painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging,
weather, and chemical fallout that can take their
toll over a period of years. To help keep the
paint finish looking new, keep the vehicle in a
garage or covered whenever possible.
319
Windshield and Wiper Blades
If the windshield is not clear after using the
windshield washer, or if the wiper blade chatters
when running, wax, sap, or other material may
be on the blade or windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a glass
cleaning liquid or powder and water solution.
The windshield is clean if beads do not form when
it is rinsed with water.
Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper
blades and affect their performance. Clean
the blade by wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked
in full-strength windshield washer solvent. Then
rinse the blade with water.
Check the wiper blades and clean them as
necessary; replace blades that look worn.
Convertible Top
The vehicle’s convertible top should be cleaned
often. However, high pressure car washes
may cause water to enter your vehicle.
320
When you hand wash the top, do it in partial
shade. Use a mild soap, lukewarm water and a
soft sponge. A chamois or cloth may leave lint on
the top, and a brush can chafe the threads in
the top fabric. Do not use detergents, harsh
cleaners, solvents or bleaching agents.
Wet the entire vehicle and wash the top evenly to
avoid spots or rings. Let the soap remain on
the fabric for a few minutes. When the top is really
dirty, use a mild foam-type cleaner. Thoroughly
rinse the entire vehicle, then let the top dry
in direct sunlight.
To protect the convertible top:
• After you wash the vehicle, make sure the top
is completely dry before you lower it.
• Do not get any cleaner on the vehicle’s
painted finish; it could leave streaks.
• If you decide to go through an automatic car
wash, ask the manager if the equipment
could damage your top.
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels
Your vehicle may have either aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth
with mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water.
After rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean
towel. A wax may then be applied.
Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,
abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, or
cleaners that contain acid on aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels, you could damage
the surface of the wheel(s). The repairs would
not be covered by your warranty. Use only
GM-approved cleaners on aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the
painted surface of your vehicle. Do not use strong
soaps, chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive
cleaners, cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning
brushes on them because you could damage
the surface. Do not use chrome polish on
aluminum wheels.
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum
wheels could damage the wheels. The repairs
would not be covered by your warranty.
Use chrome polish on chrome wheels only.
Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels,
but avoid any painted surface of the wheel, and
buff off immediately after application.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle through an
automatic car wash that has silicone carbide
tire cleaning brushes, you could damage
the aluminum or chrome-plated wheels.
The repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Never drive a vehicle equipped with
aluminum or chrome-plated wheels through
an automatic car wash that uses silicone
carbide tire cleaning brushes.
Do not take your vehicle through an automatic
car wash that has silicone carbide tire cleaning
brushes. These brushes can also damage
the surface of these wheels.
321
Tires
Finish Damage
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire
cleaner.
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in
the finish should be repaired right away. Bare
metal will corrode quickly and may develop into
major repair expense.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on your vehicle may damage the
paint finish and/or tires. When applying a tire
dressing, always wipe off any overspray
from all painted surfaces on your vehicle.
Sheet Metal Damage
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body
repair shop applies anti-corrosion material to parts
repaired or replaced to restore corrosion
protection.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will
provide the corrosion protection while maintaining
the warranty.
322
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with
touch-up materials available from your dealer.
Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected in
your dealer’s body and paint shop.
Underbody Maintenance
Chemical Paint Spotting
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and
dust control can collect on the underbody. If these
are not removed, corrosion and rust can develop
on the underbody parts such as fuel lines,
frame, floor pan, and exhaust system even though
they have corrosion protection.
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can
create a chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can
fall upon and attack painted surfaces on the
vehicle. This damage can take two forms: blotchy,
ring-shaped discolorations, and small, irregular
dark spots etched into the paint surface.
At least every spring, flush these materials from
the underbody with plain water. Clean any
areas where mud and debris can collect. Dirt
packed in close areas of the frame should
be loosened before being flushed. Your dealer
or an underbody car washing system can do
this for you.
Although no defect in the paint job causes
this, GM will repair, at no charge to the owner,
the surfaces of new vehicles damaged by
this fallout condition within 12 months or
12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
323
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
Description
Usage
Description
Usage
Swirl Remover Polish
Removes swirl marks, fine
scratches and other light
surface contamination.
Cleaner Wax
Removes light scratches
and protects finish.
Foaming Tire Shine
Low Gloss
Cleans, shines and
protects in one easy step,
no wiping necessary.
Wash Wax Concentrate
Medium foaming
shampoo. Cleans and
lightly waxes.
Biodegradable and
phosphate free.
Polishing Cloth
Wax-Treated
Interior and exterior
polishing cloth.
Tar and Road
Oil Remover
Removes tar, road oil
and asphalt.
Chrome Cleaner
and Polish
Use on chrome or
stainless steel.
Vinyl Cleaner
Cleans vinyl.
Glass Cleaner
Removes dirt, grime,
smoke and fingerprints.
Chrome and Wire
Wheel Cleaner
Removes dirt and grime
from chrome wheels and
wire wheel covers.
Spot Lifter
Finish Enhancer
Removes dust,
fingerprints, and surface
contaminants. Spray on
wipe off.
Quickly and easily
removes spots and stains
from carpets, vinyl and
cloth upholstery.
Odor Eliminator
Odorless spray odor
eliminator used on fabrics,
vinyl, leather and carpet.
324
Vehicle Identification
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Service Parts Identification Label
You will find this label on the inside of the glove
box. It is very helpful if you ever need to order
parts. On this label, you will find the following:
• VIN
• Model designation
• Paint information
• Production options and special equipment
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It
appears on a plate in the front corner of the
instrument panel, on the driver’s side. You can see
it if you look through the windshield from outside
your vehicle. The VIN also appears on the Vehicle
Certification and Service Parts labels and the
certificates of title and registration.
Do not remove this label from the vehicle.
Engine Identification
The eighth character in the VIN is the engine
code. This code will help you identify your vehicle’s
engine, specifications, and replacement parts.
325
Electrical System
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Notice: Do not add anything electrical to your
vehicle unless you check with your dealer
first. Some electrical equipment can damage
your vehicle and the damage would not
be covered by your warranty. Some add-on
electrical equipment can keep other
components from working as they should.
Add-on equipment can drain your vehicle’s battery,
even if your vehicle is not operating.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before
attempting to add anything electrical to your
vehicle, see Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 54.
326
Headlamp Wiring
The headlamp wiring is protected by fuses. An
electrical overload will cause the lamps to remain
off. If this happens, have your headlamp wiring
checked right away.
Power Windows and Other
Power Options
Circuit breakers protect the power windows and
other power accessories. When the current load is
too heavy, the circuit breaker opens and closes,
protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed
or goes away.
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of J-Case fuses,
mini-fuses and circuit breakers. This greatly reduces
the chance of fires caused by electrical problems.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse.
If the band is broken or melted, replace the fuse.
Be sure you replace a bad fuse with a new
one of the identical size and rating.
If you ever have a problem on the road and do not
have a spare fuse, you can borrow one that has
the same amperage. Just pick some feature of your
vehicle that you can get along without — like the
radio or cigarette lighter — and use its fuse, if it
is the correct amperage. Replace it as soon as
you can.
Floor Console Fuse Block
The floor console fuse block is located on the
passenger’s side of the vehicle under the carpet.
Remove the fuse block cover to access the
fuses. Use the fuse puller to remove fuses.
After re-installing the fuse block cover, be sure to
tuck the carpet under the heater floor outlets.
Fuses
Usage
1
Fuse Puller
2
Empty
3
Empty
4
Empty
5
Empty
327
Fuses
328
Usage
6
Amplifier
7
Cluster
8
Ignition Switch, PassKey III+
9
Stoplamp
10
Climate Control System,
PassKey III+
11
Empty
12
Spare
13
Airbag
14
Spare
15
Wiper
16
Climate Control System,
Automatic Occupant Sensing
Module, Clutch Switch,
Crank Relay, Instrument
Panel Cluster
17
Empty
18
Empty
Fuses
Usage
19
Electric Power Steering,
Steering Wheel Controls
20
Spare
21
Spare
22
Empty
23
Radio
24
Sensing and Diagnostic Module
25
Engine Control Module,
Transmission Control Module
26
Door Locks
27
Interior Lamps
28
Steering Wheel Control Backlighting
29
Power Windows
30
Climate Control System
31
Empty
32
Retained Accessory Power
Underhood Fuse Block
The underhood fuse block is located in the engine
compartment on the passenger’s side of the
vehicle.
Lift the cover for access to the fuse block.
To remove fuses, use the fuse puller, or hold the
end of the fuse between your thumb and index
finger and pull straight out.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 244
for more information on location.
Fuses
Usage
1
Empty (LE5); Cooling Fan (LNF)
2
Rear Window Defogger
3
Empty
4
Body Control Module 3
5
Crank
6
Body Control Module 2
7
Body Control Module
8
Cooling Fan 2 (LE5); Empty (LNF)
329
Fuses
330
Usage
9
Empty
10
Trunk
11
Trunk
12
Fuses
Usage
27
Empty
28
Back-up Lamps Relay
(Automatic Transmission);
Empty (Manual Transmission)
Empty
29
Data Link Connector
13
Fuel Pump
30
Outlet
14
Rear Defogger Relay
15
Air Conditioning Clutch Relay
31
Back-up Lamps
(Automatic Transmission);
Empty (Manual Transmission)
16
Empty
32
Empty (LE5); Vacuum Pump (LNF)
17
Empty
33
Emissions
18
Trunk Release Relay
34
Crank Relay
19
Fuel Pump Relay
35
Empty
20
Empty
36
Empty
21
Mirrors
37
Power Seat
22
Air Conditioning
23
Empty
38
Empty (LE5); Vacuum Pump
Relay (LNF)
24
Cooling Fan 2 Relay (LE5);
Empty (LNF)
39
Empty
40
Cooling Fan 1 (LE5); Empty (LNF)
25
Fuse Puller
26
Powertrain Relay
41
Empty (LE5); Turbo, Cam
Phaser (LNF)
Fuses
Usage
Fuses
Usage
42
Engine Control Module
57
Anti-lock Brake System
43
Engine Control Module,
Transmission
58
Wiper Diode
59
Windshield Wiper
60
Horn
61
Anti-lock Brake System
62
Instrument Panel Ignition
63
Driver’s Side High Beam
64
Canister Vent
65
Driver’s Side Low-Beam
Headlamp
66
Passenger’s Side Low-Beam
Headlamp
67
Passenger’s Side High-Beam
Headlamp
44
Anti-lock Brake System
45
Injectors, Ignition Coils (LE5);
Ignition Coils (LNF)
46
Back-up Lamps
(Manual Transmission);
Empty (Automatic Transmission)
47
Empty
48
Daytime Running Lamps Relay
49
Daytime Running Lamps
50
Cooling Fan 1 Relay (LE5);
Empty (LNF)
51
Run/Crank Relay
52
Windshield Wiper Low/High Relay
68
Parking Lamps Relay
53
Fog Lamps
69
Parking Lamps
54
Fog Lamps Relay
70
Windshield Wiper On/Off Relay
55
Horn Relay
71
Low-Beam Headlamp Relay
56
S Band, OnStar®, Remote
Keyless Entry System
72
High-Beam Headlamp Relay
331
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. Please refer to
Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 353 for more information.
Capacities
English
Metric
For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge
amount, see the refrigerant caution label located
under the hood. See your dealer for more information.
Application
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a
Cooling System
2.0L Engine Automatic
8.9 qt
8.4 L
2.0L Engine Manual
9.0 qt
8.6 L
2.4L Engine Automatic
8.5 qt
8.0 L
2.4L Engine Manual
8.7 qt
8.2 L
Engine Oil with Filter
5.0 qt
4.7 L
Fuel Tank
13.6 gal
51.5 L
Transmission, Automatic (Complete Drain and Refill)
7.4 qt
7.0 L
Transmission, Manual (Complete Drain and Refill)
2.75 qt
2.6 L
Wheel Nut Torque
100 lb ft
140 Y
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the appropriate level, as recommended in this manual.
Engine Specifications
Engine
2.0L L4
2.4L L4
332
VIN Code
X
B
Transmission
Automatic Manual
Automatic Manual
Spark Plug Gap
0.035 inch (0.90 mm)
0.040 inch (1.01 mm)
Section 6
Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Schedule ................................ 334
Introduction ............................................... 334
Maintenance Requirements ........................ 334
Your Vehicle and the Environment ............ 334
How This Section is Organized ................. 334
Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services ..... 336
Using the Maintenance Schedule ............... 336
Scheduled Maintenance ............................. 337
Part B: Owner Checks and Services ......... 346
At Each Fuel Fill ....................................... 346
At Least Once a Month ............................. 346
At Least Twice a Year .............................. 347
At Least Once a Year ............................... 348
Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections .... 351
Steering and Suspension Inspection .......... 351
Exhaust System Inspection ........................ 351
Fuel System Inspection ............................. 351
Engine Cooling System Inspection ............. 352
Throttle System Inspection ........................ 352
Brake System Inspection ........................... 352
Part D: Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants .............................................. 353
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ... 355
Engine Drive Belt Routing ......................... 356
Part E: Maintenance Record ...................... 357
333
Maintenance Schedule
Introduction
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level
and change as recommended.
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep
your vehicle in good working condition, but also
helps the environment. Improper vehicle
maintenance can even affect the quality of the air
we breathe. Improper fluid levels or the wrong
tire inflation can increase the level of emissions
from your vehicle. To help protect our environment,
and to keep your vehicle in good condition, be
sure to maintain your vehicle properly.
How This Section is Organized
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The
Plan supplements your new vehicle warranties.
See your Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet
or your dealer for details.
Maintenance Requirements
Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections and
recommended fluids and lubricants as prescribed
in this manual are necessary to keep your
vehicle in good working condition. Any damage
caused by failure to follow scheduled maintenance
may not be covered by warranty.
334
This maintenance schedule is divided into
five parts:
“Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services”
explains what to have done and how often. Some
of these services can be complex, so unless
you are technically qualified and have the
necessary equipment, you should let your
GM dealer’s service department do these jobs.
Your GM dealer has GM-trained and supported
service people that will perform the work using
genuine GM parts.
{CAUTION:
Performing maintenance work on a
vehicle can be dangerous. In trying to do
some jobs, you can be seriously injured.
Do your own maintenance work only if
you have the required know-how and the
proper tools and equipment for the job.
If you have any doubt, have a qualified
technician do the work. See Doing Your
Own Service Work on page 236.
If you want to purchase service information,
see Service Publications Ordering Information
on page 380.
“Part B: Owner Checks and Services” tells you
what should be checked and when. It also
explains what you can easily do to help keep your
vehicle in good condition.
“Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections”
explains important inspections that your dealer’s
service department can perform for you.
“Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants”
lists some recommended products necessary to
help keep your vehicle properly maintained. These
products, or their equivalents, should be used
whether you do the work yourself or have it done.
“Part E: Maintenance Record” is a place for
you to record and keep track of the maintenance
performed on your vehicle. Keep your
maintenance receipts. They may be needed to
qualify your vehicle for warranty repairs.
335
Part A: Scheduled Maintenance
Services
In this part are scheduled maintenance services
which are to be performed at the mileage intervals
specified.
Using the Maintenance Schedule
We at General Motors want to keep your vehicle
in good working condition. But we do not know
exactly how you will drive it. You may drive short
distances only a few times a week. Or you
may drive long distances all the time in very hot,
dusty weather. You may use your vehicle in
making deliveries. Or you may drive it to work,
to do errands, or in many other ways.
Because of the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs may vary. You may
need more frequent checks and replacements.
So please read the following and note how
you drive. If you have questions on how to keep
your vehicle in good condition, see your dealer.
336
This part tells you the maintenance services you
should have done and when to schedule them.
When you go to your dealer for your service
needs, you will know that GM-trained and
supported service people will perform the work
using genuine GM parts.
The proper fluids and lubricants to use are listed
in Part D. Make sure whoever services your
vehicle uses these. All parts should be replaced
and all necessary repairs done before you or
anyone else drives the vehicle.
These schedules are for vehicles that:
• carry passengers and cargo within
recommended limits. You will find these on
the Tire and Loading Information label.
See Loading Your Vehicle on page 226.
• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within
legal driving limits.
• use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline
Octane on page 237.
Scheduled Maintenance
The services shown in this schedule up to
100,000 miles (160 000 km) should be repeated
after 100,000 miles (160 000 km) at the same
intervals for the life of this vehicle. The services
shown at 150,000 miles (240 000 km) should
be repeated at the same interval after
150,000 miles (240 000 km) for the life of
this vehicle.
See Part B: Owner Checks and Services on
page 346 and Part C: Periodic Maintenance
Inspections on page 351.
Footnotes
† The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or
the California Air Resources Board has determined
that the failure to perform this maintenance item
will not nullify the emission warranty or limit
recall liability prior to the completion of the
vehicle’s useful life. We, however, urge that all
recommended maintenance services be performed
at the indicated intervals and the maintenance
be recorded.
* If your vehicle has a Driver Information Center
(DIC), it also has the GM Oil Life System, a
computer system that lets you know when to
change the oil and filter. This is based on engine
revolutions and engine temperature and not
on mileage. Based on driving conditions, the
mileage at which an oil change will be indicated
can vary considerably. For the oil life system
to work properly, you must reset the system every
time the oil is changed.
When the system has calculated that oil life has
been diminished, it will indicate that an oil change
is necessary. A CHANGE OIL SOON message
on the Driver Information Center (DIC) will
come on. See DIC Warnings and Messages on
page 148. Change your oil as soon as possible
within the next two times you stop for fuel.
See Engine Oil on page 247. It is possible that,
if you are driving under the best conditions, the
oil life system may not indicate that an oil change
is necessary for over a year. However, your
engine oil and filter must be changed at least
once a year and at this time the system must be
reset. It is also important to check your oil regularly
and keep it at the proper level.
337
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must
change your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km)
since your last oil change. Remember to reset the
oil life system whenever the oil is changed. See
Engine Oil Life System on page 252 for information
on resetting the system.
+ A good time to check your brakes is during
tire rotation. See Brake System Inspection
on page 352.
5,000 Miles (8 000 km)
❑ Vehicles with Driver Information Center (DIC):
The Engine Oil Life System will tell you when
to change the engine oil and filter. See
Engine Oil Life System on page 252. An
Emission Control Service. (See footnote *)
❑ Vehicles without Driver Information Center:
Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission
Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 293 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
338
10,000 Miles (16 000 km)
❑ Vehicles with Driver Information Center (DIC):
The Engine Oil Life System will tell you when
to change the engine oil and filter. See
Engine Oil Life System on page 252. An
Emission Control Service. (See footnote *)
❑ Vehicles without Driver Information Center:
Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission
Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 293 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
15,000 Miles (24 000 km)
❑ Vehicles with Driver Information Center (DIC):
The Engine Oil Life System will tell you when
to change the engine oil and filter. See
Engine Oil Life System on page 252. An
Emission Control Service. (See footnote *)
❑ Vehicles without Driver Information Center:
Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission
Control Service.
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary,
replace the filter. If vehicle is driven in
dusty/dirty conditions, inspect filter at every
engine oil change. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
on page 254 for more information.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 293 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
20,000 Miles (32 000 km)
❑ Vehicles with Driver Information Center (DIC):
The Engine Oil Life System will tell you when
to change the engine oil and filter. See
Engine Oil Life System on page 252. An
Emission Control Service. (See footnote *)
❑ Vehicles without Driver Information Center:
Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission
Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 293 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
25,000 Miles (40 000 km)
❑ Vehicles with Driver Information Center (DIC):
The Engine Oil Life System will tell you when
to change the engine oil and filter. See
Engine Oil Life System on page 252. An
Emission Control Service. (See footnote *)
❑ Vehicles without Driver Information Center:
Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission
Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 293 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
339
30,000 Miles (48 000 km)
❑ Vehicles with Driver Information Center (DIC):
The Engine Oil Life System will tell you when
to change the engine oil and filter. See
Engine Oil Life System on page 252. An
Emission Control Service. (See footnote *)
❑ Vehicles without Driver Information Center:
Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission
Control Service.
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary,
replace the filter. If vehicle is driven in
dusty/dirty conditions, inspect filter at every
engine oil change. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
on page 254 for more information.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 293 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
35,000 Miles (56 000 km)
❑ Vehicles with Driver Information Center (DIC):
The Engine Oil Life System will tell you when
to change the engine oil and filter. See
Engine Oil Life System on page 252. An
Emission Control Service. (See footnote *)
340
❑ Vehicles without Driver Information Center:
Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission
Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 293 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
40,000 Miles (64 000 km)
❑ Vehicles with Driver Information Center (DIC):
The Engine Oil Life System will tell you when
to change the engine oil and filter. See
Engine Oil Life System on page 252. An
Emission Control Service. (See footnote *)
❑ Vehicles without Driver Information Center:
Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission
Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 293 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
45,000 Miles (72 000 km)
❑ Vehicles with Driver Information Center (DIC):
The Engine Oil Life System will tell you when
to change the engine oil and filter. See
Engine Oil Life System on page 252. An
Emission Control Service. (See footnote *)
❑ Vehicles without Driver Information Center:
Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission
Control Service.
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary,
replace the filter. If vehicle is driven in
dusty/dirty conditions, inspect filter at every
engine oil change. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
on page 254 for more information.
50,000 Miles (80 000 km)
❑ Vehicles with Driver Information Center (DIC):
The Engine Oil Life System will tell you when
to change the engine oil and filter. See
Engine Oil Life System on page 252. An
Emission Control Service. (See footnote *)
❑ Vehicles without Driver Information Center:
Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission
Control Service.
❑ Replace engine air cleaner filter. See Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter on page 254 for more
information.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 293 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if
the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more
of these conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches 90°F
(32°C) or higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police,
or delivery service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, change the fluid and filter at
100,000 miles (160 000 km).
341
55,000 Miles (88 000 km)
❑ Vehicles with Driver Information Center (DIC):
The Engine Oil Life System will tell you when
to change the engine oil and filter. See
Engine Oil Life System on page 252. An
Emission Control Service. (See footnote *)
❑ Vehicles without Driver Information Center:
Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission
Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 293 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
60,000 Miles (96 000 km)
❑ Vehicles with Driver Information Center (DIC):
The Engine Oil Life System will tell you when
to change the engine oil and filter. See
Engine Oil Life System on page 252. An
Emission Control Service. (See footnote *)
❑ Vehicles without Driver Information Center:
Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission
Control Service.
342
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary,
replace the filter. If vehicle is driven in
dusty/dirty conditions, inspect filter at every
engine oil change. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
on page 254 for more information.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 293 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
65,000 Miles (104 000 km)
❑ Vehicles with Driver Information Center (DIC):
The Engine Oil Life System will tell you when
to change the engine oil and filter. See
Engine Oil Life System on page 252. An
Emission Control Service. (See footnote *)
❑ Vehicles without Driver Information Center:
Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission
Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 293 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
70,000 Miles (112 000 km)
❑ Vehicles with Driver Information Center (DIC):
The Engine Oil Life System will tell you when
to change the engine oil and filter. See
Engine Oil Life System on page 252. An
Emission Control Service. (See footnote *)
❑ Vehicles without Driver Information Center:
Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission
Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 293 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
75,000 Miles (120 000 km)
❑ Vehicles with Driver Information Center (DIC):
The Engine Oil Life System will tell you when
to change the engine oil and filter. See
Engine Oil Life System on page 252. An
Emission Control Service. (See footnote *)
❑ Vehicles without Driver Information Center:
Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission
Control Service.
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary,
replace the filter. If vehicle is driven in
dusty/dirty conditions, inspect filter at every
engine oil change. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
on page 254 for more information.
80,000 Miles (128 000 km)
❑ Vehicles with Driver Information Center (DIC):
The Engine Oil Life System will tell you when
to change the engine oil and filter. See
Engine Oil Life System on page 252. An
Emission Control Service. (See footnote *)
❑ Vehicles without Driver Information Center:
Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission
Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 293 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
343
85,000 Miles (136 000 km)
❑ Vehicles with Driver Information Center (DIC):
The Engine Oil Life System will tell you when
to change the engine oil and filter. See
Engine Oil Life System on page 252. An
Emission Control Service. (See footnote *)
❑ Vehicles without Driver Information Center:
Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission
Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 293 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
90,000 Miles (144 000 km)
❑ Vehicles with Driver Information Center (DIC):
The Engine Oil Life System will tell you when
to change the engine oil and filter. See
Engine Oil Life System on page 252. An
Emission Control Service. (See footnote *)
❑ Vehicles without Driver Information Center:
Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission
Control Service.
344
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary,
replace the filter. If vehicle is driven in
dusty/dirty conditions, inspect filter at every
engine oil change. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
on page 254 for more information.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 293 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
95,000 Miles (152 000 km)
❑ Vehicles with Driver Information Center (DIC):
The Engine Oil Life System will tell you when
to change the engine oil and filter. See
Engine Oil Life System on page 252. An
Emission Control Service. (See footnote *)
❑ Vehicles without Driver Information Center:
Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission
Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 293 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
100,000 Miles (160 000 km)
❑ Vehicles with Driver Information Center (DIC):
The Engine Oil Life System will tell you when
to change the engine oil and filter. See
Engine Oil Life System on page 252. An
Emission Control Service. (See footnote *)
❑ Vehicles without Driver Information Center:
Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission
Control Service.
❑ Replace engine air cleaner filter. See Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter on page 254 for more
information.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 293 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Replace spark plugs. An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if
the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more
of these conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches 90°F
(32°C) or higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police,
or delivery service.
If you have not used your vehicle under severe
service conditions listed previously and, therefore,
have not changed your automatic transmission
fluid, change both the fluid and filter.
150,000 Miles (240 000 km)
❑ Drain, flush, and refill cooling system (or every
60 months since last service, whichever occurs
first). This service can be complex; you
should have your dealer perform this service.
See Engine Coolant on page 257 for what
to use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator,
condenser, pressure cap, and neck. Pressure
test the cooling system and pressure cap.
An Emission Control Service.
❑ Inspect engine accessory drive belt. Visually
inspect belt for fraying, excessive cracks, or
obvious damage. Replace belt if necessary.
An Emission Control Service.
345
Part B: Owner Checks and Services
Engine Coolant Level Check
Listed in this part are owner checks and services
which should be performed at the intervals
specified to help ensure the safety, dependability
and emission control performance of your
vehicle.
Check the engine coolant level and add
DEX-COOL® coolant mixture if necessary. See
Engine Coolant on page 257 for further details.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at
once. Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added
to your vehicle, make sure they are the proper
ones, as shown in Part D.
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the
windshield washer fluid reservoir and add
the proper fluid if necessary. See Windshield
Washer Fluid on page 269 for further details.
At Each Fuel Fill
At Least Once a Month
It is important for you or a service station attendant
to perform these underhood checks at each
fuel fill.
Tire Inspection and Inflation Check
Engine Oil Level Check
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil
if necessary. See Engine Oil on page 247 for
further details.
346
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Visually inspect your vehicle’s tires for wear
and make sure they are inflated to the correct
pressures. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 292.
At Least Twice a Year
Restraint System Check
During very cold, damp weather more frequent
application may be required. See Part D:
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 353.
Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all
your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors
and anchorages are working properly. Look for
any other loose or damaged safety belt system
parts. If you see anything that might keep a safety
belt system from doing its job, have it repaired.
Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced.
Manual Transmission Check
Also look for any opened or broken airbag
coverings, and have them repaired or replaced.
The airbag system does not need regular
maintenance.
It is not necessary to check the transmission fluid
level. A transmission fluid leak is the only
reason for fluid loss. Check for leaks. If a leak
occurs, take the vehicle to your dealer and have it
repaired as soon as possible.
Wiper Blade Check
Inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking. Replace
blade inserts that appear worn or damaged or
that streak or miss areas of the windshield. Also
see Windshield and Wiper Blades on page 320.
Weatherstrip Lubrication
It is not necessary to check the transmission fluid
level. Check for leaks. A fluid leak is the only
reason for fluid loss. Have the system inspected
and repaired if needed.
Automatic Transmission Inspection
Hydraulic Clutch System Check
Check the fluid level in the brake system and
clutch system reservoir. See Hydraulic Clutch on
page 256. A fluid loss in the brake or clutch
hydraulic system could indicate a problem. Have
the system inspected and repaired at once.
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them
last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.
Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth.
347
At Least Once a Year
Starter Switch Check
Key Lock Cylinders Service
Lubricate the key lock cylinders with the lubricant
specified in Part D.
Body Lubrication Service
Lubricate all hood latch assemblies, secondary
latch, pivots, spring anchor, release pawl,
hood and body door hinges, rear compartment,
and any folding seat hardware. Part D tells
you what to use. More frequent lubrication may
be required when exposed to a corrosive
environment.
348
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough
room around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the
regular brake. See Parking Brake on page 86.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready
to turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
3. On automatic transmission vehicles, try to
start the engine in each gear. The vehicle
should start only in PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N). If the vehicle starts in any
other position, contact your GM Goodwrench®
dealer for service.
On manual transmission vehicles, put the shift
lever in NEUTRAL, push the clutch pedal
down halfway, and try to start the engine.
The vehicle should start only when the clutch
pedal is pushed down all the way to the
floor. If the vehicle starts when the clutch pedal
is not pushed all the way down, contact your
GM Goodwrench® dealer for service.
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock
Control System Check
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough
room around the vehicle. It should be parked
on a level surface.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking
Brake on page 86.
Be ready to apply the regular brake
immediately if the vehicle begins to move.
3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to RUN,
but do not start the engine. Without applying
the regular brake, try to move the shift
lever out of PARK (P) with normal effort. If the
shift lever moves out of PARK (P), contact
your GM Goodwrench® dealer for service.
Ignition Transmission Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try
to turn the ignition to LOCK in each shift lever
position.
• With an automatic transmission, the ignition
should turn to LOCK only when the shift
lever is in PARK (P). The ignition key should
come out only in LOCK.
• With a manual transmission, the ignition key
should come out only in LOCK.
Turn the steering wheel to the left and to the right.
It should only lock when turned to the right.
Contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer if service
is required.
349
Parking Brake and Automatic
Transmission Park (P) Mechanism
Check
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, your
vehicle could begin to move. You or
others could be injured and property
could be damaged. Make sure there is
room in front of your vehicle in case it
begins to roll. Be ready to apply the
regular brake at once should the vehicle
begin to move.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular
brake, set the parking brake.
• To check the parking brake’s holding ability:
With the engine running and transmission in
NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure
from the regular brake pedal. Do this until the
vehicle is held by the parking brake only.
• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding
ability: With the engine running, shift to
PARK (P). Then release the parking brake
followed by the regular brake.
Contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer if service
is required.
Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush
any corrosive materials from the underbody.
Take care to clean thoroughly any areas where
mud and other debris can collect.
350
Part C: Periodic Maintenance
Inspections
Listed in this part are inspections and services
which should be performed at least twice a
year (for instance, each spring and fall). You
should let your dealer’s service department
do these jobs. Make sure any necessary repairs
are completed at once.
Proper procedures to perform these services may
be found in a service manual. See Service
Publications Ordering Information on page 380.
Exhaust System Inspection
Inspect the complete exhaust system. Inspect the
body near the exhaust system. Look for broken,
damaged, missing or out-of-position parts as
well as open seams, holes, loose connections
or other conditions which could cause a heat
build-up in the floor pan or could let exhaust fumes
into the vehicle. See Engine Exhaust on page 91.
Fuel System Inspection
Inspect the complete fuel system for damage
or leaks.
Steering and Suspension Inspection
Inspect the front and rear suspension and
steering system for damaged, loose or missing
parts, signs of wear or lack of lubrication. Inspect
the power steering lines and hoses for proper
hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc.
351
Engine Cooling System Inspection
Brake System Inspection
Inspect the hoses and have them replaced if
they are cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Inspect
all pipes, fittings and clamps; replace as needed.
Clean the outside of the radiator and air
conditioning condenser. To help ensure proper
operation, a pressure test of the cooling system
and pressure cap is recommended at least
once a year.
Inspect the complete system. Inspect brake lines
and hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks,
cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect disc brake pads for
wear and rotors for surface condition. Inspect other
brake parts, including calipers, parking brake,
etc. You may need to have your brakes inspected
more often if your driving habits or conditions
result in frequent braking.
Throttle System Inspection
Inspect the throttle system for interference or
binding, and for damaged or missing parts.
Replace parts as needed. Replace any
components that have high effort or excessive
wear. Do not lubricate accelerator and cruise
control cables.
352
Part D: Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Engine Oil
(2.0L L4
engine)
The engine requires a special engine
oil meeting GM Standard GM4718M.
Oils meeting this standard may
be identified with the American
Petroleum Institute (API) Certified for
Gasoline Engines starburst symbol.
However, not all synthetic API oils
with the starburst symbol will meet
this GM standard. You should
look for and use only an oil that
meets GM Standard GM4718M.
GM Goodwrench® oil meets all
the requirements for your vehicle.
For the proper viscosity, see
Engine Oil on page 247.
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name,
part number, or specification may be obtained
from your dealer.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Engine Oil
(2.4L L4
engine)
Engine oil which meets
GM Standard GM6094M and
displays the American Petroleum
Institute Certified for Gasoline
Engines starburst symbol.
GM Goodwrench® oil meets
all the requirements for your vehicle.
To determine the proper viscosity
for your vehicle’s engine, see
Engine Oil on page 247.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
and use only DEX-COOL®
Engine Coolant water
Coolant. See Engine Coolant
on page 257.
Hydraulic Brake Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
System
Hydraulic Clutch Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
System
Power Steering Fluid
Power Steering GM
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021184,
System
in Canada 89021186).
353
Usage
Windshield
Washer
Fluid/Lubricant
Manual
Transmission
Automatic
Transmission
DEXRON®-VI Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
Key Lock
Cylinders
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Rear Axle
SAE 75W-90 Synthetic
Axle Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12378261,
in Canada 10953455) meeting
GM Specification 9986115.
354
SAE 75W-90 Synthetic
Axle Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12378261,
in Canada 10953455) meeting
GM Specification 9986115.
With a complete drain and refill
add 4 ounces (118 ml) of
Limited-Slip Axle Lubricant Additive
(GM Part No. U.S. 1052358,
in Canada 992694) where required.
See Rear Axle on page 279.
Fluid/Lubricant
Chassis
Lubrication
Chassis Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985,
in Canada 88901242) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Secondary
Latch,
Pivots, Spring
Anchor, and
Release Pawl
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,
in Canada 992723) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
Manual Transmission Fluid
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021806,
in Canada 89021807).
Rear Axle
(Limited-Slip
Differential)
Usage
Lubricant, Superlube
Hood and Door Multi-Purpose
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
Hinges
in Canada 10953474).
Weatherstrip
Conditioning
Weatherstrip Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,
in Canada 10953518) or
Dielectric Silicone Grease
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,
in Canada 992887).
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your
GM dealer.
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
GM Part Number
ACDelco® Part
Number
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
15287103
A3076C
Engine Oil Filter
12605566
PF457G
2.4L Engine
12598004
41-103
2.0L Engine
12590701
41-102
Driver’s Side —16 inches (40 cm)
10344209
—
Passenger’s Side — 22 inches (55 cm)
10344210
—
Part
Spark Plugs
Windshield Wiper Blade (Hook Type)
355
Engine Drive Belt Routing
2.0L and 2.4L L4 Engines
Belt routing for A/C option shown. Dotted line
represents routing for non A/C option.
356
Part E: Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, and who performed the
service and any additional information from “Owner Checks and Services” or “Periodic Maintenance”
on the following record pages. Also, you should retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Date
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance Record
357
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
358
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance Record
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance Record
359
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
360
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance Record
Section 7
Customer Assistance Information
Customer Assistance and Information ....... 362
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ............... 362
Online Owner Center ................................. 365
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users .......................... 366
Customer Assistance Offices ..................... 366
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ........ 367
Roadside Assistance Program ................... 368
Courtesy Transportation ............................. 371
Vehicle Data Collection and Event
Data Recorders ...................................... 373
Collision Damage Repair ........................... 375
Reporting Safety Defects ............................ 379
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government ..................... 379
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government ............................ 379
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors ...................................... 379
Service Publications Ordering
Information ............................................. 380
361
Customer Assistance and
Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important
to your dealer and to Pontiac. Normally, any
concerns with the sales transaction or the
operation of your vehicle will be resolved by your
dealer’s sales or service departments. Sometimes,
however, despite the best intentions of all
concerned, misunderstandings can occur. If your
concern has not been resolved to your
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member
of dealership management. Normally, concerns
can be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter
has already been reviewed with the sales,
service, or parts manager, contact the owner of
the dealership or the general manager.
362
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of
dealership management, it appears your concern
cannot be resolved by the dealership without
further help, in the U.S., contact the Pontiac
Customer Assistance Center by calling
1-800-762-2737. In Canada, contact General
Motors of Canada Customer Communication
Centre in Oshawa by calling 1-800-263-3777
(English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in
order to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please
have the following information available to give
the Customer Assistance Representative:
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This is
available from the vehicle registration or
title, or the plate at the top left of the
instrument panel and visible through the
windshield.
• Dealership name and location.
• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.
When contacting Pontiac, please remember that
your concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s
facility. That is why we suggest you follow
Step One first if you have a concern.
STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: Both General
Motors and your dealer are committed to making
sure you are completely satisfied with your
new vehicle. However, if you continue to remain
unsatisfied after following the procedure outlined in
Steps One and Two, you should file with the
BBB Auto Line Program to enforce your rights.
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court
program administered by the Council of Better
Business Bureaus to settle automotive disputes
regarding vehicle repairs or the interpretation of the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Although you may
be required to resort to this informal dispute
resolution program prior to filing a court action, use
of the program is free of charge and your case will
generally be heard within 40 days. If you do not
agree with the decision given in your case, you may
reject it and proceed with any other venue for relief
available to you.
You can contact the BBB Auto Line Program using
the toll-free telephone number or write them at the
following address:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
This program is available in all 50 states and the
District of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by
vehicle age, mileage and other factors. General
Motors reserves the right to change eligibility
limitations and/or discontinue its participation in
this program.
363
STEP THREE — Canadian Owners: In the event
that you do not feel your concerns have been
addressed after following the procedure outlined in
Steps One and Two, General Motors of Canada
Limited wants you to be aware of its participation
in a no-charge Mediation/Arbitration Program.
General Motors of Canada Limited has committed
to binding arbitration of owner disputes involving
factory-related vehicle service claims. The program
provides for the review of the facts involved by
an impartial third party arbiter, and may include an
informal hearing before the arbiter. The program
is designed so that the entire dispute settlement
process, from the time you file your complaint
to the final decision, should be completed
in approximately 70 days. We believe our impartial
program offers advantages over courts in most
jurisdictions because it is informal, quick, and free
of charge.
364
For further information concerning eligibility in
the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan
(CAMVAP), call toll-free 1-800-207-0685.
Alternatively, you can call the General Motors
Customer Communication Centre, 1-800-263-3777
(English), 1-800-263-7854 (French), or write to:
Mediation/Arbitration Program
c/o Customer Communication Centre
General Motors of Canada Limited
Mail Code: CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Your inquiry should be accompanied by your
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
Online Owner Center
My GM Canada (Canada only)
Online Owner Center
(United States only)
My GM Canada is a password-protected section
of gmcanada.com where you can save information
on GM vehicles, get personalized offers, and
use handy tools and forms with greater ease.
The Owner Center is a resource for your GM
ownership needs. Specific vehicle information
can be found in one place.
The Online Owner Center allows you to:
• Get e-mail service reminders.
• Access information about your specific
vehicle, including tips and videos and
an electronic version of this owner manual.
• Keep track of your vehicle’s service history
and maintenance schedule.
• Find GM dealers for service nationwide.
• Receive special promotions and privileges
only available to members.
Here are a few of the valuable tools and services
you will have access to:
− My Showroom: Find and save information on
vehicles and current offers in your area.
− My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such as
address and phone number for each of
your preferred GM Dealers or Retailers.
− My Driveway: Receive service reminders and
helpful advice on owning and maintaining
your vehicle.
− My Preferences: Manage your profile,
subscribe to E-News and use tools and forms
with greater ease.
Refer to www.MyGMLink.com on the web for
updated information and to register your vehicle.
To sign up to My GM Canada, visit the My GM
Canada section within www.gmcanada.com.
365
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of
hearing, or speech-impaired and who use Text
Telephones (TTYs), Pontiac has TTY equipment
available at its Customer Assistance Center.
Any TTY user can communicate with Pontiac by
dialing: 1-800-833-PONT (7668). (TTY users
in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
Customer Assistance Offices
Pontiac encourages customers to call the toll-free
number for assistance. However, if a customer
wishes to write or e-mail Pontiac, the letter should
be addressed to:
United States — Customer Assistance
Pontiac Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33172
Detroit, MI 48232-5172
www.Pontiac.com
1-800-762-2737 or
1-800-833-7668
(For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
366
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-ROADSIDE
(762-3743)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
From Puerto Rico:
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
Canada — Customer Assistance
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
www.gmcanada.com
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone
devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
Overseas — Customer Assistance
Please contact the local General Motors
Business Unit.
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program
Mexico, Central America and
Caribbean Islands/Countries
(Except Puerto Rico and U.S.
Virgin Islands) — Customer Assistance
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma #2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800
This program, available to qualified applicants,
can reimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost
of eligible aftermarket adaptive equipment required
for your vehicle, such as hand controls or a
wheelchair/scooter lift.
The offer is available for a very limited period of
time from the date of vehicle purchase/lease.
For more details, or to determine your vehicle’s
eligibility, visit gmmobility.com or call the GM
Mobility Assistance Center at 1-800-323-9935.
Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935.
General Motors of Canada also has a Mobility
Program. Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483)
for details. TTY users call 1-800-263-3830.
367
Roadside Assistance Program
In the U.S., call 1-800-ROADSIDE (762-3743)
In Canada, call 1-800-268-6800
Service available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
As the owner of a new Pontiac vehicle, you are
automatically enrolled in the Pontiac Roadside
Assistance program. This value-added service is
intended to provide you with peace of mind as you
drive in the city or travel the open road.
Who is Covered?
Roadside Assistance coverage is for the vehicle
operator, regardless of ownership. A person driving
this vehicle without the consent of the owner is
not eligible for coverage.
368
The following services are provided in the U.S.
during the Bumper-to-Bumper warranty period and,
in Canada, during the Base Warranty coverage
period of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, up to
a maximum coverage of $100.
• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel for the
customer to get to the nearest service station
(approximately $5 in the U.S. and 10 litres
in Canada). Service to provide diesel may be
restricted. For safety reasons, propane
and other alternative fuels will not be provided
through this service.
• Lock-out Service: To ensure security, the
driver must present the vehicle registration and
personal ID before lock-out service is provided.
Lock-out service is covered at no charge if you
are unable to gain entry into your vehicle. If
your vehicle does not start, Roadside
Assistance will arrange to have your vehicle
towed to the nearest authorized dealership. In
the U.S., replacement keys made at the
customer’s expense will be covered within
10 miles (16 km).
• Emergency Tow From a Public Roadway or
Highway: Tow to the nearest dealership for
warranty service or in the event of a
vehicle-disabling accident. Winch-out
assistance when the vehicle is mired in sand,
mud, or snow.
• Flat Tire Change: Installation of your spare tire
in good condition is covered at no charge. The
customer is responsible for the repair or
replacement of the tire if not covered by a
warrantable failure.
• Jump Start: No-start occurrences which
require a battery jump start is covered at no
charge.
Additional Services for Canadian
Customers
• Trip Routing Service: Upon Request,
Roadside Assistance can send you detailed,
computer-personalized maps, highlighting your
choice of either the most direct route or the
most scenic route to your destination,
anywhere in North America, along with any
helpful travel information we may have
pertaining to your trip. To request this service,
please call us toll-free at 1-800-268-6800.
We will make every attempt to send your
personalized trip routing as quickly as
possible, but it’s best to allow three weeks
before your planned departure date.
Trip routing requests will be limited to
six per calendar year.
• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance:
In the event of a warranty related vehicle
disablement, while en route and over
250 kilometres from original point of departure,
you may qualify for trip interruption expense
assistance. This assistance covers reasonable
reimbursement of up to a maximum of $500
(Canadian) for (A) meals (maximum of
$50/day), (B) lodging (maximum of $100/night)
and (C) alternate ground transportation
(maximum of $40/day). This benefit is to assist
you with some of the unplanned expense
you may incur while waiting for your vehicle to
be repaired.
Pre-authorization, original detailed receipts
and a copy of the repair order are required.
Once authorization has been given, your
advisor will help you make any necessary
arrangements and explain how to claim for trip
interruption expense assistance.
369
• Alternative Service: There may be times,
when Roadside Assistance cannot provide
timely assistance, your advisor may authorize
you to secure local emergency road service,
and you will be reimbursed up to $100
upon submission of the original receipt to
Roadside Assistance.
In many instances, mechanical failures are
covered under Pontiac’s Bumper-to-Bumper
warranty, and the duration of the Base Warranty
Coverage for Canadian customers of the new
Vehicle Limited Warranty. However, any cost for
parts and labor for non-warranty repairs are
the responsibility of the driver.
For prompt and efficient assistance when calling,
please provide the following to the Roadside
Assistance Representative:
• Your name, home address, and home
telephone number.
• Telephone number of your location.
• Location of the vehicle.
370
• Model, year, color, and license plate number
of the vehicle.
• Odometer reading, Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN), and delivery date of the vehicle.
• Description of the problem.
While we hope you never have the occasion to
use our service, it is added security while traveling
for you and your family. Remember, we are
only a phone call away. Pontiac Roadside
Assistance: 1-800-ROADSIDE (762-3743), text
telephone (TTY) users, call 1-888-889-2438,
Canadian customers call 1-800-268-6800.
Pontiac and General Motors of Canada Limited
reserve the right to limit services or reimbursement
to an owner or driver when, in their sole
discretion, the claims become excessive in
frequency or type of occurrence.
Roadside Assistance is not part of or included in
the coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. Pontiac and General Motors of
Canada Limited reserve the right to make any
changes or discontinue the Roadside Assistance
program at any time without notification.
Towing and Road Service Exclusions
Specifically excluded from Roadside Assistance
coverage are towing or services for vehicles
operated on a non-public roadway or highway,
fines, impound towing caused by a violation
of local, Municipal, State, Provincial, or Federal
law, and mounting, dismounting or changing
of snow tires, chains, or other traction devices.
Courtesy Transportation
To enhance your ownership experience, we and
our participating dealers are proud to offer
Courtesy Transportation, a customer support
program for new vehicles.
For warranty repairs during the Bumper-to-Bumper
(U.S.) or Base Warranty Coverage period
(Canada), provided by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty, interim transportation may be available
under the Courtesy Transportation program.
Several courtesy transportation options are
available to assist in reducing your inconvenience
when warranty repairs are required.
Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty and is available only
at participating dealers. A separate booklet entitled
“Warranty and Owner Assistance Information”
furnished with each new vehicle provides detailed
warranty coverage information.
Scheduling Service Appointments
When your vehicle requires warranty service,
contact your dealer and request an appointment.
By scheduling a service appointment and
advising your service consultant of your
transportation needs, your dealer can help
minimize your inconvenience.
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the
service department immediately, keep driving it
until it can be scheduled for service, unless,
of course, the problem is safety-related. If it is,
please call your dealership, let them know this, and
ask for instructions.
If the dealer requests that you simply drop the
vehicle off for service, you are urged to do so as
early in the work day as possible to allow for
the same day repair.
371
Transportation Options
Warranty service can generally be completed
while you wait. However, if you are unable to wait,
GM helps to minimize your inconvenience by
providing several transportation options.
Depending on the circumstances, your dealer
can offer you one of the following:
Shuttle Service
Shuttle service is the preferred means of offering
Courtesy Transportation and participating
dealers can provide you with shuttle service to get
you to your destination with minimal interruption
of your daily schedule. This includes one-way
or round trip shuttle service within reasonable time
and distance parameters for the dealer’s area.
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,
and public transportation is used as ‘shuttle
service,’ the reimbursement is limited to the
associated shuttle allowance and must be
supported by original receipts.
372
In addition, for U.S. customers, should you arrange
transportation through a friend or relative, limited
reimbursement for reasonable fuel expenses may
be available. Claim amounts should reflect actual
costs and be supported by original receipts.
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a
courtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you for
a rental vehicle that you obtain if your vehicle is
kept for an overnight warranty repair. Rental
reimbursement will be limited and must be
supported by original receipts. This requires that
you sign and complete a rental agreement
and meet state/provincial, local, and rental vehicle
provider requirements. Requirements vary and
may include minimum age requirements, insurance
coverage, credit card, etc. You are responsible
for fuel usage charges and may also be
responsible for taxes, levies, usage fees,
excessive mileage, or rental usage beyond the
completion of the repair.
Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicle
as a courtesy rental.
Additional Program Information
All program options, such as shuttle service, may
not be available at every dealer. Please contact
your dealer for specific information about
availability. All Courtesy Transportation
arrangements will be administered by appropriate
dealer personnel.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally
modify, change or discontinue Courtesy
Transportation at any time and to resolve all
questions of claim eligibility pursuant to the terms
and conditions described herein at its sole
discretion.
Vehicle Data Collection and Event
Data Recorders
Your vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles,
has a number of sophisticated computer systems
that monitor and control several aspects of the
vehicle’s performance. Your vehicle uses on-board
vehicle computers to monitor emission control
components to optimize fuel economy, to monitor
conditions for airbag deployment and, if the
vehicle has the Anti-lock Brake System (ABS), to
provide anti-lock braking and to help the driver
control the vehicle in difficult driving situations.
Some information may be stored during regular
operations to facilitate repair of detected
malfunctions; other information is stored only
in a crash event by computer systems,
such as those commonly called Event Data
Recorders (EDR).
373
In a crash event, computer systems, such as the
airbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) in
your vehicle may record information about the
condition of the vehicle and how it was operated,
such as data related to engine speed, brake
application, throttle position, vehicle speed, safety
belt usage, airbag readiness, airbag performance,
and the severity of a collision. This information has
been used to improve vehicle crash performance
and may be used to improve crash performance of
future vehicles and driving safety. Unlike the data
recorders on many airplanes, these on-board
systems do not record sounds, such as
conversation of vehicle occupants.
To read this information, special equipment is
needed and access to the vehicle or the device
that stores the data is required. GM will not access
information about a crash event or share it with
others other than:
• with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the
vehicle is leased, with the consent of the
lessee,
• in response to an official request of police or
similar government office,
• as part of GM’s defense of litigation through the
discovery process, or
• as required by law.
374
In addition, once GM collects or receives data,
GM may:
• use the data for GM research needs,
• make it available for research where
appropriate confidentiality is to be maintained
and need is shown, or
• share summary data which is not tied to a
specific vehicle with non-GM organizations
for research purposes.
Others, such as law enforcement, may have
access to the special equipment that can read the
information if they have access to the vehicle
or the device that stores the data.
If your vehicle has OnStar®, please check the
OnStar® subscription service agreement or manual
for information on its operations and data collection.
Collision Damage Repair
If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is
damaged, have the damage repaired by a qualified
technician using the proper equipment and
quality replacement parts. Poorly performed
collision repairs will diminish your vehicle’s resale
value, and safety performance can be
compromised in subsequent collisions.
Collision Parts
Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made
with the same materials and construction methods
as the parts with which your vehicle was
originally built. Genuine GM Collision parts are
your best choice to assure that your vehicle’s
designed appearance, durability, and safety are
preserved. The use of Genuine GM parts can help
maintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty.
Recycled original equipment parts may also be
used for repair. These parts are typically removed
from vehicles that were total losses in prior
accidents. In most cases, the parts being recycled
are from undamaged sections of the vehicle. A
recycled original equipment GM part, may be an
acceptable choice to maintain your vehicle’s
originally designed appearance and safety
performance, however, the history of these parts is
not known. Such parts are not covered by your
GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any related
failures are not covered by that warranty.
Aftermarket collision parts are also available. These
are made by companies other than GM and may
not have been tested for your vehicle. As a result,
these parts may fit poorly, exhibit premature
durability/corrosion problems, and may not perform
properly in subsequent collisions. Aftermarket parts
are not covered by your GM New Vehicle Limited
Warranty, and any vehicle failure related to such
parts are not covered by that warranty.
375
Repair Facility
GM also recommends that you choose a collision
repair facility that meets your needs before you
ever need collision repairs. Your GM dealer
may have a collision repair center with GM-trained
technicians and state of the art equipment, or
be able to recommend a collision repair center that
has GM-trained technicians and comparable
equipment.
Insuring Your Vehicle
Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with
comprehensive and collision insurance coverage.
There are significant differences in the quality
of coverage afforded by various insurance policy
terms. Many insurance policies provide reduced
protection to your GM vehicle by limiting
compensation for damage repairs by using
aftermarket collision parts. Some insurance
companies will not specify aftermarket collision
parts. When purchasing insurance, we recommend
that you assure your vehicle will be repaired
with GM original equipment collision parts. If such
insurance coverage is not available from your
current insurance carrier, consider switching
to another insurance carrier.
376
If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company
may require you to have insurance that assures
repairs with Genuine GM Original Equipment
Manufacturer (OEM) parts or Genuine
Manufacturer replacement parts. Read your
lease carefully, as you may be charged at the
end of your lease for poor quality repairs.
If an Accident Occurs
Here is what to do if you are involved in an
accident.
• Try to relax and then check to make sure you
are all right. If you are uninjured, make sure
that no one else in your vehicle, or the
other vehicle, is injured.
• If there has been an injury, call 911 for help.
Do not leave the scene of an accident until all
matters have been taken care of. Move your
vehicle only if its position puts you in danger or
you are instructed to move it by a police officer.
• Give only the necessary and requested
information to police and other parties involved
in the accident. Do not discuss your personal
condition, mental frame of mind, or anything
unrelated to the accident. This will help guard
against post-accident legal action.
• If you need roadside assistance, call
• If possible, call your insurance company from
GM Roadside Assistance. See Roadside
Assistance Program on page 368 for more
information.
• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know where
the towing service will be taking it. Get a card
from the tow truck operator or write down the
driver’s name, the service’s name, and the
phone number.
• Remove any valuables from your vehicle before
it is towed away. Make sure this includes your
insurance information and registration if you
keep these items in your vehicle.
• Gather the important information you will need
from the other driver. Things like name,
address, phone number, driver’s license
number, vehicle license plate, vehicle make,
model and model year, Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN), insurance company and policy
number, and a general description of the
damage to the other vehicle.
the scene of the accident. They will walk you
through the information they will need. If they
ask for a police report, phone or go to the police
department headquarters the next day and you
can get a copy of the report for a nominal fee. In
some states/provinces with “no fault” insurance
laws, a report may not be necessary. This is
especially true if there are no injuries and both
vehicles are driveable.
• Choose a reputable collision repair facility for
your vehicle. Whether you select a GM dealer
or a private collision repair facility to fix the
damage, make sure you are comfortable with
them. Remember, you will have to feel
comfortable with their work for a long time.
• Once you have an estimate, read it carefully
and make sure you understand what work will
be performed on your vehicle. If you have a
question, ask for an explanation. Reputable
shops welcome this opportunity.
377
Managing the Vehicle Damage Repair
Process
In the event that your vehicle requires damage
repairs, GM recommends that you take an active
role in its repair. If you have a pre-determined
repair facility of choice, take your vehicle there, or
have it towed there. Specify to the facility that
any required replacement collision parts be original
equipment parts, either new Genuine GM parts
or recycled original GM parts. Remember, recycled
parts will not be covered by your GM vehicle
warranty.
378
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must
live with the repair. Depending on your policy
limits, your insurance company may initially value
the repair using aftermarket parts. Discuss this
with your repair professional, and insist on
Genuine GM parts. Remember if your vehicle is
leased you may be obligated to have the
vehicle repaired with Genuine GM parts, even if
your insurance coverage does not pay the full cost.
If another party’s insurance company is paying
for the repairs, you are not obligated to accept a
repair valuation based on that insurance
company’s collision policy repair limits, as you
have no contractual limits with that company. In
such cases, you can have control of the repair and
parts choices as long as cost stays within
reasonable limits.
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which
could cause a crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately inform the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA),
in addition to notifying General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open
an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a
recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual problems
between you, your dealer, or General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA
400 Seventh Street, SW.
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your
vehicle has a safety defect, you should
immediately notify Transport Canada, in addition
to notifying General Motors of Canada Limited.
You may call them at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:
Transport Canada
Road Safety Branch
2780 Sheffield Road
Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport
Canada) in a situation like this, we certainly hope
you’ll notify us. Please call us at 1-800-762-2737,
or write:
Pontiac Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33172
Detroit, MI 48232-5172
379
In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777
(English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Service Bulletins
Service Publications Ordering
Information
In Canada, the service bulletin reference number
can be obtained by contacting your General
Motors dealer or by calling 1-800-GM-DRIVE
(1-800-463-7483). This reference number is
needed to order the service bulletin from
Helm, Inc.
Service Manuals
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle
suspension, brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
Transmission, Transaxle, Transfer
Case Unit Repair Manual
This manual provides information on unit repair
service procedures, adjustments, and
specifications for GM transmissions, transaxles,
and transfer cases.
380
Service Bulletins give technical service information
needed to knowledgeably service General
Motors cars and trucks. Each bulletin contains
instructions to assist in the diagnosis and service
of your vehicle.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $6.00 US + Processing Fee
Owner Information
Owner publications are written specifically for
owners and intended to provide basic operational
information about the vehicle. The owner
manual will include the Maintenance Schedule for
all models.
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner Manual,
and Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 US +
Processing Fee
Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00 US +
Processing Fee
Current and Past Model Order Forms
Technical Service Bulletins and Manuals are
available for current and past model GM vehicles.
To request an order form, please specify year
and model name of the vehicle.
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM
Eastern Time
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on
the World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com
Or you can write to:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Prices are subject to change without notice and
without incurring obligation. Allow ample time
for delivery.
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are
to make checks payable in U.S. funds.
381
✍ NOTES
382
A
Accessories and Modifications ..................... 235
Accessory Power Outlet(s) .......................... 121
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle ....................................................... 55
Additives, Fuel ............................................ 238
Add-On Electrical Equipment ....................... 326
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ............................. 254
Air Conditioning ........................................... 122
Airbag
Passenger Status Indicator ....................... 132
Readiness Light ....................................... 131
Airbag Sensing and Diagnostic
Module (SDM) .......................................... 373
Airbag System ............................................... 42
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ......................... 55
How Does an Airbag Restrain? .................. 48
Passenger Sensing System ....................... 50
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ..... 54
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .................. 48
What Will You See After an
Airbag Inflates? ...................................... 48
When Should an Airbag Inflate? ................. 47
Where Are the Airbags? ............................. 45
Antenna, Fixed Mast ...................................
Antenna, XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
System ....................................................
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ....................
Anti-Lock Brake, System Warning Light .......
Appearance Care
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ........
Care of Safety Belts ................................
Chemical Paint Spotting ...........................
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses ..............
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle ..........
Convertible Top ........................................
Fabric/Carpet ...........................................
Finish Care ..............................................
Finish Damage .........................................
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and
Other Plastic Surfaces ..........................
Leather ....................................................
Sheet Metal Damage ...............................
Tires ........................................................
Underbody Maintenance ...........................
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ..........
Washing Your Vehicle ..............................
Weatherstrips ...........................................
Windshield and Wiper Blades ...................
Ashtray(s) ....................................................
187
187
195
135
321
317
323
318
314
320
315
319
322
317
316
322
322
323
324
318
317
320
122
383
Audio System(s) .......................................... 157
Audio Steering Wheel Controls ................. 185
Care of Your CD Player ........................... 187
Care of Your CDs .................................... 187
Fixed Mast Antenna ................................. 187
Radio with CD ................................ 161, 166
Setting the Time .............................. 158, 159
Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................ 185
Understanding Radio Reception ............... 186
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ...... 187
Automatic Door Lock ..................................... 67
Automatic Door Unlock .................................. 67
Automatic Transmission
Fluid ........................................................ 256
Operation ................................................... 82
B
Battery ........................................................ 273
Run-Down Protection ............................... 121
Before Leaving on a Long Trip .................... 216
Brake
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ................. 195
Emergencies ............................................ 197
Parking ...................................................... 86
System Inspection .................................... 352
System Warning Light .............................. 134
384
Brakes ........................................................ 270
Braking ....................................................... 194
Braking in Emergencies ............................... 197
Break-In, New Vehicle ................................... 76
Bulb Replacement ....................................... 280
Back-Up Lamps ....................................... 282
Front Turn Signal, Parking and
Fog Lamps ........................................... 281
Halogen Bulbs ......................................... 280
Headlamps ............................................... 280
License Plate Lamps ................................ 282
Replacement Bulbs .................................. 283
Taillamps, Turn Signal, and Stoplamps ..... 281
Buying New Tires ........................................ 296
C
California Fuel ............................................. 238
California Proposition 65 Warning ................ 236
Canadian Owners ........................................... 3
Capacities and Specifications ...................... 332
Carbon Monoxide .................. 68, 91, 220, 231
Care of
Safety Belts ............................................. 317
Your CD Player ........................................ 187
Your CDs ................................................. 187
CD, MP3 ..................................................... 176
Center Console Storage Area ........................ 99
Chains, Tire ................................................. 302
Charging System Light ................................ 134
Check
Engine Light ............................................ 138
Checking Things Under the Hood ................ 242
Chemical Paint Spotting .............................. 323
Child Restraints
Child Restraint Systems ............................. 33
Infants and Young Children ........................ 30
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children ....... 37
Older Children ........................................... 27
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Passenger Seat Position ......................... 38
Cigarette Lighter .......................................... 122
Cleaning
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ........ 321
Convertible Top ........................................ 320
Exterior Lamps/Lenses ............................. 318
Fabric/Carpet ........................................... 315
Finish Care .............................................. 319
Inside of Your Vehicle .............................. 314
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and
Other Plastic Surfaces .......................... 317
Leather .................................................... 316
Tires ........................................................ 322
Cleaning (cont.)
Underbody Maintenance ........................... 323
Washing Your Vehicle .............................. 318
Weatherstrips ........................................... 317
Windshield and Wiper Blades ................... 320
Climate Control System ............................... 122
Outlet Adjustment ..................................... 126
Clutch, Hydraulic ......................................... 256
Collision Damage Repair ............................. 375
Content Theft-Deterrent ................................. 72
Control of a Vehicle ..................................... 194
Convertible Top ............................................. 99
Coolant
Engine Temperature Warning Light ........... 137
Low Warning Light ................................... 138
Surge Tank Pressure Cap ........................ 260
Cooling System ........................................... 262
Cruise Control ............................................. 115
Cupholder(s) ................................................. 98
Customer Assistance Information
Courtesy Transportation ........................... 371
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users ......................... 366
Customer Assistance Offices .................... 366
Customer Satisfaction Procedure .............. 362
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ...... 367
385
Customer Assistance Information (cont.)
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors .....................................
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government ..........................
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government ....................
Roadside Assistance Program ..................
Service Publications Ordering
Information ...........................................
379
379
379
368
380
D
Daytime Running Lamps ............................. 119
Defensive Driving ........................................ 190
Delayed Locking ............................................ 66
Disc, MP3 ................................................... 176
Doing Your Own Service Work .................... 236
Door
Automatic Door Lock ................................. 67
Automatic Door Unlock .............................. 67
Delayed Locking ........................................ 66
Manual Door Locks .................................... 65
Power Door Locks ..................................... 66
Driver
Position, Safety Belt ................................... 18
386
Driver Information Center (DIC) ...................
DIC Operation and Displays .....................
DIC Vehicle Personalization .....................
DIC Warnings and Messages ...................
Driving
At Night ...................................................
City ..........................................................
Defensive .................................................
Drunken ...................................................
Freeway ...................................................
Hill and Mountain Roads ..........................
In Rain and on Wet Roads ......................
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out ..........
Winter ......................................................
145
146
152
148
209
214
190
191
215
218
211
225
220
E
Electrical System
Add-On Equipment ...................................
Floor Console Fuse Block ........................
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ......................
Headlamp Wiring .....................................
Power Windows and Other Power
Options .................................................
Underhood Fuse Block .............................
Electronic Stability Control ............................
326
327
326
326
326
329
200
Electronic Stability Control Indicator Light ...... 136
Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter ...................................... 254
Battery ..................................................... 273
Check and Service Engine Soon Light ..... 138
Coolant .................................................... 257
Coolant Temperature Warning Light .......... 137
Cooling System Inspection ....................... 352
Drive Belt Routing .................................... 356
Engine Compartment Overview ................ 244
Exhaust ..................................................... 91
Oil ........................................................... 247
Oil Life System ........................................ 252
Overheating ............................................. 260
Reduced Power Light ............................... 143
Starting ...................................................... 80
Entry/Exit Lighting ....................................... 120
Event Data Recorders (EDR) ...................... 373
Extender, Safety Belt ..................................... 26
F
Filter
Engine Air Cleaner ................................... 254
Finish Damage ............................................ 322
Fixed Mast Antenna .................................... 187
Flashers, Hazard Warning ...........................
Flash-to-Pass ..............................................
Flat Tire ......................................................
Fluid
Automatic Transmission ............................
Manual Transmission ................................
Power Steering ........................................
Windshield Washer ..................................
Fog Lamps ..................................................
Fuel ............................................................
Additives ..................................................
California Fuel ..........................................
Filling a Portable Fuel Container ..............
Filling Your Tank ......................................
Fuels in Foreign Countries .......................
Gage .......................................................
Gasoline Octane ......................................
Gasoline Specifications ............................
Low Warning Light ...................................
System Inspection ....................................
Fuses
Floor Console Fuse Block ........................
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ......................
Underhood Fuse Block .............................
110
113
302
256
256
268
269
120
237
238
238
242
240
239
144
237
237
145
351
327
326
329
387
G
Gage
Fuel ......................................................... 144
Speedometer ........................................... 129
Tachometer .............................................. 129
Gasoline
Octane ..................................................... 237
Specifications ........................................... 237
Glove Box ..................................................... 98
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program .......... 367
I
H
Hazard Warning Flashers ............................
Headlamp Wiring .........................................
Headlamps ......................................... 118,
Bulb Replacement ....................................
Daytime Running Lamps ..........................
Flash-to-Pass ...........................................
Front Turn Signal, Parking and
Fog Lamps ...........................................
Halogen Bulbs .........................................
High/Low Beam Changer .........................
On Reminder ...........................................
Heater .........................................................
388
Highbeam On Light ..................................... 143
Highway Hypnosis ....................................... 217
Hill and Mountain Roads ............................. 218
Hood
Checking Things Under ............................ 242
Release ................................................... 243
Horn ............................................................ 110
How to Use This Manual ................................ 4
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............... 18
Hydraulic Clutch .......................................... 256
110
326
280
280
119
113
281
280
112
119
122
Ignition Positions ........................................... 77
Infants and Young Children, Restraints .......... 30
Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................... 292
Inflator Kit, Tire ........................................... 303
Inspection
Brake System .......................................... 352
Engine Cooling System ............................ 352
Exhaust System ....................................... 351
Fuel System ............................................ 351
Part C - Periodic Maintenance .................. 351
Steering and Suspension ......................... 351
Throttle System ........................................ 352
Instrument Panel
Overview .................................................. 108
Instrument Panel (I/P)
Brightness ................................................ 120
Cluster ..................................................... 128
J
Jump Starting .............................................. 274
K
Keyless Entry System ................................... 61
Keys ............................................................. 60
L
Labeling, Tire Sidewall ................................. 286
Lamps
Battery Run-Down Protection ................... 121
Fog .......................................................... 120
Mirror Reading ......................................... 120
LATCH System
Child Restraints ......................................... 37
Latches, Seatback ......................................... 11
License Plate Lamps ................................... 282
Lift Seat, Power ............................................ 12
Light
Airbag Readiness ..................................... 131
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning ............. 135
Brake System Warning ............................. 134
Charging System ..................................... 134
Electronic Stability Control ........................ 136
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning ....... 137
Highbeam On .......................................... 143
Low Coolant Warning ............................... 138
Low Fuel Warning .................................... 145
Malfunction Indicator ................................ 138
Oil Pressure ............................................. 142
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............ 132
Passenger Safety Belt Reminder .............. 130
Reduced Engine Power ............................ 143
Safety Belt Reminder ............................... 130
Security ................................................... 143
Service Vehicle Soon ............................... 144
Traction Control System ........................... 136
Trunk Ajar ................................................ 144
Lighting
Entry/Exit ................................................. 120
Limited-Slip Rear Axle ................................. 200
389
Loading Your Vehicle ................................... 226
Locks
Automatic Door Lock ................................. 67
Automatic Door Unlock .............................. 67
Delayed Locking ........................................ 66
Manual Door .............................................. 65
Power Door ............................................... 66
Loss of Control ........................................... 208
Low Coolant Warning Light .......................... 138
Low Fuel Warning Light ............................... 145
M
Maintenance Schedule
At Each Fuel Fill ......................................
At Least Once a Month ............................
At Least Once a Year ..............................
At Least Twice a Year ..............................
Brake System Inspection ..........................
Engine Cooling System Inspection ...........
Exhaust System Inspection ......................
Fuel System Inspection ............................
How This Section is Organized ................
Introduction ..............................................
Maintenance Requirements ......................
390
346
346
348
347
352
352
351
351
334
334
334
Maintenance Schedule (cont.)
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts .... 355
Part A - Scheduled Maintenance
Services ............................................... 336
Part B - Owner Checks and Services ....... 346
Part C - Periodic Maintenance
Inspections ........................................... 351
Part D - Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants ............................................. 353
Part E - Maintenance Record .................... 357
Scheduled Maintenance ........................... 337
Steering and Suspension Inspection ......... 351
Throttle System Inspection ....................... 352
Using ....................................................... 336
Your Vehicle and the Environment ............ 334
Malfunction Indicator Light ........................... 138
Manual Seats .................................................. 8
Manual Transmission
Fluid ........................................................ 256
Operation ................................................... 85
Manual Windows ........................................... 71
Message
DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 148
Mirror Reading Lamps ................................. 120
Mirrors
Manual Rearview Mirror ............................. 93
Manual Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ........ 93
Outside Manual Mirror ............................... 93
Outside Power Mirrors ............................... 94
MP3 ............................................................ 176
MyGMLink.com ............................................ 365
N
New Vehicle Break-In .................................... 76
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..... 355
O
Odometer .................................................... 129
Off-Road Recovery ...................................... 206
Oil
Engine ..................................................... 247
Pressure Light .......................................... 142
Oil, Engine Oil Life System ......................... 252
Older Children, Restraints ............................. 27
Online Owner Center ................................... 365
OnStar® System, see OnStar® Manual .......... 94
Other Warning Devices ................................ 110
Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 126
Outlet(s), Accessory Power .......................... 121
Outside
Manual Mirror ............................................ 93
Power Mirrors ............................................ 94
Owners, Canadian .......................................... 3
P
Paint, Damage ............................................ 322
Park (P)
Shifting Into ............................................... 87
Shifting Out of ........................................... 89
Parking
Brake ......................................................... 86
Over Things That Burn .............................. 90
Parking Your Vehicle ..................................... 89
Part A - Scheduled Maintenance Services ..... 336
Part B - Owner Checks and Services ........... 346
Part C - Periodic Maintenance
Inspections ............................................... 351
Part D - Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants ................................................ 353
Part E - Maintenance Record ....................... 357
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............... 132
391
Passenger Position, Safety Belts ................... 26
Passenger Sensing System ........................... 50
Passing ....................................................... 206
PASS-Key® III+ ............................................. 74
PASS-Key® III+ Operation ............................. 74
Power
Accessory Outlet(s) .................................. 121
Door Locks ................................................ 66
Electrical System ..................................... 326
Lift Seat ..................................................... 12
Reduced Engine Light .............................. 143
Retained Accessory (RAP) ......................... 80
Steering Fluid .......................................... 268
Windows .................................................... 71
Pretensioners, Safety Belt ............................. 26
Q
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts ............................................... 17
392
R
Radios ........................................................ 157
Care of Your CD Player ........................... 187
Care of Your CDs .................................... 187
Radio with CD ................................ 161, 166
Setting the Time .............................. 158, 159
Theft-Deterrent ......................................... 185
Understanding Reception ......................... 186
Rear Axle .................................................... 279
Limited-Slip .............................................. 200
Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ........................ 93
Rearview Mirrors ........................................... 93
Reclining Seatbacks ........................................ 9
Recreational Vehicle Towing ........................ 231
Reduced Engine Power Light ...................... 143
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System ............ 61
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System, Operation ..................................... 62
Replacement Bulbs ..................................... 283
Reporting Safety Defects
Canadian Government ............................. 379
General Motors ........................................ 379
United States Government ....................... 379
Restraint System Check
Checking the Restraint Systems ................. 56
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash ......................................... 57
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ................. 80
Roadside
Assistance Program ................................. 368
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .............. 225
Routing, Engine Drive Belt .......................... 356
Running the Engine While Parked ................. 92
S
Safety Belt
Passenger Reminder Light ....................... 130
Pretensioners ............................................. 26
Reminder Light ........................................ 130
Safety Belts
Care of .................................................... 317
Driver Position ........................................... 18
Safety Belts (cont.)
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............ 18
Passenger Position .................................... 26
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts ............................................ 17
Safety Belt Extender .................................. 26
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ............. 25
Safety Belts Are for Everyone .................... 12
Safety Warnings and Symbols ......................... 4
Scheduled Maintenance ............................... 337
Seatback Latches .......................................... 11
Seats
Manual ........................................................ 8
Power Lift Seat .......................................... 12
Reclining Seatbacks ..................................... 9
Seatback Latches ...................................... 11
Securing a Child Restraint
Passenger Seat Position ............................ 38
Security Light .............................................. 143
Service ........................................................ 235
Accessories and Modifications .................. 235
Adding Equipment to the Outside
of Your Vehicle ..................................... 237
California Proposition 65 Warning ............. 236
393
Service (cont.)
Doing Your Own Work ............................. 236
Engine Soon Light ................................... 138
Publications Ordering Information ............. 380
Vehicle Soon Light ................................... 144
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ......... 54
Setting the Time ................................. 158, 159
Sheet Metal Damage ................................... 322
Shifting Into Park (P) ..................................... 87
Shifting Out of Park (P) ................................. 89
Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .................. 112
Specifications, Capacities ............................ 332
Speedometer ............................................... 129
Starting Your Engine ..................................... 80
Steering ...................................................... 203
Steering and Suspension Inspection ............ 351
Steering Wheel Controls, Audio ................... 185
Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel .......................... 111
Storage Areas
Center Console Storage Area .................... 99
Cupholder(s) .............................................. 98
Glove Box ................................................. 98
Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow ............... 224
Sun Visors .................................................... 71
394
T
Tachometer ................................................. 129
Taillamps
Turn Signal, and Stoplamps ..................... 281
Theft-Deterrent, Radio ................................. 185
Theft-Deterrent Systems ................................ 72
Content Theft-Deterrent .............................. 72
PASS-Key® III+ .......................................... 74
PASS-Key® III+ Operation .......................... 74
Throttle System Inspection .......................... 352
Tilt Wheel .................................................... 111
Tires ........................................................... 284
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels,
Cleaning ............................................... 321
Buying New Tires ..................................... 296
Chains ..................................................... 302
Cleaning .................................................. 322
Different Size ........................................... 297
If a Tire Goes Flat ................................... 302
Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................ 292
Inspection and Rotation ............................ 293
Tire Inflator Kit ......................................... 303
Tire Sidewall Labeling .............................. 286
Tires (cont.)
Tire Terminology and Definitions ............... 289
Uniform Tire Quality Grading .................... 298
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ........... 299
Wheel Replacement ................................. 299
When It Is Time for New Tires ................. 295
Winter Tires ............................................. 285
Towing
Recreational Vehicle ................................. 231
Towing a Trailer ....................................... 231
Your Vehicle ............................................. 231
Traction
Control System (TCS) .............................. 198
Limited-Slip Rear Axle .............................. 200
Traction Control System Warning Light ........ 136
Transmission
Fluid, Automatic ....................................... 256
Fluid, Manual ........................................... 256
Transmission Operation, Automatic ................ 82
Transmission Operation, Manual .................... 85
Trunk ............................................................ 68
Trunk Ajar Light ........................................... 144
Turn and Lane-Change Signals ................... 112
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .................... 111
U
Understanding Radio Reception ................... 186
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ....................... 298
V
Vehicle
Control ..................................................... 194
Damage Warnings ....................................... 5
Loading .................................................... 226
Parking Your .............................................. 89
Service Soon Light ................................... 144
Symbols ...................................................... 5
Vehicle Data Collection and Event
Data Recorders ........................................ 373
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) .......................................... 325
Service Parts Identification Label .............. 325
Vehicle Personalization
DIC .......................................................... 152
Ventilation Adjustment .................................. 126
Visors ........................................................... 71
395
W
Warning Lights, Gages and
Indicators ................................................. 127
Warnings
DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 148
Hazard Warning Flashers ......................... 110
Other Warning Devices ............................ 110
Safety and Symbols ..................................... 4
Vehicle Damage .......................................... 5
Wheels
Alignment and Tire Balance ..................... 299
Different Size ........................................... 297
Replacement ............................................ 299
Windows ....................................................... 70
Manual ...................................................... 71
Power ........................................................ 71
396
Windshield
Washer ....................................................
Washer Fluid ...........................................
Wiper Blade Replacement ........................
Wiper Blades, Cleaning ............................
Wipers .....................................................
Winter Driving .............................................
Winter Tires .................................................
114
269
283
320
113
220
285
X
XM Radio Messages ................................... 183
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ......... 187
Y
Your Vehicle and the Environment ............... 334